JP2019213702A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which can improve amusement of games and of which presentation effect is enhanced.SOLUTION: A presentation control CPU 120, when a selection of character A is received on a first selection screen in an SU prediction, causes a second item of a pattern X to be in an initial selection state on a second selection screen; when a selection of character B is received on the second selection screen, causes a second item of a pattern Y to be in an initial selection state on the second selection screen; and when a selection of character C is received on the first selection screen, causes a second item of a pattern Z to be in an initial selection state on the second selection screen. Further, when a super ready-to-win A is to occur, a friendly character is displayed on an image display device and a ready-to-win presentation is started. When a predetermined time elapses after the ready-to-win presentation is started, a title of the super ready-to-win A is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device and sound corresponding to the title name of the ready-to-win is outputted from speakers and thereby the title of the super ready-to-win A is notified.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 9-23

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of playing a game.

  For example, in a gaming machine that outputs music at an appropriate timing such as during a so-called big hit gaming state, the player can select a music and can select a player during the big hit according to the number of consecutive big hits. Some songs increase, and when the number of songs increases, there is one in which the initial position of the cursor when the selection screen is displayed is matched with the option corresponding to the added song (for example, Patent Document 1) reference).

JP 2010-259465 A

  In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a problem that the selection of music becomes monotonous, and it is difficult to improve amusement in gaming.

  The present invention has been made in view of such a problem, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a game entertainment.

In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, a gaming machine according to a first aspect of the present invention includes:
A gaming machine capable of performing a game (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1),
An effect selection unit (for example, for effect control) that displays the items (for example, the first item and the second item) corresponding to each of the plurality of effects of different types so that the player can select the effect. CPU 120 displays a first selection screen or a second selection screen in 111SGS435, 111SGS466, or 111SGS467);
Effect executing means capable of executing the effect received by the effect selecting means (for example, a part in which effect control CPU 120 executes a battle notice or an SU notice in the notice effect processing of 111SGS305);
A specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first selected effect);
With
The display mode when the effect selection means receives the selection of an item differs between the case where the specific effect is executed in the first mode and the case where the specific effect is executed in the second mode. When the CPU 120 receives the selection of the character A in the first selection effect of the SU notice, the second item of the pattern X is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen, and the selection of the character B is received in the first selection effect. The second item of the pattern Y is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen, and if the selection of the character C is accepted in the first selection effect, the second item of the pattern Z is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen. The part that executes the processing of 111SGS460 to 111SGS466 in the notice effect processing)
further,
Suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect) that suggests that the player is controlled to be in an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player;
Title notifying means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect,
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 10-2 (D) and (F)).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the display mode of the item changes according to the mode of the specific effect, so that interest is improved. In addition, the effect of production can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of means 2 of the present invention is the gaming machine described in means 1,
The effect selection means,
A first item (for example, an item corresponding to pattern X) having a higher relevance to the specific effect (for example, character A) of the first aspect than a relevance for the specific effect (for example, characters B, C) of the second aspect. )When,
A second item (for example, an item corresponding to patterns Y and Z) having a higher relevance to the specific effect of the second aspect than the relevance to the specific effect of the first aspect;
Can be selected and displayed,
When the specific effect is performed in the first mode, the first item is displayed in a mode in which the first item is selected regardless of the operation of the player,
When the specific effect is executed in the second mode, the second item is displayed in a mode in which the second item is selected regardless of the operation of the player.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute an effect according to the interest of the player.

The gaming machine according to the third aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to the second aspect,
The specific effect execution means is capable of executing the specific effect in an effect performed in accordance with an item displayed in a manner selected without being operated by a player (for example, the effect control CPU 120 is configured to execute SU When the selection of the character A is received on the first selection screen of the notice and the selection of the effect pattern X item in the initial selection state is received on the second selection screen, the character A appears in the SU production step 4)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the player's willingness to make a selection can be improved.

The gaming machine of the means 4 of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the means 1 to 3,
The effect executing means is capable of executing an effect (for example, a notice effect such as an SU notice) in a different manner depending on whether or not an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) advantageous to the player is obtained,
In the effect performed according to the item displayed in a manner selected by the player regardless of the operation of the player, the specific effect execution means may have a higher ratio in the advantageous state than in the non-advantageous state. (For example, when the effect control CPU 120 executes the SU effect based on the effect pattern set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen in the SU notice, when the big hit is greater than the loss case) Characters A to C appear at a high rate in Step 4)
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the specific effect will be executed.

The gaming machine according to the fifth aspect of the present invention is the gaming machine according to any one of the first to fourth aspects,
The specific effect execution means executes the specific effect (for example, a title notification effect) in a first effect state (for example, a reach effect or the like),
The effect selection means can accept selection of an effect (for example, a song) in a second effect state (for example, a big hit effect) that shifts after the end of the first effect state (see FIGS. 22 to 25).
It is characterized by that.
According to this feature, the mode of the specific effect performed in the first effect state is reflected in the selection of the effect performed in the second effect state different from the first effect state, and accordingly, according to the progress of the game. Directing can be performed smoothly.

  Further, embodiments for carrying out the invention described below include inventions according to the following means 6 to 13. 2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there has been a gaming machine that performs a title display for notifying the type of the reach effect at the start of the reach effect as disclosed in JP-A-2006-101428. In the conventional gaming machines described above, it is desired to enhance the effect of the game. In view of this point, there is a demand for a game machine capable of enhancing the effect of the game.

In order to achieve the above object, the gaming machine of the means 6 according to another aspect includes:
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state;
Title notifying means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect,
The title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 10-2 (D) and (F)).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect can be enhanced.

The gaming machine of the means 7 is the gaming machine according to the means 6,
The suggestion effect execution means can execute a plurality of types of the suggestion effect,
In a plurality of types of the suggested effects, at least a part of the effects within the predetermined period may be executable in a common mode (for example, FIG. 10-2 (C)).
According to such a configuration, it can be noticed which of the suggestion effects is executed, and the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 8 is the gaming machine according to either the means 6 or the means 7,
At a plurality of execution timings during the suggested effect execution, it is possible to execute a specific effect (for example, an advanced effect or a notice effect) that suggests that the control is performed in the advantageous state,
An execution timing of the specific effect may not be provided during the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the player's expectation can be maintained even after the title is announced.

The gaming machine of the means 9 is the gaming machine according to any of the means 6 to 8,
The suggestion effect execution means executes at least a first suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach A or super reach B) and a second suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect of super reach D or super reach E) as the suggestion effect. Is possible,
In the second suggestion effect, the title notifying means may notify a title corresponding to the second suggestion effect from the start of the second suggestion effect.
According to such a configuration, the notification of the title according to the suggested effect can be executed, so that the effect of the effect is improved.

The gaming machine according to the means 10 is the gaming machine according to the means 9,
The ratio in which the advantageous state is controlled may be higher when the first suggestion effect is executed than when the second suggestion effect is executed.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 11 is the gaming machine according to any of the means 6 to 10,
The suggestion effect execution means may be configured to be able to execute the suggestion effect in an effect mode related to a title notified in the predetermined period.
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 12 is the gaming machine according to any of the means 6 to 11,
Detecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of detecting a player's movement;
Specific display execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) for performing specific display (for example, small button image 31AK043, large button image 31AK047, stick image 31AK051) corresponding to the detection means,
The specific display execution means,
As the specific display, a first specific display (for example, a small button image 31AK043) and a second specific display (for example, a large button image 31AK047, a stick image 31AK051) having a higher advantage for the player than the first specific display are displayed. Is possible,
In the non-valid period of the detection by the detection means, after the first specific display is displayed, the first specific display is changed to the second specific display (for example, FIG. 10-10 (E), FIG. 10-11 (I)). )),
During the valid period of the detection by the detection means, an operation effect using the changed second specific display may be executed (for example, FIGS. 10-11 (J) and (K)).
According to such a configuration, the rendering effect is improved.

The gaming machine of the means 13 is the gaming machine according to any of the means 6 to 12,
As a suggestion display indicating the degree of expectation of control to the advantageous state, a first suggestion display whose display size is the first size (a first size shutter image 31AK061 displayed at the time of the shutter effect shown in FIG. 10-12 (a)). And the like, and a second suggestion display whose display size is the second size (such as a reach title image 31AK062 of the second size displayed at the time of the reach title effect shown in FIG. 10-12 (d)). Means (for example, image display device 5, effect control CPU 120),
The display means,
Plural types of elements having different aspects (elements E1 (banana), element E2 (melon), element E3 (apple), element E4 (watermelon), element E5 (strawberry) shown in FIGS. 10-12 (a) and (d). ) Can be displayed (e.g., the fruit patterns shown in FIGS. 10-12 (a) and (d)).
When displaying either the first suggestion display or the second suggestion display in a pattern including the specific image, a plurality of types of elements are included in both the first suggestion display and the second suggestion display. (Either the shutter image 31AK061 or the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIGS. 10-12 (a) and (d) may be displayed such that the elements E1 to E5 are included).
According to such a configuration, the specific image can be suitably displayed regardless of the display size of the suggestion display. Thereby, it is possible to accurately convey that the specific image is displayed.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value in a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control relating to the provision of a game medium. The invention according to the means A1 to A9 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine which appropriately executes control relating to the provision of game media.

The gaming machine of the means A1
A gaming device capable of executing processing relating to valuable values (remaining prepaid balance, ball holding, ball storage, etc.) (processing related to ball lending consuming prepaid balance, ball lending consuming ball holding, ball lending consuming ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving a signal (a VL signal, a BRDY signal, a BRQ signal, etc.) output from the (card unit 21TM050),
Providing means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for providing a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming machine;
A specific control unit (step S21TM1690 or the like that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode;
With
When controlled in the setting change mode, application of a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming device is restricted. (1. The game control microcomputer 100 when controlled in the setting change mode) Does not turn on the connection confirmation signal (does not output it to the payout control board 21TM037), 2. When the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command while being controlled to the setting change mode, the payout control micro 2. The computer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. 3. When the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame opening sensor to be in the open state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. No, 4. When the game is being controlled in the setting change mode, Since the microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command (because the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection confirmation command), even if the dispensing control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the BRQ signal is on, the EXS signal is output. Do not turn it on.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when being controlled to the setting change mode, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of the game medium.
For example, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, when the power switch 21TM055 is operated and the operating voltage is supplied to the main board 11, the game control microcomputer 100 turns on the lock switch 21TM051. In addition, based on the fact that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in the ON state, control is performed to a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. During the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled, the connection confirmation signal is not output to the payout control board 21TM037 because the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 is not executed, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 Do not perform ball rental.

Further, as a gaming machine of means AA for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming device capable of executing processing relating to valuable values (remaining prepaid balance, ball holding, ball storage, etc.) (processing related to ball lending consuming prepaid balance, ball lending consuming ball holding, ball lending consuming ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving a signal (a VL signal, a BRDY signal, a BRQ signal, etc.) output from the (card unit 21TM050),
Providing means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for providing a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming machine;
A specific control unit (step S21TM1690 or the like that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode;
With
When controlled in the setting change mode, application of a game medium based on a signal output from the gaming device is restricted (1. When the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode, 1. The connection confirmation signal is not turned on (not output to the payout control board 21TM037), and the payout control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled in the setting change mode. 2. The 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. 3. When the gaming machine frame opening sensor detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is open, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. 4. When the game is being controlled in the setting change mode, Since the computer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command (because the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not receive the connection confirmation command), even if the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the BRQ signal is on, the EXS signal is output. Do not turn it on.),
further,
An effect selection unit (for example, for effect control) that displays the items (for example, the first item and the second item) corresponding to each of the plurality of effects of different types so that the player can select the effect. CPU 120 displays a first selection screen or a second selection screen in 111SGS435, 111SGS466, or 111SGS467);
Effect executing means capable of executing the effect received by the effect selecting means (for example, a part in which effect control CPU 120 executes a battle notice or an SU notice in the notice effect processing of 111SGS305);
A specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first selected effect);
With
The display mode when the effect selection means receives the selection of an item differs between the case where the specific effect is executed in the first mode and the case where the specific effect is executed in the second mode (for example, for the effect control). When the CPU 120 receives the selection of the character A in the first selection effect of the SU notice, the second item of the pattern X is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen, and the selection of the character B is received in the first selection effect. The second item of the pattern Y is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen, and if the selection of the character C is accepted in the first selection effect, the second item of the pattern Z is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen. The part that executes the processing of 111SGS460 to 111SGS466 in the notice effect processing)
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this feature, it is possible to execute appropriate control regarding the provision of the game medium when the game mode is controlled to the setting change mode. Also, since the display mode of the items changes according to the mode of the specific effect, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of the means A2 is
The gaming machine of the means A1,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine;
The game control means includes a setting confirmation mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The provision means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) can provide a game medium when a special signal (connection confirmation signal) is input from the game control means,
The game control means does not output the special signal when being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode (the serial communication circuit setting process of step S21TM1480 outputting the connection confirmation signal Will be executed after exiting the mode and after exiting the setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent a game medium from being provided when the game machine is controlled to any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of the means A3 is
The gaming machine of the means A1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The providing means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) outputs a first predetermined signal (PRDY signal) to the gaming device, and based on the input of the first predetermined signal, the gaming device Game media can be provided based on the input of the second predetermined signal (BRDY signal) output from
The first predetermined signal is not output when being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (1. The PRDY signal is not turned on when the connection confirmation signal is not input; When the command is not received, the PRDY signal is not turned on),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent a game medium from being provided when the game machine is controlled to any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A4 is
The gaming machine of the means A1,
Game control means (game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process) having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling the progress of the game in the gaming machine;
At least one of the game control means and the giving means (for example, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) has an open state detecting means (an open state detecting means (open state detecting means) for detecting an open state in which a gaming machine frame or a door frame corresponding to the gaming machine is opened. A gaming machine frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the gaming machine frame 3 is open, and a door frame opening sensor capable of detecting that the glass door frame 3a is open. Door frame opening sensor 21TM300) is provided,
Regardless of whether or not the setting change mode is controlled, the application of the game medium is restricted when the open state is detected (when the game machine frame 3 is in the open state, the glass door frame 3a Does not turn on the PRDY signal when is in the open state),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, when the gaming machine frame or the door frame is opened in order to control the setting change mode, the provision of the game medium can be limited.

The game machine of means A5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A4,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The providing means outputs a provision signal in response to input of a provision request signal from the gaming device (a BRQ signal is turned on) (turns an EXS signal on) and outputs the provision signal. When an application command signal output from the gaming device according to the input is input (when the card unit 21TM050 that has detected the ON of the EXS signal turns off the BRQ signal), the game medium is applied,
When controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the application preparation signal is not output even if the application request signal is input (the EXS signal is turned on even if the BRQ signal is detected on). do not do),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent a game medium from being provided when the game machine is controlled to any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of the means A6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A5,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) ) When 21TM052 is ON), control to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is turned on when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) ) When 21TM052 is off), control to the setting confirmation mode is performed.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of means A7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A6,
When the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed),
After the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is performed based on the end of the control of the setting change mode (after the setting value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029), the gaming state is initialized. (The letter "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended and the gaming state has been initialized.

The game machine of means A8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A7,
A game control means having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling to a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in response to being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control relating to notification in accordance with the command (displays “setting is being changed” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and when a setting confirmation mode command is received). "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible for the clerk or the like of the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means A9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means A1 to the means A8,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the game mode is controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game proceeds to the setting confirmation mode. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (if controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the game state.
The correspondence between the means A2 to A9 and the means A1 can be applied to the correspondence between the means A2 to A9 and the means AA.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value in a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control based on a signal output from the gaming machine. The invention according to means B1 to means B7 has been made in view of the above situation, and is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control based on a signal output from a gaming device.

The gaming machine of the means B1 is
A gaming device capable of executing processing relating to valuable values (remaining prepaid balance, ball holding, ball storage, etc.) (processing related to ball lending consuming prepaid balance, ball lending consuming ball holding, ball lending consuming ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving a signal (a VL signal, a BRDY signal, a BRQ signal, etc.) output from the (card unit 21TM050),
Predetermined control means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for executing predetermined control (ball lending) based on a signal output from the gaming machine;
A specific control unit (step S21TM1690 or the like that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the set value,
It is possible to execute a predetermined control based on a signal output from the gaming machine regardless of whether or not the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode (the gaming control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode). Even during the period, the connection confirmation signal is turned on, and the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command can be transmitted. When the connection confirmation signal is on, the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command are received. The microcomputer 21TM370 can execute ball lending regardless of whether or not the period is controlled to the setting change mode.)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to appropriately execute the predetermined control based on the signal output from the gaming device, and it is possible to avoid a control burden when the predetermined control is not executed when being controlled in the setting change mode. .

Further, as a game machine of means BA for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902 A,
A gaming device capable of executing processing relating to valuable values (remaining prepaid balance, ball holding, ball storage, etc.) (processing related to ball lending consuming prepaid balance, ball lending consuming ball holding, ball lending consuming ball storage, etc.) A gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of receiving a signal (a VL signal, a BRDY signal, a BRQ signal, etc.) output from the (card unit 21TM050),
Predetermined control means (payout control microcomputer 21TM370 for controlling the payout motor 21TM289) for executing predetermined control (ball lending) based on a signal output from the gaming machine;
A specific control unit (step S21TM1690 or the like that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the set value,
It is possible to execute a predetermined control based on a signal output from the gaming machine regardless of whether or not the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode (the gaming control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode). Even during the period, the connection confirmation signal is turned on, and the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command can be transmitted. When the connection confirmation signal is on, the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command are received. The microcomputer 21TM370 can execute ball lending regardless of whether or not the period is controlled to the setting change mode.)
further,
An effect selection unit (for example, for effect control) that displays the items (for example, the first item and the second item) corresponding to each of the plurality of effects of different types so that the player can select the effect. CPU 120 displays a first selection screen or a second selection screen in 111SGS435, 111SGS466, or 111SGS467);
Effect executing means capable of executing the effect received by the effect selecting means (for example, a part in which effect control CPU 120 executes a battle notice or an SU notice in the notice effect processing of 111SGS305);
A specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first selected effect);
With
The display mode when the effect selection means receives the selection of an item differs between the case where the specific effect is executed in the first mode and the case where the specific effect is executed in the second mode (for example, for the effect control). When the CPU 120 receives the selection of the character A in the first selection effect of the SU notice, the second item of the pattern X is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen, and the selection of the character B is received in the first selection effect. The second item of the pattern Y is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen, and if the selection of the character C is accepted in the first selection effect, the second item of the pattern Z is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen. The part that executes the processing of 111SGS460 to 111SGS466 in the notice effect processing)
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this feature, the predetermined control based on the signal output from the gaming device can be appropriately executed, and it is possible to avoid a control burden when the predetermined control is not executed when being controlled in the setting change mode. it can. Also, since the display mode of the items changes according to the mode of the specific effect, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of the means B2 is
The gaming machine of means B1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
When the predetermined control is being executed, the predetermined control is interrupted based on the occurrence of a predetermined event (e.g., a power cut-off). After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the predetermined control is resumed (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 suspends the ball lending when the power is cut off during the ball lending, and resumes the power supply after the power supply is restarted. When the game control microcomputer 100 shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending is resumed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends without immediately resuming the ball lending),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, even when the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the occurrence of the predetermined event, the predetermined control can be appropriately executed.

The gaming machine of the means B3 is
The gaming machine of means B1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
If the control is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode while the predetermined control is being executed, the predetermined control is terminated (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines that the power is cut off during the ball lending operation). When it occurs, the ball lending is forcibly terminated (stopped), and the ball lending is not resumed when the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored thereafter, and the setting change is not performed. Ball rental is not resumed even after the end of the mode or setting confirmation mode),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the control for restarting the predetermined control after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode becomes unnecessary, and the predetermined control can be simplified.

The game machine of means B4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch 21TM052 is ON). Control) to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch 21TM052 is OFF). Control) to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the condition that is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The game machine of the means B5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B4,
When the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the game information is initialized (when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM is cleared in step S21TM1410),
When the set value is changed in the setting change mode, after the change of the set value is notified (after the set value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029), it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (display). The character "C" is displayed on the monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended and the gaming state has been initialized.

The gaming machine of the means B6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B5,
A game control means having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling to a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in response to being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control relating to notification in accordance with the command (displays “setting is being changed” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and when a setting confirmation mode command is received). "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible for the clerk or the like of the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means B7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means B1 to the means B6,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the game mode is controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game proceeds to the setting confirmation mode. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (if controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the game state.
The correspondence between the means B2 to B7 and the means B1 described above can be applied to the correspondence between the means B2 to B7 and the means BA.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value in a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), when changing a set value, it is necessary to appropriately execute control when a game medium passes through a specific area. The invention according to the means C1 to C6 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine that appropriately executes control when a game medium passes through a specific area.

The game machine of the means C1 is
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific areas (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening), specific control (special value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for big hit determination is different) corresponding to the specific control (special control) A specific control means (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a process such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing a big hit determination process or the like in a symbol process process;
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the set value,
When the game medium is controlled in the setting change mode, the specific control is not executed even when the game medium passes through the specific area (the control is performed in the setting change mode before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Accordingly, during the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the setting value may be changed.

Further, as a gaming machine of means CA for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP 2010-200902A,
Based on the fact that the game medium has passed through the specific areas (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening), specific control (special value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for big hit determination is different) corresponding to the specific control (special control) A specific control means (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a process such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing a big hit determination process or the like in a symbol process process;
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the set value,
When controlled in the setting change mode, the specific control is not executed even when the game medium passes through the specific area (the control is changed to the setting change mode before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Thereby, during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode, the special symbol process process (small hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
further,
An effect selection unit (for example, for effect control) that displays the items (for example, the first item and the second item) corresponding to each of the plurality of effects of different types so that the player can select the effect. CPU 120 displays a first selection screen or a second selection screen in 111SGS435, 111SGS466, or 111SGS467);
Effect executing means capable of executing the effect received by the effect selecting means (for example, a part in which effect control CPU 120 executes a battle notice or an SU notice in the notice effect processing of 111SGS305);
A specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first selected effect);
With
The display mode when the effect selection means receives the selection of an item differs between the case where the specific effect is executed in the first mode and the case where the specific effect is executed in the second mode (for example, for the effect control). When the CPU 120 receives the selection of the character A in the first selection effect of the SU notice, the second item of the pattern X is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen, and the selection of the character B is received in the first selection effect. The second item of the pattern Y is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen, and if the selection of the character C is accepted in the first selection effect, the second item of the pattern Z is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen. The part that executes the processing of 111SGS460 to 111SGS466 in the notice effect processing)
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the setting value may be changed. Also, since the display mode of the items changes according to the mode of the specific effect, the interest is improved.

  It should be noted that, in the case where the specific effect is executed in the first mode and the case where the specific effect is executed in the second mode, the display mode when the effect selecting means receives the selection of the item is basically different, and Exceptionally, even when the specific effect is executed in the first mode, the display mode is most likely to appear when the specific effect is executed in the second mode, or when the specific effect is executed in the second mode. However, the display mode that is most likely to appear when executed in the first mode may be used, or the setting value may be estimated based on the appearance ratio of the display mode that exceptionally appears. That is, a plurality of display modes are provided when the specific effect is executed in the first mode (or the second mode), and the plurality of display modes are selected using a selection table or the like in which the selection ratio of each display mode is different depending on the set value. , And when the specific effect is executed in the first mode (or the second mode), the display mode when the effect selecting means receives the selection of the item may be the selected display mode. Good. For example, when the character A (or the characters B and C) is selected as the first item in the SU announcement effect shown in FIGS. )), The pattern X (or pattern Y, Z) at a rate of 80%, the pattern Y (or pattern X, Z) at a rate of 10%, and the pattern Z (or pattern X, Y), set value 2 (intermediate setting), the pattern X (or pattern Y, Z) at a rate of 85%, the pattern Y (or pattern X, Z), 7 at a rate of 7.5% as the initial selection state In the case of a pattern Z (or pattern X, Y) at a rate of .5% and a set value of 3 (setting which is most disadvantageous to the player), a pattern X (or pattern Y, Z) at a rate of 90% is initially selected. Using a selection table set so that the pattern Y (or pattern X, Z) at a rate of 5% and the pattern Z (or pattern X, Y) at a rate of 5%, the effect selection means If the display mode at the time of receiving the selection is determined, the pattern Y or the pattern Z (or the pattern Z (or the pattern Z) is initially selected even though the character A (or the character B or the character C) is selected as the first item. It can be inferred that the higher the frequency of occurrence of X, pattern Z, pattern X, and pattern Y), the higher the possibility of setting value 1. With such a configuration, the relationship between the specific effect mode and the display mode when the effect selecting unit receives the selection of the item is rich in change, and the set value is estimated based on the appearance ratio of the exceptional display mode. Since an opportunity can be given to the player, the entertainment interest of the game can be improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the execution mode (character display) of the specific effect and the display in the display mode when the effect selecting means receives the selection of the item are changed in the case where the setting value is changed by the setting means. Since the storage contents of the RAM 102 are initialized (cleared) in the process, the display of the image display device 5 is the display of the initial screen, but even if the setting value is changed by the setting means, the storage contents of the RAM 102 are changed. The state before the setting value is changed may be retained without being initialized (cleared). With this configuration, when the execution mode of the specific effect (character display) and the display mode when the effect selection unit receives the selection of the item are displayed, the display mode is changed even after the setting value is changed. It can be displayed.

The game machine of the means C2 is
The game machine of means C1,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means determines that the setting change condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch 21TM052 is ON). Control) to the setting change mode,
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the setting confirmation condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch 21TM052 is OFF). Control) to the setting confirmation mode,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to control to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode according to the condition that is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started.

The gaming machine of the means C3 is
A game machine of means C1 or means C2,
When the game mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (when the game mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the RAM is cleared in step S21TM1410).
After the notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is performed based on the end of the control of the setting change mode (after the setting value is blinked on the display monitor 21TM029), the gaming state is initialized. (The letter "C" is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended and the gaming state has been initialized.

The game machine of means C4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C3,
A game control means having the specific control means and the setting change mode control means, and controlling the progress of a game in the gaming machine (a game control microcomputer 100 executing a game control timer interrupt process);
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for controlling the execution of the effect,
The game control means further includes a setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling to a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in response to being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes control relating to notification in accordance with the command (displays “setting is being changed” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and when a setting confirmation mode command is received). "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the image display device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible for the clerk or the like of the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means C5 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C4,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
If the game medium is controlled in the setting confirmation mode, the specific control is not executed even if the game medium passes through the specific area (the control is performed in the setting confirmation mode before the timer interrupt setting (step S21TM1500)). Accordingly, during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the special symbol process process (big hit determination process) of step S21TM1690 is not executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to prevent the specific control from being executed when the setting value is confirmed.

The gaming machine of the means C6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means C1 to the means C5,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The setting change mode control means controls the setting change mode based on a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 at power-on) and an initialization operation (operation of turning on the clear switch 21TM052 at power-on). ,
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode based on the shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on),
Along with the control in the setting change mode, the gaming state of the gaming machine is initialized (if the game mode is controlled in the setting change mode, the RAM clear processing in step S21TM1410 is executed), and the game proceeds to the setting confirmation mode. As a result of the control, the gaming state of the gaming machine is not initialized (if controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the RAM clearing process of step S21TM1410 is performed only when NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Is executed),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode to control, and can also select whether or not to initialize the game state.
The correspondence between the means C2 to C6 and the means C1 described above can be applied to the correspondence between the means C2 to C6 and the means CA.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value in a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. In a gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it is necessary to execute an appropriate process when power supply is stopped when changing a set value. The invention according to the means D1 to D5 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the invention is to provide a gaming machine that executes an appropriate process when the power supply is stopped.

The gaming machine of the means D1 is
A specific control unit (step S21TM1690 or the like that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode;
Setting check mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) controllable to a setting check mode for notifying the set value in a checkable manner;
Setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the setting values are stored) for storing the setting values,
The setting change mode control means determines that the first condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is satisfied (the clear switch ( The setting change mode) based on the setting change switch 21TM052 being ON),
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the first condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is not satisfied (clear). Switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in an OFF state) to control the setting confirmation mode,
The set value is determined based on a specific operation in the setting change mode (operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state),
The setting value storage means stores a setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode when the setting change mode is being controlled (the setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the transition to the setting change mode). The set value that has been set is continuously stored without being changed with the transition to the setting change mode),
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (the power is cut off without performing the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), and thereafter If the setting check mode is controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the set value stored in the set value storage unit is notified (control to the setting check mode after power-on). In this case, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 before the transition to the setting confirmation mode).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can appropriately set the set value when the power supply is stopped when the setting is changed to the setting change mode.

Further, as a game machine of means DA for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP 2010-200902A,
A specific control unit (step S21TM1690 or the like that executes processing such as step S21TM1690) capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the big hit determination random number is different). A control microcomputer 100);
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode;
Setting check mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) controllable to a setting check mode for notifying the set value in a checkable manner;
Setting value storage means (setting value storage area of the RAM 102 in which the setting values are stored) for storing the setting values,
The setting change mode control means determines that the first condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is satisfied (the clear switch ( The setting change mode) based on the setting change switch 21TM052 being ON),
The setting confirmation mode control means determines that the first condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started (the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state) and the second condition is not satisfied (clear). Switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is in an OFF state) to control the setting confirmation mode,
The set value is determined based on a specific operation in the setting change mode (operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state),
The setting value storage means stores a setting value before being controlled to the setting change mode when the setting change mode is being controlled (the setting value is stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 before the transition to the setting change mode). The set value that has been set is continuously stored without being changed with the transition to the setting change mode),
In the setting change mode, the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped without performing the specific operation (the power is cut off without performing the operation of switching the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state), and thereafter, If the setting check mode is controlled when the power supply to the gaming machine is resumed, the set value stored in the set value storage unit is notified (the power supply is controlled to the setting check mode after power-on). In this case, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 before the transition to the setting confirmation mode.)
further,
An effect selection unit (for example, for effect control) that displays the items (for example, the first item and the second item) corresponding to each of the plurality of effects of different types so that the player can select the effect. CPU 120 displays a first selection screen or a second selection screen in 111SGS435, 111SGS466, or 111SGS467);
Effect executing means capable of executing the effect received by the effect selecting means (for example, a part in which effect control CPU 120 executes a battle notice or an SU notice in the notice effect processing of 111SGS305);
A specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first selected effect);
With
The display mode when the effect selection means receives the selection of an item differs between the case where the specific effect is executed in the first mode and the case where the specific effect is executed in the second mode (for example, for the effect control). When the CPU 120 receives the selection of the character A in the first selection effect of the SU notice, the second item of the pattern X is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen, and the selection of the character B is received in the first selection effect. The second item of the pattern Y is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen, and if the selection of the character C is accepted in the first selection effect, the second item of the pattern Z is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen. The part that executes the processing of 111SGS460 to 111SGS466 in the notice effect processing)
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this feature, a store clerk or the like at the amusement arcade can appropriately determine the set value when the power supply is stopped while being controlled to the setting change mode. Also, since the display mode of the items changes according to the mode of the specific effect, the interest is improved.

The gaming machine of the means D2 is
The gaming machine of means D1,
The setting change mode control means performs a shift operation (operation of turning on the lock switch 21TM051) when power supply to the gaming machine is started and initializes the operation (turns the clear switch 21TM052 on). Control) to perform the setting change mode when the
The setting confirmation mode control means controls the setting confirmation mode when the shift operation is performed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the initialization operation is not performed.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a store clerk or the like at the game arcade can select which of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode is controlled.

The gaming machine of the means D3 is
A game machine of means D1 or means D2,
When the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the game state is initialized (RAM clear in step S21TM1410 is executed),
Based on the end of the control of the setting change mode, a notification corresponding to the end of the control of the setting change mode is executed (the set value blinks on the display monitor 21TM029).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that the control of the setting change mode has ended.

The gaming machine of the means D4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means D1 to the means D3,
A game control means for controlling a progress of a game in the gaming machine (a game control micro-processor for executing a game control timer interrupt process), comprising the specific control means, the setting change mode control means, and the setting confirmation mode control means; Computer 100)
Effect control means (effect control CPU 120) for executing effect control,
The game control means outputs a command (a setting change mode command, a setting confirmation mode command) to the effect control means in response to being controlled in either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode,
The effect control means executes a notification according to the command (displays “Setting is being changed” on the image display device 5 when a setting change mode command is received, and displays an image when a setting confirmation mode command is received). "Setting is being confirmed" is displayed on the device 5),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible for the clerk or the like of the game arcade to know that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

The gaming machine of the means D5 is
Any of gaming machines selected from the means D1 to the means D4,
Timing after the power supply to the gaming machine is started (timing after the game control microcomputer 100 can execute the game control timer interrupt process after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) When the first condition or the second condition is satisfied, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 outputs a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated, a clear switch (setting switch). When a setting changeover switch operation command indicating that the 21TM052 has been operated is received from the game control microcomputer 100, "operation of the lock switch has been detected.", "Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected." Is displayed on the image display device 5)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that the first condition or the second condition is satisfied at a timing after the power supply is started.
The correspondence between the means D2 to D5 and the means D1 can be applied to the correspondence between the means D2 to D5 and the means DA.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value in a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (Paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp the status of the processing related to the change of the set value. Even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102) is applied, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technology. The invention according to the means E1 to E8 has been made in view of the above situation, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine which allows an external device to grasp the status of a process related to a change in a set value. is there.

The game machine of means E1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for the jackpot determination is different),
The set value is changeable (changeable based on an operation in a setting change mode),
A specific signal (security signal) can be output from a first terminal (tenth terminal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output from the second terminal (seventh terminal) in response to the processing related to the change of the set value (transition to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode). ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner.

Further, as a game machine of means EA for solving the problem of the game machine described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2014-200506,
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for the jackpot determination is different),
The set value is changeable (changeable based on an operation in a setting change mode),
A specific signal (security signal) can be output from a first terminal (tenth terminal) in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine,
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output from the second terminal (seventh terminal) in response to the processing related to the change of the set value (transition to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode). ,
further,
An effect selection unit (for example, for effect control) that displays the items (for example, the first item and the second item) corresponding to each of the plurality of effects of different types so that the player can select the effect. CPU 120 displays a first selection screen or a second selection screen in 111SGS435, 111SGS466, or 111SGS467);
Effect executing means capable of executing the effect received by the effect selecting means (for example, a part in which effect control CPU 120 executes a battle notice or an SU notice in the notice effect processing of 111SGS305);
A specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first selected effect);
With
The display mode when the effect selection means receives the selection of an item differs between the case where the specific effect is executed in the first mode and the case where the specific effect is executed in the second mode (for example, for the effect control). When the CPU 120 receives the selection of the character A in the first selection effect of the SU notice, the second item of the pattern X is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen, and the selection of the character B is received in the first selection effect. The second item of the pattern Y is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen, and if the selection of the character C is accepted in the first selection effect, the second item of the pattern Z is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen. The part that executes the processing of 111SGS460 to 111SGS466 in the notice effect processing)
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this feature, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the execution of the process related to the change of the set value can be notified to the outside in a distinguishable manner. Also, since the display mode of the items changes according to the mode of the specific effect, the interest is improved.

The game machine of means E2 is
The game machine of means E1,
The specific signal can be output in response to the start of power supply to the gaming machine (a security signal is output when RAM clear is executed),
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value in which the set value can be changed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started; Prepare,
When controlled to the setting change mode, both the specific signal and the special signal can be output (the security signal and the setting corresponding change signal are output simultaneously).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify to the outside at least the possibility of being controlled to the setting change mode by the specific signal, even in a conventional external device which does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting change is performed by the specific signal. It is possible to know that the mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E3 is
The game machine of means E2,
When both the specific signal and the special signal are output based on the control to the setting change mode, the output period of the specific signal is longer than the output period of the special signal (output of the setting corresponding change signal). For 30 seconds from the end of the security signal)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that at least the setting change mode may be controlled by the specific signal, even in a conventional external device that does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting is performed by the specific signal. It can be grasped that the control may be performed in the change mode.

The game machine of means E4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to E3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
The special signal can be output based on being controlled to the setting confirmation mode (a setting correspondence change signal is output during a period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside that there is a possibility that the setting has been controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means E5 is
The game machine of means E4,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the setting check mode can be controlled (when the power is turned on, the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF). Is controlled to the setting check mode),
It is possible to output both the specific signal and the special signal based on being controlled to the setting confirmation mode (a security signal and a setting correspondence change signal are simultaneously output).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, since it is possible to notify to the outside at least the possibility of being controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the specific signal, even in a conventional external device which does not assume the input of the special signal, the setting is confirmed by the specific signal. It is possible to know that the mode may have been controlled.

The game machine of means E6 is
The game machine of means E1,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value in which the set value can be changed when the power supply to the gaming machine is started; Prepare,
The special signal can be output when the setting change mode is controlled (a setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting change mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting change mode ends. (If the RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting change mode ends).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the outside of the occurrence of the predetermined event while simplifying the signal output process when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode.

The game machine of means E7 is
A game machine of means E1 or means E6,
A setting confirmation mode control means (the game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling to the setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value when the power supply to the gaming machine is started; Prepare,
The special signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled (a setting change corresponding signal is output when the setting confirmation mode is controlled), and the specific signal can be output when the setting confirmation mode ends. (If the RAM clear is executed, a security signal is output when the setting confirmation mode ends)
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the occurrence of the predetermined event to the outside while simplifying the signal output processing when the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

The game machine of means E8 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means E1 to E7,
Setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode;
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value,
In the setting change mode, the setting value can be changed according to a setting change operation (the setting value can be changed by operating a setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052 and operating the lock switch 21TM051);
When the setting change operation is performed while not being controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, a predetermined notification is performed (the effect control CPU 120 operates the lock switch 21TM051). When a lock switch operation command indicating that the lock switch operation command has been received from the game control microcomputer 100, the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 has been operated. , And a warning that “operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected” is displayed on the image display device 5).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, a clerk at the game hall or the like can grasp that an inappropriate setting change operation has been performed.
The correspondence between the means E2 to E8 and the means E1 can be applied to the correspondence between the means E2 to E8 and the means EA.

  Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), there has been proposed a gaming machine including a setting change unit for changing a set value in a plurality of stages based on a setting change operation from the outside. Further, as disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-200506 (paragraph 0102), a gaming machine in which a "big hit signal" or the like is output from an external output terminal of a main control board has been proposed. Regarding the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-200902 (paragraph 0007), it may be necessary for the external device to grasp information related to the setting value. However, there is a problem that it is difficult for the external device to grasp the signal output technology even if the conventional game machine signal output technology described in Japanese Unexamined Patent Application Publication (Paragraph 0102) is applied. The invention relating to the means F1 to F11 has been made in view of the above situation, and it is an object of the invention to provide a gaming machine capable of grasping information relating to a set value on an external device side.

The gaming machine of the means F1 is
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for the jackpot determination is different),
The setting value can be changed to any one of a plurality of values (changeable based on an operation in a setting change mode),
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output in response to a process related to the change of the setting value (transition to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode),
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which the set value can be specified (a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output).
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it becomes possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

Further, as a gaming machine of means FA for solving the problem of the gaming machine described in JP-A-2010-200902 and JP-A-2014-200506,
A gaming machine capable of executing specific control (eg, a jackpot determination process in a special symbol process process) according to a set value (a set value 1 to 6 in which the range of the random number for the jackpot determination is different),
The setting value can be changed to any one of a plurality of values (changeable based on an operation in a setting change mode),
A special signal (setting change corresponding signal) can be output in response to a process related to the change of the setting value (transition to the setting change mode, transition to the setting confirmation mode),
The special signal can be output in a special mode in which the set value can be specified (a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output),
further,
An effect selection unit (for example, for effect control) that displays the items (for example, the first item and the second item) corresponding to each of the plurality of effects of different types so that the player can select the effect. CPU 120 displays a first selection screen or a second selection screen in 111SGS435, 111SGS466, or 111SGS467);
Effect executing means capable of executing the effect received by the effect selecting means (for example, a part in which effect control CPU 120 executes a battle notice or an SU notice in the notice effect processing of 111SGS305);
A specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first selected effect);
With
The display mode when the effect selection means receives the selection of an item differs between the case where the specific effect is executed in the first mode and the case where the specific effect is executed in the second mode (for example, for the effect control). When the CPU 120 receives the selection of the character A in the first selection effect of the SU notice, the second item of the pattern X is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen, and the selection of the character B is received in the first selection effect. The second item of the pattern Y is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen, and if the selection of the character C is accepted in the first selection effect, the second item of the pattern Z is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen. The part that executes the processing of 111SGS460 to 111SGS466 in the notice effect processing)
A gaming machine characterized by the above.
According to this feature, it is possible to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside. Also, since the display mode of the items changes according to the mode of the specific effect, the interest is improved.

The game machine of the means F2 is
The gaming machine of the means F1,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the set value;
Outputting the special signal in the special mode with the end of the setting change mode (when the setting change mode ends, outputting a number of pulses corresponding to the determined set value);
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to output from the common terminal a signal for notifying whether or not the setting change mode is being controlled and a signal for notifying the setting value of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of the means F3 is
The game machine of means F2,
When the setting change mode is controlled, a special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal which is turned on during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled) is output. After the output of the special signal is temporarily stopped (after the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-like settings corresponding to the determined set value) Change response signal),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the special signal, and also to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The game machine of means F4 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F3,
A setting confirmation mode control means (a game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) capable of controlling the setting value in a setting confirmation mode capable of confirming the set value;
Outputting the special signal of the special mode with the end of the setting confirmation mode (when the setting confirmation mode ends, outputting a number of pulses corresponding to the displayed set value);
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to output from the common terminal a signal for notifying whether or not the control is in the setting check mode and a signal for notifying the setting value of the gaming machine.

The gaming machine of the means F5 is
A game machine of means F4,
A special signal in a non-special mode (a setting change corresponding signal that is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode) is output when the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. After temporarily stopping the output of the special signal (after once turning off the setting change corresponding signal with the end of the setting confirmation mode), the special signal of the special mode (the number of pulse-like signals corresponding to the displayed set value) is used. Output the setting change response signal),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the setting check mode is controlled by the special signal, and also to notify the setting value of the gaming machine to the outside.

The gaming machine of the means F6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F5,
In the special signal of the special mode, the set value can be specified by the number of pulses. (By setting the number of output times of the pulse-shaped setting change corresponding signal to the same number as the set value, the set value can be specified in the external device. is there),
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to easily specify the set value in the external device.

The game machine of means F7 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F6,
A specific signal (security signal) can be output in response to a predetermined event (abnormal winning, switch abnormality detection, magnetic error, RAM clear, etc.) occurring in the gaming machine.
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event can be notified to the outside.

The game machine of means F8 is
The game machine of means F7,
Outputting the specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) from a common terminal (for example, outputting from a tenth terminal);
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified externally with a simple configuration.

The game machine of the means F9,
The game machine of means F7,
Outputting the specific signal (security signal) and the special signal (setting change corresponding signal) from different terminals (for example, outputting a security signal from the tenth terminal and outputting a setting change corresponding signal from the seventh terminal);
It is characterized by that.
According to this, the occurrence of the predetermined event and the set value can be notified to the outside in a manner that can be clearly distinguished.

The gaming machine of the means F10 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F9,
A setting change mode control means (game control microcomputer 100 capable of executing steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200) capable of controlling the setting value to a setting change mode capable of changing the set value;
In the setting change mode, the set value can be changed according to a setting change operation (the set value can be changed according to an operation of a setting changeover switch (clear switch) 21TM052);
Regardless of whether or not the setting change operation is performed in the setting change mode, the special signal of the special mode is output upon completion of the setting change mode (when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, Regardless of whether or not the setting change switch (clear switch) 21TM052 has been operated before, the number of pulses corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output as a setting change corresponding signal.) ,
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to reduce the processing load of the signal output process by executing the common signal output process regardless of whether the setting change operation is actually performed.

The game machine of the means F11 is
Any of gaming machines selected from the means F1 to the means F10,
The special signal of the special mode is output at the end of the process related to the change of the set value (the number of pulse signals corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at the end of the set change mode). And outputs a number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 with the end of the setting confirmation mode). After the output is completed, the special signal of the special mode is output at a predetermined timing different from the processing related to the change of the set value (for example, the end of the big hit game state) (stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102). The number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set values
It is characterized by that.
According to this, it is possible to notify the setting value to the outside at a predetermined timing, and therefore, it is possible to increase opportunities for the external device to specify the setting value.
The correspondence between the means F2 to F11 and the means F1 described above can be applied to the correspondence between the means F2 to F11 and the means FA.

  In addition, this invention may have only the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention, and has a structure other than this invention specific matter with the invention specific matter described in the claim of this invention. It may be a thing.

It is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine in this embodiment. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interruption process for game control. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol process process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control process processing. It is a block diagram which shows the various control boards etc. which were mounted in the pachinko game machine. It is a rear perspective view of a pachinko gaming machine. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit type determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the content of various big hits. (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), (B) is an explanatory diagram showing a big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit B and big hit C), (C) FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing a small hit variation pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the change pattern for loss. It is a flowchart showing a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows a setting value confirmation process. (A) is a flowchart showing a RAM position process, and (B) is a schematic diagram of a RAM. It is a flowchart which shows a setting change process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of production control main processing. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing information stored in a RAM and a cleared state. It is an explanatory view showing an initial symbol for each received command. It is an explanatory view showing a notification mode at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows a power-off detection process. It is a flowchart which shows a part of effect control process process. 15 is a flowchart illustrating a setting change process according to a modification 8. It is a flow chart which shows a part of effect control main processing in modification 8. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the image display device according to a modification 8. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the image display device according to a ninth modification. FIG. 21 is a diagram illustrating a display mode of the image display device according to a tenth modification. (A), (B) is a figure which illustrates an effect control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. (A) is an explanatory view showing a special figure display result determination table 1, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a special figure display result determination table 2. (A) is a figure which shows the example of a structure of a big hit type determination table, (B) is a figure which shows the content of various big hits. It is a figure which illustrates a fluctuation pattern. It is a figure which shows the fluctuation pattern determination table for big hits. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol normal process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of special design stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of big hit end processing. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a variable display start setting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect determination process. (A) is a diagram showing a notice effect type determination table, and (B) is a diagram showing a SU number determination table. (A) is a figure showing an example of production control in battle notice, and (B) is a figure showing an example of production control in SU notice. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process during variable display. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect process. (A) is a diagram showing a battle notice, (B) is a SU notice, (C) is a diagram showing the contents of the effect in the big hit during the effect. (A) is a figure which shows a 1st selection screen, (B)-(D) shows the 2nd selection screen for battle notices, (E)-(G) is a figure which shows the 2nd selection screen for SU notices. (A)-(E) is a figure which shows the flow of a 1st selection effect. (A)-(F) is a figure which shows the flow of battle notice. (A)-(C) is a figure which shows the flow of SU notice. (A)-(H) is a figure which shows the flow of SU production. It is a figure showing the modification of this embodiment. It is a figure for explaining a fluctuation pattern and a kind of reach. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a notice effect determination process. It is a figure which shows the determination ratio in a notice effect determination process. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a figure showing an example of a production operation of a modification. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structure of a payout control board. It is a rear view which shows a pachinko gaming machine. It is explanatory drawing which shows a display result determination table. (A) is a simplified front view of the main board, and (B) is an explanatory view for explaining the display contents of the display monitor. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram showing a partial configuration of a storage area in a RAM on a main board. FIG. 3 is a diagram showing a memory map of a CPU on a main board. FIG. 4 is a diagram illustrating a RAM area corresponding to a storage area of a main board RAM. (A) is a time chart showing the display time of the item displayed on the display monitor, and (B-1) to (B-6) are explanatory diagrams for explaining changes in the display content of the display monitor. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating movement of data stored in a storage area of a ring buffer. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the timer interrupt processing for game control. FIG. 9 is an explanatory diagram illustrating a display mode of a display monitor in a setting change mode. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram showing a display mode of a display monitor in a setting confirmation mode. (1) is a diagram showing information displayed on the image display device when controlled to the setting change mode, and (2) shows information displayed on the image display device when controlled to the setting confirmation mode. FIG. (1) to (3) are explanatory diagrams showing an effect mode of a setting suggestion effect, and (4) is an explanatory diagram showing a table for determining an effect mode of a setting suggestion effect. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control signal output to a payout control board from a game control board. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the control command transmitted / received between a game control board and a payout control board. FIG. 2 is a block diagram illustrating signal lines and the like used for transmitting and receiving control signals and control commands. It is a sequence diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout control during normal operation. It is a flowchart which shows the main process which CPU for payout control performs. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interruption process which CPU for payout control performs. It is explanatory drawing which shows the outline | summary of the ball lending restriction method in this embodiment. It is a timing chart for explaining communication between a card unit and a pachinko gaming machine. It is a timing chart which shows the 1st ball lending restriction method. It is a timing chart which shows the 2nd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing chart which shows the 3rd ball lending restriction method. It is a timing chart which shows the 4th ball lending restriction method. FIG. 9 is a timing chart showing an example in which ball lending is not restricted during the setting change mode. It is a timing chart which shows the example which restarts payout after the end of a setting change mode. FIG. 11 is a timing chart showing an example in which payout is forcibly terminated along with a shift to a setting change mode. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception of the signal between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout control at the time of normal operation. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception of the signal between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout control during the period when it is controlled to the setting change mode. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception of the signal between the microcomputer for game control and the microcomputer for payout control during the period when the game machine frame or the glass door frame is open. (1) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power failure occurs before a set value is determined, and (2) is an explanatory diagram showing control when a power failure occurs after a set value is determined. It is a figure showing a warning screen when a setting change operation is performed during a game. FIG. 3 is an explanatory diagram of a signal output from each output terminal. FIG. 9 is a timing chart showing an output period of a security signal and a setting change correspondence signal. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a relationship between a set value and an output mode of a setting change correspondence signal. FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing an output mode and an output period of a setting change corresponding signal. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a game control main process.

(Basic explanation)
First, a basic configuration and control of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (which is also a configuration and control of a general pachinko gaming machine) will be described.

(Configuration of pachinko machine 1)
FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and shows an arrangement layout of main members. The pachinko gaming machine (gaming machine) 1 is roughly composed of a gaming board (gauge board) 2 constituting a gaming board surface and a gaming machine frame (base frame) 3 for supporting and fixing the gaming board 2. A game area is formed on the game board 2, and a game ball as a game medium is launched into a game area from a predetermined hitting device.

  In a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, to the right of the game area), a variable display (also called a special figure game) of special symbols (also called special figures) as a plurality of types of special identification information A first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B to be performed are provided. Each of these consists of a 7-segment LED or the like. The special symbol is represented by a number indicating “0” to “9” or a lighting pattern such as “−”. The special symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off.

  The “variable display” of the special symbol is, for example, to display a plurality of special symbols in a variable manner (the same applies to other symbols described later). Examples of the fluctuation include an update display of a plurality of symbols, a scroll display of a plurality of symbols, deformation of one or more symbols, and enlargement / reduction of one or more symbols. In the case of a special symbol or a variation of a normal symbol described later, a plurality of types of special symbols or normal symbols are updated and displayed. In the variation of the decorative pattern described later, a plurality of types of decorative patterns are scroll-displayed or updated, or one or more decorative symbols are deformed or enlarged / reduced. Note that the variation includes an aspect in which a certain symbol is blinked. At the end of the variable display, a predetermined special symbol is stopped as a display result (also referred to as derivation or derivation display) (the same applies to variable display of other symbols described later). Note that variable display may be expressed as variable display or fluctuation.

  The special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display device 4A is also referred to as “first special symbol”, and the special symbol variably displayed on the second special symbol display device 4B is also referred to as “second special symbol”. In addition, the special figure game using the first special figure is referred to as a “first special figure game”, and the special figure game using the second special figure is also referred to as a “second special figure game”. There may be one kind of special symbol display device that performs variable display of special symbols.

  An image display device 5 is provided near the center of the game area on the game board 2. The image display device 5 includes, for example, an LCD (liquid crystal display device), an organic EL (Electro Luminescence), and the like, and displays various effect images. The image display device 5 may be composed of a projector and a screen. Various effect images are displayed on the image display device 5.

  For example, on the screen of the image display device 5, in synchronization with the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, decorative symbols (such as symbols indicating numbers) as a plurality of types of decorative identification information different from the special symbols. The variable display is performed. Here, in synchronization with the first special game or the second special game, the decorative symbols are variably displayed in the left, middle, and right decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R (for example, up and down) Direction scroll display and update display). Note that the special display game and the variable display of the decorative symbols executed in synchronism are collectively referred to simply as variable display.

  On the screen of the image display device 5, there may be provided a display area for displaying a hold display corresponding to the variable display for which execution is suspended and an active display corresponding to the variable display being executed. The hold display and the active display are collectively referred to as a variable display compatible display corresponding to the variable display.

  The number of variable displays that are held is also called the number of stored memories. The number of reserved memories corresponding to the first special figure game is also referred to as a first reserved memory number, and the number of reserved memories corresponding to the second special figure game is also referred to as a second reserved memory number. The total of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number is also referred to as the total reserved memory number.

  In addition, a first hold indicator 25A and a second hold indicator 25B configured to include a plurality of LEDs are provided at predetermined positions on the game board 2, and the first hold indicator 25A indicates the number of LEDs lit. To display the first reserved memory number, and the second reserved indicator 25B displays the second reserved memory number according to the number of lit LEDs.

  Below the image display device 5, a winning ball device 6A and a variable winning ball device 6B are provided.

  The winning ball apparatus 6A forms a first start winning opening that is maintained in a certain open state in which a game ball can always enter, for example, by a predetermined ball receiving member. When a game ball enters the first start winning opening, a predetermined number of (for example, three) prize balls are paid out and the first special game can be started.

  The variable winning ball device 6B (ordinary electric accessory) forms a second start winning opening that is changed between a closed state and an open state by a solenoid 81 (see FIG. 2). The variable winning ball apparatus 6B includes, for example, an electric tulip-shaped accessory having a pair of movable wing pieces, and when the movable wing piece is in a vertical position when the solenoid 81 is off, the tip of the movable wing piece Is close to the winning ball device 6A, and the game ball enters the closed state in which the game ball does not enter the second starting winning port (also referred to as the second starting winning port is closed). On the other hand, the variable winning ball device 6B is in an open state in which the game ball can enter the second starting winning opening by moving the movable wing piece to the tilted position when the solenoid 81 is in the ON state (second starting point). It is also said that the winning opening is open.) When a game ball enters the second start winning opening, a predetermined number (for example, three) of prize balls are paid out and the second special game can be started. Note that the variable winning ball device 6B is not limited to the one having an electric tulip type accessory as long as it changes between a closed state and an open state.

  At a predetermined position of the game board 2 (in the example shown in FIG. 1, four places in the lower left and right sides of the game area), there are provided general winning holes 10 that are always kept in a certain open state by predetermined ball receiving members. In this case, when entering any of the general winning ports 10, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as prize balls.

  Below the winning ball device 6A and the variable winning ball device 6B, a special variable winning ball device 7 having a large winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball apparatus 7 includes a large winning opening door that is opened and closed by a solenoid 82 (see FIG. 2), and the special winning opening as a specific area that changes between an open state and a closed state by the large winning opening door. Form.

  As an example, in the special variable winning ball device 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special winning opening door (for the special electric accessory) is in the OFF state, the large winning opening door closes the large winning opening and the game ball is large. You will not be able to enter (pass) the winning entrance. On the other hand, in the special variable winning ball apparatus 7, when the solenoid 82 for the special prize opening door is in the ON state, the special prize opening door opens the big prize opening, so that the game ball can easily enter the special prize opening. Become.

  When game balls enter the big prize opening, a predetermined number (for example, 14) of game balls are paid out as prize balls. When game balls enter the big prize opening, for example, more prize balls are paid out than when game balls enter the first start prize opening, the second start prize opening, and the general prize opening 10, for example.

  The entry of a game ball into each winning opening including the general winning opening 10 is also referred to as “winning”. In particular, winning at the starting port (first starting winning port, second starting winning port starting port) is also referred to as starting winning.

  A normal symbol display 20 is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 2 (on the left side of the game area in the example shown in FIG. 1). As an example, the normal symbol display 20 is composed of 7-segment LEDs and the like, and variably displays normal symbols as a plurality of types of normal identification information different from the special symbols. Ordinary symbols are represented by numbers indicating "0" to "9", lighting patterns such as "-", and the like. The normal symbol may include a pattern in which all LEDs are turned off. Such variable display of normal symbols is also called a general game.

  On the left side of the image display device 5, a passing gate 41 through which a game ball can pass is provided. Based on the fact that the game ball has passed through the passing gate 41, the usual game is executed.

  Above the normal symbol display 20, a universal figure holding display 25 </ b> C is provided. The general figure hold display unit 25C is configured to include, for example, four LEDs, and displays the number of general figure hold storage, which is the number of general figure games that are being executed, by the number of lighted LEDs.

  In addition to the above-described configuration, the surface of the game board 2 is provided with a windmill for changing the flow direction and speed of the game ball and a number of obstacle nails. In the lowermost part of the game area, there is provided an out port through which game balls that have not entered any winning port are taken.

  Speakers 8L and 8R for reproducing and outputting sound effects and the like are provided at upper left and right positions of the gaming machine frame 3, and a gaming effect lamp 9 for a gaming effect is provided around the gaming area. ing. The game effect lamp 9 includes an LED.

  At a predetermined position (not shown in FIG. 1) of the game board 2, a movable body 32 that operates in accordance with the performance is provided.

  At the lower right position of the gaming machine frame 3, there is provided a hitting operation handle (operation knob) 30 that is operated by a player or the like in order to launch a game ball toward the game area by the hitting ball launching device.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a game ball paid out as a prize ball or a game ball lent out by a predetermined ball lending machine is held (stored) so as to be supplied to a ball hitting device. ) Is provided. Below the upper plate, there is provided a hitting ball supply plate (lower plate) from which prize balls are paid out when the upper plate is full.

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the gaming area, a stick controller 31A that can be held and tilted by the player is attached. The stick controller 31A is provided with a trigger button that can be pressed by the player. The operation on the stick controller 31A is detected by the controller sensor unit 35A (see FIG. 2).

  At a predetermined position of the gaming machine frame 3 below the game area, a push button 31B is provided that allows the player to perform a predetermined instruction operation by a pressing operation or the like. An operation on the push button 31B is detected by a push sensor 35B (see FIG. 2).

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the stick controller 31 </ b> A and the push button 31 </ b> B are provided as detection means for detecting the player's operation (operation, etc.), but other detection means may be provided.

(Outline of game progress)
A game ball is launched toward the game area by a rotation operation by the player to the hitting operation handle 30 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1. When the game ball passes through the passing gate 41, a normal game by the normal symbol display 20 is started. In the case where the game ball passes through the passing gate 41 during the previous execution of the usual game, etc. (when the game ball passes through the pass gate 41 but the usual game based on the pass cannot be executed immediately). The usual game based on the passage is suspended up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In this ordinary game, if a specific ordinary symbol (a symbol per ordinary symbol) is stopped and displayed, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “per ordinary symbol”. On the other hand, if a normal symbol other than the symbols per ordinary symbol (ordinary symbol losing symbol) is stopped and displayed as the fixed ordinary symbol, the display result of the ordinary symbol becomes “ordinary symbol losing”. When the “normal hit” is reached, an opening control is performed to open the variable winning ball device 6B for a predetermined period (the second start winning opening is opened).

  When a game ball enters the first start winning opening formed in the winning ball device 6A, the first special figure game by the first special symbol display device 4A is started.

  When the game ball enters the second start winning opening formed in the variable winning ball device 6B, the second special symbol game by the second special symbol display device 4B is started.

  If a game ball enters (wins) a start winning opening during a period during which a special figure game is being executed or during a period where a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, which will be described later, is controlled (a start winning has occurred) In the case where the special game based on the start prize cannot be immediately executed), the special game based on the entry is suspended until a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4).

  In a special game, if a specific special symbol (a jackpot symbol, for example, “7”, the actual symbol differs depending on the jackpot type to be described later) is stopped and displayed as a special symbol, it will be a “hit” symbol. If a predetermined special symbol different from (a small hit symbol, for example, “2”) is stopped and displayed, “small hit” is obtained. In addition, if a special symbol (losing symbol, for example, “-”) different from the big hit symbol or the small winning symbol is stopped and displayed, it is “lost”.

  After the display result in the special figure game becomes “big hit”, the big hit gaming state is controlled as an advantageous state advantageous to the player. After the display result in the special figure game becomes “small hit”, the game is controlled to the small hit gaming state.

  In the big hit game state, the player can obtain a prize ball by causing the game ball to enter the big prize opening. Therefore, the big hit gaming state is an advantageous state for the player. The greater the number of rounds in the big hit gaming state, and the longer the opening upper limit period, the more advantageous for the player.

  Note that a “big hit” is set as the big hit type. For example, a number of types of opening of the big prize opening (number of rounds and opening upper limit period) and gaming state after the big hit gaming state (described later, normal state, short-time state, probability variation state, etc.) are prepared, and depending on these, the big hit Type is set. As the jackpot type, there may be provided a jackpot type that can obtain many prize balls, or a jackpot type that has few prize balls or hardly obtains prize balls.

  In the small hit gaming state, the special winning opening formed by the special variable winning ball apparatus 7 is opened in a predetermined opening mode. For example, in the small hit game state, the same opening mode as the big hit game state in the case of some big hit types (the number of times of opening of the big prize opening is the same as the number of rounds and the closing timing of the big prize opening is also the same. Etc.), the grand prize opening is opened. Similar to the big hit type, the small hit type may be provided for the “small hit”.

  After the big hit gaming state is ended, depending on the big hit type, it may be controlled to a short time state or a probable change state.

  In the short-time state, control (short-time control) is executed to shorten the average special figure change time (period during which the special figure is changed) compared to the normal state. In the short-time state, by reducing the average normal map change time (period in which the normal map is changed) from the normal state, or by improving the probability of “per normal map” in the normal game, than the normal state, Control (high opening control, high base control) that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the second start winning opening is also executed. The short-time state is a state advantageous for the player because the variation efficiency of the special symbol (especially the second special symbol) is improved.

  In the probability variation state (probability variation state), in addition to the time reduction control, probability variation control is executed in which the probability that the display result is “big hit” is higher than in the normal state. The probability variation state is a state that is more advantageous for the player because it is likely to be a “hit” in addition to the improvement of the variation efficiency of the special symbol.

  The short-time state or the probability change state continues until any one end condition such as that a predetermined number of special game has been executed and the next big hit game state has been established. A game whose end condition is that a predetermined number of special game has been executed is also referred to as a number of cuts (short time cut, number change probability change, etc.).

  The normal state is a gaming state other than a special state such as a big hit gaming state advantageous for the player, a short-time state, a probable change state, etc., and the display result in the ordinary game is “per ordinary figure”. The pachinko gaming machine 1 such as the probability and the probability that the display result in the special figure game is “big hit” is the initial setting state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (for example, when a system reset is performed, a predetermined return after power-on) This is the same control as when the process was not executed.

  A state in which the probability variation control is being executed is also referred to as a high probability state, and a state in which the probability variation control is not being performed is also referred to as a low probability state. The state where the time reduction control is executed is also referred to as a high base state, and the state where the time reduction control is not executed is also referred to as a low base state. By combining these, it is said that the short-time state is a low-accuracy and high-base state, the probability variation state is a high-accuracy and high-base state, the normal state is a low-accuracy and low-base state, and the like. The highly accurate state and the low base state are also referred to as a highly accurate low base state.

  After the small hit game state ends, the game state is not changed, and the game state before the display result of the special game is “small hit” is controlled continuously (however, “small hit” occurs) If the special figure game at the time is the special figure game of the predetermined number of times, the gaming state is naturally changed). It should be noted that there is no “small hit” as the display result of the special game.

  Note that the gaming state may change based on the fact that the gaming ball has passed a specific area (for example, a specific area in the big prize opening) during the big hit gaming state. For example, when the game ball passes through a specific area, the game ball may be controlled to be in a probable change state after the big hit game state.

  (Progress of production etc.)

  In the pachinko gaming machine 1, various effects (effects to notify the progress of the game or to excite the game) are executed according to the progress of the game. The effect will be described below. Note that the effect is performed by displaying various effect images on the image display device 5. In addition to or instead of the display, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R and / or a game effect lamp 9 is provided. May be performed by turning on / off the light, operation of the movable body 32, and the like.

  In the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R provided in the image display device 5, the first special game or the first game is produced as an effect executed in accordance with the progress of the game. Corresponding to the start of the 2 special figure game, the variable display of the decorative symbols is started. At the timing when the display result (also referred to as a fixed special symbol) is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game, the fixed decorative symbol (a combination of three decorative symbols) that is the display result of the variable decorative symbol display ) Is also stopped (derived).

  In the period from the start of the variable display of the decorative design to the end thereof, the variable display mode of the decorative design may be a predetermined reach mode (reach is established). Here, the reach mode is a variable display for decorative symbols that have not been stopped yet when the decorative symbols stopped on the screen of the image display device 5 constitute a part of a jackpot combination described later. It is a mode that is continuing.

  In addition, a reach effect is executed in response to the above-described reach mode during variable display of decorative symbols. In the pachinko gaming machine 1, the ratio of the display result (the display result of the special figure game or the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern) according to the production mode becomes “big hit” (also called the big hit reliability or the big hit expectation). Different types of reach production are executed. Reach production includes, for example, normal reach and super reach with higher hit reliability than normal reach.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “big hit”, a predetermined decorative pattern that is a predetermined big hit combination is derived as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5 (decoration) The display result of the variable display of the symbol is “big hit”). As an example, the same decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed together on predetermined active lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. .

  In the case of “probability big hit”, which is controlled to the probable change state after the big hit gaming state, odd numbers of decorative symbols (for example, “7”, etc.) are all stopped and displayed, and after the big hit gaming state, the probable change state is entered. In the case of a “non-probable big hit (normal big hit)” that is not controlled, an even number of decorative symbols (for example, “6”, etc.) may be stopped and displayed together. In this case, odd-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as probability variation symbols, and even-numbered decorative symbols are also referred to as non-probable variation symbols (normal symbols). After becoming a reach mode with a non-probable variation pattern, a promotion effect that finally becomes a “probability large hit” may be executed.

  When the display result of the special game is “small hit”, as a display result of variable display of decorative symbols on the screen of the image display device 5, a fixed decorative symbol (for example, “ 1 3 5 "etc.) is derived (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is" small hit "). As an example, the decorative symbols constituting the chance eye are stopped and displayed on the predetermined effective lines in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R. In addition, when the display result of the special figure game becomes “big hit” of some big hit types (big hit type of big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state) and when it becomes “small hit” A common fixed decorative symbol may be derived and displayed.

  When the display result of the special figure game is “losing”, the decorative display variable display mode is not the reach mode, but the non-reach combination fixed display pattern (“ (Also referred to as “non-reach lose”) may be stopped (the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern may be “non-reach lose”). Further, when the display result is “losing”, after the decorative display variable display mode becomes the reach mode, the predetermined reach combination (“reach loss”) that is not a big hit combination is displayed as the variable display display result of the decorative design. In other cases, the fixed decorative symbol (also referred to as “definitely”) is stopped and displayed (the display result of the variable display of the decorative symbol is “reach lose”).

  The effects that can be executed by the pachinko gaming machine 1 include displaying the variable display corresponding display (hold display or active display). As other effects, for example, a notice effect for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed during variable display of decorative symbols. The notice effect includes a notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display being executed, and a pre-read notice effect for notifying the big hit reliability in the variable display before execution (variable display for which execution is suspended). As the pre-reading notice effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the variable display compatible display (hold display or active display) to a mode different from the normal mode may be executed.

  Further, in the image display device 5, by temporarily stopping the decorative design during the variable display of the decorative design and then restarting the variable display, the single variable display is made to appear as a plurality of variable displays in a pseudo manner. A pseudo-continuous effect may be executed.

  Even during the big hit game state, the big hit effect for informing the big hit game state is executed. As the big hit effect, an effect for notifying the number of rounds or a promotion effect indicating that the value of the big hit gaming state may be executed. In addition, during the small hit game state, the small hit effect during the small hit game state is executed. In addition, the big hit game in the small hit game state and a part of the big hit type (a big hit type of the big hit gaming state in the same manner as the small hit gaming state, for example, a big hit type in which the subsequent gaming state is a high probability state) By executing a common effect with the state, the player may not know whether the current state is the small hit game state or the big hit game state. In such a case, a common effect is executed after the end of the small hit gaming state and after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that it is not possible to identify whether the state is a high probability state or a low probability state. May be.

  Further, for example, when a special game or the like is not being executed, a demonstration (demonstration) image is displayed on the image display device 5 (a customer waiting demonstration effect is executed).

(Board configuration)
In the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, a main board 11, an effect control board 12, an audio control board 13, a lamp control board 14, and a relay board 15 as shown in FIG. 2 are mounted. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, an information terminal board, a launch control board, and a power supply board are disposed on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side, and the progress of the above-described game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (execution of a special game (including management of holding), execution of a general game (including management of holding), jackpot A gaming state, a small hit gaming state, a gaming state, and the like). The main board 11 includes a game control microcomputer 100, a switch circuit 110, a solenoid circuit 111, and the like.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, which includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101, a RAM (Random Access Memory) 102, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103, and the like. And a random number circuit 104 and an I / O (Input / Output port) 105.

  The CPU 103 performs a process for controlling the progress of the game (a process for realizing the function of the main board 11) by executing a program stored in the ROM 101. At this time, various data stored in the ROM 101 (data such as later-described variation patterns, later-described effect control commands, and various tables referred to when making various determinations described later) are used, and the RAM 102 is used as the main memory. . The RAM 102 is a backup RAM in which a part or all of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period even when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped. Note that all or a part of the program stored in the ROM 101 may be expanded in the RAM 102 and executed on the RAM 102.

  The random number circuit 104 counts numerical data indicating various random number values (game random numbers) used for controlling the progress of the game in an updatable manner. The game random number may be updated by CPU 103 executing a predetermined computer program (updated by software).

  The I / O 105 includes, for example, an input port to which various signals (detection signals described later) are input, and various signals (the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the normal symbol display device 20, the first hold). And an output port for transmitting a signal for controlling (driving) the display hold device 25B, the second hold display device 25B, the general-purpose hold display device 25C, and the like, and a solenoid drive signal).

  The switch circuit 110 is configured to detect detection signals (game balls pass or not) from various switches for detecting a game ball (gate switch 21, start port switch (first start port switch 22A and second start port switch 22B), count switch 23). A detection signal indicating that the switch has entered and the switch is turned on is taken in and transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Through the transmission of the detection signal, the passing or entry of the game ball is detected.

  The solenoid circuit 111 sends a solenoid drive signal (for example, a signal for turning on the solenoid 81 or the solenoid 82) from the game control microcomputer 100 to the solenoid 81 for the ordinary electric accessory or the solenoid 82 for the grand prize opening door. To transmit.

  The main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) sends an effect control command (a command for designating (notifying) the progress of the game) according to the progress of the game as part of the control of the progress of the game. 12 is supplied. The effect control command output from the main board 11 is relayed by the relay board 15 and supplied to the effect control board 12. The production control command includes, for example, various determination results on the main board 11 (for example, a display result of a special figure game (including a jackpot type), a variation pattern used when the special figure game is executed (details will be described later) )), A game status (for example, start and end of variable display, open status of a big prize opening, occurrence of winning, number of reserved memories, gaming state), a command specifying an error, and the like.

  The production control board 12 is a sub-side control board independent of the main board 11, receives production control commands, and produces productions (various productions according to the progress of the game) based on the received production control commands. (Including various notifications such as driving of the movable body 32, error notification, notification of power failure recovery, etc.).

  On the effect control board 12, an effect control CPU 120, a ROM 121, a RAM 122, a display control unit 123, a random number circuit 124, and an I / O 125 are mounted.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a program stored in the ROM 121 to execute an effect together with the display control unit 123 (a process for realizing the above-described function of the effect control board 12 and an effect to be executed). Including the determination of At this time, various data (data such as various tables) stored in the ROM 121 is used, and the RAM 122 is used as a main memory.

  The effect control CPU 120 displays the execution of the effect based on detection signals from the controller sensor unit 35A and the push sensor 35B (signals output when an operation by the player is detected and indicating the operation content as appropriate). The control unit 123 may be instructed.

  The display control unit 123 includes a VDP (Video Display Processor), a CGROM (Character Generator ROM), a VRAM (Video RAM), and the like, and executes an effect based on an execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120.

  The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to display the effect image by supplying the image display device 5 with a video signal corresponding to the effect to be executed based on the effect execution instruction from the effect control CPU 120. The display control unit 123 further supplies a sound designation signal (a signal for designating the sound to be output) to the sound control board 13 in order to perform sound output synchronized with the display of the effect image and turn on / off the game effect lamp 9. Or a lamp signal (a signal designating the lighting / extinguishing mode of the lamp) is supplied to the lamp control board 14. Further, the display control unit 123 supplies a signal for operating the movable body 32 to the movable body 32 or a drive circuit that drives the movable body 32.

  The audio control board 13 is equipped with various circuits for driving the speakers 8L and 8R, drives the speakers 8L and 8R based on the sound designation signal, and outputs the audio designated by the sound designation signal from the speakers 8L and 8R. Let

  The lamp control board 14 is equipped with various circuits for driving the game effect lamp 9, drives the game effect lamp 9 based on the ramp signal, and turns on / off the game effect lamp 9 in a manner specified by the ramp signal. To do. In this way, the display control unit 123 controls audio output and lamp on / off.

  The production control CPU 120 executes sound output, lamp on / off control (sound designation signal, lamp signal supply, etc.) and control of the movable body 32 (supply of a signal for operating the movable body 32, etc.). You may do it.

  The random number circuit 124 counts numerical data indicating various random values (effect random numbers) used for executing various effects in an updatable manner. The effect random number may be updated (updated by software) when the effect control CPU 120 executes a predetermined computer program.

  For example, the I / O 125 mounted on the effect control board 12 transmits an input port for receiving an effect control command transmitted from the main board 11 and the like, and various signals (video signal, sound designation signal, ramp signal). Output port.

  Substrates other than the main board 11 such as the effect control board 12, the sound control board 13, and the lamp control board 14 are also referred to as sub-boards. A plurality of sub-boards may be provided for each function as in the pachinko gaming machine 1, or one sub-board may be configured to have a plurality of functions.

(motion)
Next, the operation (action) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described.

(Main operations of the main board 11)
First, main operations in the main board 11 will be described. When power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated and the CPU 103 executes game control main processing. FIG. 3 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103 on the main board 11.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 3, the CPU 103 first sets prohibition of interruption (step S1). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (step S2). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is on, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. When the output signal from the clear switch is on (step S3; Yes), an initialization process (step S8) is executed. In the initialization process, the CPU 103 performs a RAM clear process for clearing flags, counters, and buffers stored in the RAM 102, and sets initial values in the work area.

  Further, the CPU 103 transmits an effect control command for instructing initialization to the effect control board 12 (step S9). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command, for example, the image display device 5 displays a screen for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized.

  If the output signal from the clear switch is not on (step S3; No), it is determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (step S4). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop process immediately before it becomes unable to operate due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, as well as the status of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether or not the backup flag is on. When the backup flag is off and backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; No), an initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (step S4; Yes), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed using the error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (step). S5). In step S5, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data when the power supply is stopped, based on the parity bit and the checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  If it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (step S5; No), the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, so the initialization process (step S8) is executed.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (step S5; Yes), the CPU 103 performs a recovery process (step S6) for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state when the power supply is stopped. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be.

  And CPU103 transmits the production control command which instruct | indicates the recovery | restoration from a power interruption to the production control board 12 (step S7). In conjunction with this, an effect control command for designating a backed-up gaming state before power interruption, or an effect control for designating the display result of the special figure game being executed when the special figure game is being executed. A command may be transmitted. As these commands, the same commands as those set for transmission in the special symbol process processing described later can be used. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the effect control command for specifying the time of recovery from the power interruption, for example, the image display device 5 notifies that the power recovery from the power interruption has been made or is being recovered from the power interruption. To display the screen. The effect control CPU 120 may perform an appropriate screen display based on the effect control command.

  After finishing the restoration process or the initialization process and transmitting the effect control command to the effect control board 12, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104 (step S10). Then, a CTC register built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically taken every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms) (step S11), and an interrupt is permitted (step S12). ). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 4 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a predetermined switch process, thereby causing the gate switch 21, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port through the switch circuit 110. Whether or not detection signals are received from various switches such as the switch 22B and the count switch 23 is determined (step S21). Subsequently, an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed by executing a predetermined main-side error process, and a warning can be generated if necessary according to the diagnosis result (step S22). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, jackpot information (information indicating the number of occurrence of jackpot) supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1, start information (start Data such as information indicating the number of winnings) and probability variation information (information indicating the number of times the probability has changed) is output (step S23).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random numbers used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S24). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S25). The CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing for each timer interrupt, thereby realizing management of special symbol game execution and suspension, control of a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state, control of a gaming state, etc. Later).

  Following the special symbol process, a normal symbol process is executed (step S26). The CPU 103 executes the normal symbol process for each timer interruption, thereby managing the execution and holding of the ordinary game based on the detection signal from the gate switch 21 (based on the game ball passing through the passing gate 41), The opening control of the variable winning ball apparatus 6B based on “per figure” is enabled. The ordinary game is executed by driving the normal symbol display device 20, and the ordinary figure display number is displayed by turning on the ordinary symbol display device 25C.

  After executing the normal symbol process, a process when a power interruption occurs, a process for paying out a prize ball, or the like may be performed as part of the game control timer interrupt process. Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes command control processing (step S27). The CPU 103 may transmit and set an effect control command in each of the above processes. In the command control process of step S27, a process of transmitting the effect control command set for transmission to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 is performed. After executing the command control process, the interrupt is permitted and then the game control timer interrupt process is terminated.

  FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S25 shown in FIG. 4 as the special symbol process. In this special symbol process, the CPU 103 first executes a start winning determination process (step S101).

  In the start winning determination process, a process of detecting occurrence of a start winning, storing hold information in a predetermined area of the RAM 102, and updating the hold memory number is executed. When a start winning occurs, a random number value for determining a display result (including a jackpot type) and a variation pattern is extracted and stored as hold information. Further, based on the extracted random number value, a process for determining in advance a display result or a variation pattern may be executed. After storing the hold information and the number of reserved memories, transmission setting for transmitting an effect control command for designating determination results such as the occurrence of a start prize, the number of reserved memories, and the prefetch determination is performed on the effect control board 12. . The effect control command at the time of a start winning set in this way is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 by, for example, executing the command control process in step S27 shown in FIG. Is transmitted.

  After executing the start winning determination process in S101, the CPU 103 selects and executes one of the processes in steps S110 to S120 according to the value of the special figure process flag provided in the RAM 102. In each process (steps S <b> 110 to S <b> 120) of the special symbol process, transmission settings for transmitting an effect control command corresponding to each process to the effect control board 12 are performed.

  The special symbol normal process of step S110 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “0” (initial value). In this special symbol normal process, it is determined whether to start the first special symbol game or the second special symbol game based on the presence or absence of the hold information. Also, in the special symbol normal processing, whether or not the display result of the special symbol or decorative symbol is “big hit” or “small hit” based on the random number value for determining the display result, and the big hit type when “big hit” is assumed Is determined (predetermined) before the display result is derived and displayed. Furthermore, in the special symbol normal processing, a confirmed special symbol (any one of the big hit symbol, the small hit symbol, or the lost symbol) to be stopped and displayed in the special symbol game is set corresponding to the determined display result. Thereafter, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “1”, and the special symbol normal process ends. Note that the special figure game using the second special figure may be executed with priority over the special figure game using the first special figure (also referred to as special figure 2 priority digestion). Further, the order of winning game balls to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening may be stored, and the start condition of the special figure game may be established in the order of winning (also referred to as winning order digestion).

  When various determinations are made based on random number values, various tables stored in the ROM 101 (tables in which determination values to be compared with random number values are assigned to the determination results) are referred to. The same applies to other decisions on the main board 11 and various decisions on the effect control board 12. In the effect control board 12, various tables are stored in the ROM 121.

  The variation pattern setting process in step S111 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “1”. In this variation pattern setting process, one of multiple types of variation patterns can be selected using a random value for determining the variation pattern based on the result of prior determination of whether or not the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”. The process to decide on is included. In the variation pattern setting process, when the variation pattern is determined, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2”, and the variation pattern setting process ends.

  Fluctuation patterns include special game execution time (special graphic variable time) (also the execution time of decorative symbol variable display), decorative symbol variable display mode (such as presence / absence of reach), and variable decorative symbol display The content of the production (the type of reach production, etc.) is designated and is also called a variable display pattern.

  The special symbol variation process in step S112 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “2”. This special symbol variation process includes a process for setting the special symbol to be varied in the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B, and an elapsed time after the special symbol starts to vary. It includes processing to measure Further, it is also determined whether or not the measured elapsed time has reached a special figure fluctuation time corresponding to the fluctuation pattern. When the time elapsed since the start of the special symbol variation reaches the special symbol variation time, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “3”, and the special symbol variation process is terminated.

  The special symbol stop process in step S113 is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is “3”. In this special symbol stop process, the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B stops the variation of the special symbol, and stops (displays) the definite special symbol that is the display result of the special symbol. The process to set for is included. When the display result is “big hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “4”. On the other hand, when the big hit flag is off and the display result is “small hit”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “8”. When the display result is “lost”, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”. When the display result is “small hit” or “losing”, the gaming state is also updated when the time reduction state or the probability variation state is controlled and when the end of the number cut is established. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the special symbol stop process ends.

  The big hit release pre-processing in step S114 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “4”. This pre-opening process for jackpots includes a process for starting the execution of the round in the jackpot gaming state and setting the open winning opening based on the fact that the display result is “hit” It is. When the big prize opening is in an open state, a process of supplying a solenoid drive signal to the solenoid 82 for the big prize opening door is executed. At this time, for example, an open upper limit period in which the big winning opening is opened or an upper limit execution number of rounds is set corresponding to which of the big hit types. When these settings are finished, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, and the big hit release pre-processing is finished.

  The big hit release processing in step S115 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is "5". In the big hit opening process, the winning prize opening is based on the process of measuring the elapsed time since the big winning opening is in the open state, the measured elapsed time, the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23, and the like. The process etc. which determine whether it became the timing which returns to a closed state from an open state are included. Then, when returning the prize winning opening to the closed state, after executing processing for stopping the supply of the solenoid driving signal to the solenoid 82 for the prize winning opening door, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “6”, The processing during the jackpot release is terminated.

  The big hit release post-processing in step S116 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “6”. In this post-hit-opening process, a process for determining whether or not the number of executions of the round in which the big winning opening is opened has reached the set upper limit execution number, and when the upper limit execution number is reached, the big hit game state The process etc. which perform the setting for ending are included. When the round execution count does not reach the upper limit execution count, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “5”, whereas when the round execution count reaches the upper limit execution count, the special figure process flag value is updated. The value is updated to “7”. When the value of the special figure process flag is updated, the processing after the big hit release ends.

  The big hit end process in step S117 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “7”. The jackpot end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period in which an ending effect is executed as an effect operation for notifying the end of the jackpot game state, and a probability change corresponding to the end of the jackpot game state. This includes processing for performing various settings for starting control and time-saving control. When such a setting is made, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the jackpot end processing ends.

  The small hit pre-release process in step S118 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “8”. This pre-opening process for small hits includes a process for setting the big winning opening in the small hit gaming state based on the fact that the display result is “small hit”. At this time, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “9”, and the small hit release pre-processing ends.

  The small hit releasing process in step S119 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “9”. In the small hit opening process, the process for measuring the elapsed time since the big prize opening is in the open state, and the timing for returning the big prize opening from the open state to the closed state based on the measured elapsed time, etc. The process etc. which determine whether or not were included are included. When the big prize opening is returned to the closed state and the end timing of the small hit gaming state is reached, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “10”, and the small hit opening process ends.

  The small hit end process in step S120 is executed when the value of the special figure process flag is “10”. This small hit end process includes a process of waiting until a waiting time corresponding to a period during which the effect operation for notifying the end of the small hit gaming state is executed. Here, when the small hit gaming state ends, the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 before the small hit gaming state is continued. When the waiting time at the end of the small hit gaming state has elapsed, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “0”, and the small hit end processing ends.

(Main operations of the production control board 12)
Next, main operations in the effect control board 12 will be described. In the effect control board 12, when the supply of the power supply voltage is received from the power supply board or the like, the effect control CPU 120 is activated and executes the effect control main process as shown in the flowchart of FIG. When the effect control main process shown in FIG. 6 is started, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (step S71), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and displays the effect control board 12. Performs register settings for the mounted CTC (counter / timer circuit). Further, an initial operation control process is executed (step S72). In the initial operation control process, control for performing the initial operation of the movable body 32 such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for performing a predetermined operation check is executed.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the timer interrupt flag is on (step S73). The timer interrupt flag is set to the ON state every time a predetermined time (for example, 2 milliseconds) elapses based on, for example, the CTC register setting. At this time, if the timer interrupt flag is off (step S73; No), the process of step S73 is repeatedly executed, and the process stands by.

  On the side of the effect control board 12, an interrupt for receiving the effect control command from the main board 11 is generated separately from the timer interrupt that occurs every time a predetermined time elapses. This interruption is generated when, for example, an effect control INT signal from the main board 11 is turned on. When an interruption due to the turn-on of the effect control INT signal occurs, the effect control CPU 120 automatically sets the interrupt prohibition, but if a CPU that does not automatically enter the interrupt disable state is used, the interrupt is interrupted. It is desirable to issue a prohibition instruction (DI instruction). The effect control CPU 120 executes, for example, a predetermined command reception interrupt process in response to an interrupt when the effect control INT signal is turned on. In this command reception interrupt process, an effect control command is fetched from a predetermined input port that receives a control signal transmitted from the main board 11 via the relay board 15 among the input ports included in the I / O 125. The effect control command captured at this time is stored in an effect control command reception buffer provided in the RAM 122, for example. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 120 ends the command reception interrupt processing after setting the interrupt permission.

  If the timer interrupt flag is on in step S73 (step S73; Yes), the timer interrupt flag is cleared and turned off (step S74), and command analysis processing is executed (step S75). In the command analysis processing, for example, after reading various effect control commands transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 of the main board 11 and stored in the effect control command reception buffer, the read effect control commands are used. Corresponding settings and controls are performed. For example, the read effect control command can be stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 or stored in the RAM 122 so that the effect control command can be confirmed by the effect control process or the like. Turn on the provided reception flag. Further, when the effect control command specifies the gaming state, the display control unit 123 may be instructed to display a background according to the gaming state.

  After executing the command analysis process in step S75, an effect control process process is executed (step S76). In the effect control process, for example, an effect image display operation in the display area of the image display device 5, an audio output operation from the speakers 8L and 8R, a lighting operation in a decorative light emitter such as the game effect lamp 9 and a decoration LED, and the movable body 32 Control for operating various effect devices, such as the drive operation, is performed. In addition, determination, determination, setting, and the like according to an effect control command or the like transmitted from the main board 11 are performed on the control content of the effect operation using various effect devices.

  Following the effect control process in step S76, an effect random number update process is executed (step S77), and at least a part of the effect random numbers used on the effect control board 12 side is updated by software. Thereafter, the process returns to step S73. Another process may be executed before returning to the process of step S73.

  FIG. 7 is a flowchart showing an example of processing executed in step S76 of FIG. 6 as the effect control process. In the effect control process shown in FIG. 7, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a prefetch notice setting process (step S161). In the pre-reading notice setting process, for example, determination, determination, and setting for executing the pre-reading notice effect are performed based on the effect control command at the time of start winning transmitted from the main board 11. Further, a process for displaying a hold display is executed based on the hold memory number specified from the effect control command.

  After executing the process of step S161, the CPU 120 for effect control selects and executes one of the following processes of steps S170 to S177 according to the value of the effect process flag provided in the RAM 122, for example.

  The variable display start waiting process in step S170 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “0” (initial value). This variable display start waiting process is a process for determining whether or not to start variable display of decorative symbols on the image display device 5 based on whether or not a command for specifying the start of variable display is received from the main board 11. Etc. When it is determined that the variable display of the decorative design in the image display device 5 is started, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “1”, and the variable display start waiting process is ended.

  The variable display start setting process in step S171 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “1”. In this variable display start setting process, based on the display result and variation pattern specified by the effect control command, the display result of the variable display of the decorative design (determined decorative design), the variable display mode of the decorative design, the reach effect and various The presence / absence of execution of various effects such as a notice effect, its mode, execution start timing, and the like are determined. Then, an effect control pattern (a collection of control data for instructing the display control unit 123 to execute the effect) reflecting the determination result or the like is set. Thereafter, based on the set production control pattern, the display control unit 123 is instructed to start the variable display of decorative symbols, the value of the production process flag is updated to “2”, and the variable display start setting process is terminated. The display control unit 123 causes the image display device 5 to start variable display of decorative symbols in response to an instruction to start execution of variable display of decorative symbols.

  The variable display effect process in step S172 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “2”. In this variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 instructs the display control unit 123 to display an effect image based on the effect control pattern set in step S171 on the display screen of the image display device 5. In addition, driving the movable body 32, outputting sound and sound effect from the speakers 8L and 8R by outputting a command (sound effect signal) to the sound control board 13, and issuing a command (lighting signal) to the lamp control board 14 Various effects control during variable display of decorative symbols, such as turning on / off / flashing the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED by the output, is executed. After such effect control is performed, for example, an end code indicating the end of variable display of decorative symbols is read from the effect control pattern, or a command specifying stop display of the final decorative symbols is received from the main board 11. Corresponding to what has been done, the definite decorative symbol that is the display result of the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the definite decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “3”, and the effect process during variable display ends.

  The special figure waiting process in step S173 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “3”. In this special figure waiting process, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not an effect control command for designating the start of the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state has been received from the main board 11. When an effect control command designating starting a big hit gaming state or a small hit gaming state is received, if the command designates the start of a big hit gaming state, the value of the production process flag is set to “6”. Update to "". On the other hand, if the command specifies the start of the small hit gaming state, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “4” which is a value corresponding to the effect processing during the small hit. Also, when the command waiting time of the command has passed without receiving a command specifying that the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state is started, it is determined that the display result in the special figure game is “losing”. Thus, the value of the production process flag is updated to “0” which is an initial value. When the value of the production process flag is updated, the waiting process per special figure is terminated.

  The small hitting effect process in step S174 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “4”. In this small hit effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the small hit game state, and executes various effect controls in the small hit game state based on the setting contents. . Also, in the small hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command to end the small hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect process flag is a value corresponding to the small hit end effect. It is updated to a certain “5”, and the small hit effect production process is terminated.

  The small hit end effect process in step S175 is a process executed when the value of the effect control process flag is “5”. In this small hit end effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the small hit game state, and various effect controls at the end of the small hit game state based on the set content. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to the initial value “0”, and the small hit end effect process is ended.

  The big hit effect process in step S176 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “6”. In the jackpot effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the effect contents in the jackpot game state, and executes various effect controls in the jackpot game state based on the set contents. Also, in the big hit effect processing, for example, in response to receiving a command for ending the big hit gaming state from the main board 11, the value of the effect control process flag is a value corresponding to the ending effect processing. 7 ", and the big hit effect processing is terminated.

  The ending effect process in step S177 is a process executed when the value of the effect process flag is “7”. In this ending effect process, the effect control CPU 120 sets, for example, an effect control pattern corresponding to the end of the jackpot gaming state, and performs various effects control of the ending effect at the end of the jackpot gaming state based on the set contents. Execute. Thereafter, the value of the effect process flag is updated to “0”, which is the initial value, and the ending effect process ends.

(Modification of basic explanation)
The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the basic description above, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the spirit of the present invention.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the above basic description is a payout type gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes based on the occurrence of winnings, but encloses the game media and gives points based on the occurrence of winnings. It may be an enclosed game machine.

  Only one type of symbol (for example, a symbol indicating “−”) is displayed during variable display of the special symbol, and variable display may be performed by repeatedly displaying and extinguishing the symbol. Further, in the case where the symbol is displayed during variable display, the symbol may not be displayed when the variable display is stopped (a symbol indicating “−” may not be displayed as a display result).

  In the above basic description, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operating lever by the player, When the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the user, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player (for example, a big bonus) The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which one or more of regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.) are mounted.

  The program and data for realizing the present invention are not limited to a form distributed and provided by a detachable recording medium with respect to the computer device or the like included in the pachinko gaming machine 1; It is also possible to adopt a form that is distributed by installing it in a storage device. Furthermore, the program and data for realizing the present invention are distributed by downloading from other devices on a network connected via a communication line or the like by providing a communication processing unit. It doesn't matter.

  The game execution mode is not only executed by attaching a detachable recording medium, but can also be executed by temporarily storing a program and data downloaded via a communication line or the like in an internal memory or the like. It is also possible to execute directly using hardware resources on the other device side on a network connected via a communication line or the like. Furthermore, the game can be executed by exchanging data with other computer devices or the like via a network.

  In the present specification, the comparison expression (expression such as “high”, “low”, “difference”, etc.) of various ratios such as the performance execution ratio is that the ratio of one is “0%”. May be included. For example, one of the ratios is “0%” and the other is a ratio of “100%” or a ratio of less than “100%”.

(Explanation about the characteristic part 122SG)
Next, the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. Note that a front view of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the feature section 122SG of the present embodiment is the same as the above-described feature section 31AK, and thus a description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIGS. 8A and 8B, the main substrate 11 in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment is housed in a substrate case 122SG201 configured to be openable by a first member and a second member. It is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state. Further, on the main board 11, a lock switch 122SG051 for switching between a setting change state in which the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed and a setting confirmation state in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed. And a setting changeover switch 122SG052 that functions as a setting switch for changing a setting value such as a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate) described later in the setting change state.

  A setting switch main body provided with a player-operable operation unit such as the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting switch 122SG052 is housed in the board case 122SG201 together with the main board 11, and the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting switch 122SG052. Is exposed to the rear side through an opening formed in the rear left portion of the substrate case 122SG201 so that the device can be operated without opening the substrate case 122SG201.

  Since the board case 122SG201 having the lock switch 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 is provided on the back of the pachinko game machine 1, it is extremely difficult to operate the game machine in a state where the game machine frame 3 is closed. The operation becomes possible by opening the gaming machine frame 3 by using it. Further, the lock switch 122SG051 requires the operation of a setting key owned by a store clerk or the like at a game arcade, so that only a store clerk having the set key can operate the lock switch 122SG051. The lock switch 122SG051 is also a switch capable of executing an ON / OFF switching operation described later and an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation) by using a setting key. Note that, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the form in which the door key and the setting key are separate keys has been exemplified, but these may be shared by one key.

  Since the main board 11 cannot be viewed in a state where the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is not opened, the front face when viewing the main board 11 refers to the back side of the gaming board 2 in a state where the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is opened. This is a front view when viewing, and is different from the front face of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And an LED control command used to control the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  FIG. 8-3 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the effect control command used in the feature section 122SG in the present embodiment. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always “1”, and the first bit of the EXT data is “0”. The command form shown in FIG. 8A is an example, and another command form may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one or a plurality of three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 8A, the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating a variation start in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in second special symbol display device 4B. The command 81XXH is a decoration that is variably displayed in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5 corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol in the special figure game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variable display result notification command, and is an effect control command for specifying a variable display result such as a special symbol or a decorative symbol. In the variation display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), a result of determining whether the variation display result is “losing”, “big hit”, or “small hit” (predetermined result) ), And different EXT data are set according to the result of determining which of the plurality of types of the jackpot is to be used when the fluctuation display result is “big hit” (big hit type determination result).

  In the variable display result notification command, for example, as shown in FIG. 8-3 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result designation command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “losing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit A" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit B" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying a preliminary determination result that the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "big hit C" and a big hit type determination result. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating the stop (decision) of the decoration symbol change in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R on the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, a command 9500H is a first game state designation command corresponding to a game state (low base state, normal state) in which time reduction control is not performed, and a command 9501H is a game state (high base state) in which time reduction control is performed. , Time-saving state).

  The command 96XXH is an error (abnormal) designation command for specifying the occurrence of an error (abnormal) and the type of the generated error (abnormal) in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the error (abnormal) designation command, for example, the EXT data corresponding to each error (abnormal) is set, thereby specifying which error (abnormal) has been determined to occur on the effect control board 12 side. The occurrence of the specified error (abnormality) is notified by an error notification process described later.

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fan fare command”) for designating the display of an effect image indicating the start of the big hit game state or the small hit game state. The command A1XXH is a special winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the special winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the opening of the special winning opening that notifies that the special winning opening has been changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state or the small hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating the display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game state or the small hit game state.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, different EXT data may be set in accordance with the pre-determined result or the big hit type decision result, for example, by setting the same EXT data as the variable display result notification command. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, the correspondence between the pre-determination result and the big hit type determination result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence in the variable display result notification command. . Different EXT data is set for the notification command during opening of the special winning opening and the notification command after opening the special winning opening, in accordance with the number of rounds executed (for example, “1” to “15”) in the big hit game state or the small hit game state. Is done.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established. The command B200H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B is detected by the second starting opening switch 22B, and a starting winning (second starting winning) has occurred. This is a second starting port winning designation command for notifying that the second starting condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved storage number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The command C2XXH is a second reserved storage number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved storage number so that the special figure reserved storage number can be specified on the image display device 5 or the like. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved memory number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

  Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending memory number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending memory number may be used.

  The command D0XXH is a setting value designation command for designating a newly set value from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120). The command E101H is a hot start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up without clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (restoration of power interruption, also called hot start). The command E102H is a cold start notification command for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has started up by clearing the contents of the RAM 102 (cold start). The command E103H is a setting value change start notification command for notifying that the operation of changing the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started in the setting changing state). The command E104H is a setting value change end notification command for notifying that the setting value change operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has ended. The command E105H is a set value check start notification command for wp notification that the operation of checking the set value of the pachinko game machine 1 has been started (the pachinko game machine 1 has been started in a setting change state). The command E106H is a set value check end notification command for notifying that the set value check operation of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been completed.

  The game control microcomputer 100 mounted on the main board 11 is, for example, a one-chip microcomputer, and includes a ROM (Read Only Memory) 101 for storing a game control program and fixed data, and a game control work. A RAM (Random Access Memory) 102 that provides an area, a CPU (Central Processing Unit) 103 that executes a game control program to perform a control operation, and updates numerical data indicating a random value independently of the CPU 103. It comprises a random number circuit 104 for performing, an input / output port (I / O) 105, and a real-time clock (RTC) 106 capable of outputting time information.

  As an example, in the game control microcomputer 100, a process for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is executed by the CPU 103 executing a program read from the ROM 101. At this time, a fixed data reading operation in which the CPU 103 reads fixed data from the ROM 101, a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 writes various variable data in the RAM 102 and temporarily stores the same, and a variable data writing operation in which the CPU 103 temporarily stores various variable data in the RAM 102. Read operation, CPU 103 receives an input of various signals from outside the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105, and CPU 103 sends the signal to the outside of the game control microcomputer 100 via the I / O 105. And a transmission operation for outputting various signals.

  FIG. 8D is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 8-4, in the characteristic portion 122SG of this embodiment, in addition to the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, the random number value MR2 for determining the jackpot type, the variation pattern Numerical data representing each of the random number value MR3 for determination, the random number value MR4 for ordinary figure display result determination, and the random number value MR5 for determining the initial value of MR4 are controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. These random numbers MR1 to MR5 may be counted by the software using a different random counter in the CPU 103, or may be updated by the random number circuit 104. The random number circuit 104 may be built in the game control microcomputer 100, or may be configured as a random number circuit chip different from the game control microcomputer 100. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, an example is shown in which each of the random numbers MR1 to MR5 is used as a value in the range shown in FIG. 8-4, but the present invention is not limited to this, and The range of MR1 to MR5 may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  FIG. 8-5 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the fluctuation display result is “losing”, the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” and “reach” respectively. A plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance in response to a case where the display result is “big hit”. In addition, one variation pattern is prepared in advance in response to the case where the variation display result is “small hit”. The fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “losing” and the fluctuation display mode of the decorative symbol is “non-reach” is referred to as a non-reach fluctuation pattern (also referred to as a “non-reach loss fluctuation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to a case where the display result is “losing” and the variation display mode of the decorative symbol is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as a “reach loss variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach variation pattern and the reach variation pattern are included in the loss variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “lost”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern. A fluctuation pattern corresponding to a case where the fluctuation display result is “small hit” is referred to as a small hit fluctuation pattern.

  The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach change pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach, normal reach α, normal reach β,. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ in addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

  As shown in FIG. 8-5, regarding the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach effect of the normal reach is performed in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the super reach variation patterns of super reach α and super reach β It is set shorter than. Further, regarding the special figure variation time of the super-reach variation pattern in which the super-reach effect such as super-reach α and super-reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super-reach effect of super-reach β is executed is The special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is performed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the super reach β, the super reach α, and the normal reach are set so that the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” so that the big hit expectation becomes higher. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

  In the characteristic section 122SG of the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are classified into non-reach types, normal reach types, super reach types, and the like. Instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the determined type after the determination, the random number MR3 for determining the variation pattern is determined without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random number First, the type of the variation pattern is determined from the random number for pattern type determination, and then the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type is determined. It may be determined the variation pattern to be executed from.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-5, an example is shown in which the variation content (effect content) is determined in advance for each variation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this, and even if the variation pattern is the same, the variation content (effect content) may be different depending on the set value that is set. For example, in the case of the variation pattern PA2-1 of the normal reach loss, when the set value is 1, the variation pattern becomes the normal reach loss, and when the set value is 2, the pseudo continuous production is performed. If the set value is 3 as the variation pattern that is executed twice and the non-reach is lost, the pseudo continuous effect may be executed three times and the variation pattern becomes the super reach loss.

  In the game control microcomputer 100, the CPU 103 executes the program read from the ROM 101 and uses the RAM 102 as a work area to execute various processes for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Further, the CPU 103 can generate all of the various random numbers used on the main board 11 side by executing the random number generation program.

  The ROM 101 included in the game control microcomputer 100 stores various table data used for controlling the progress of the game, in addition to the game control program. For example, the ROM 101 stores table data constituting a plurality of determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-6 and 8-7 prepared for the CPU 103 to make various types of determinations and decisions. In the ROM 101, table data constituting a plurality of control pattern tables used for the CPU 103 to output various control signals from the main board 11 and a variation mode of each symbol in a variable display of a special symbol, a normal symbol, etc. And a variation pattern table storing a plurality of types of variation patterns.

  The judgment table stored in the ROM 101 includes, for example, a display result judgment table (set value 1) shown in FIG. 8-6 (A), a display result judgment table (set value 2) shown in FIG. 8-6 (B), and FIG. -6 (C), a display result determination table (setting value 3), a big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 8-7 (A), and a big hit type determination shown in FIG. 8-7 (B). In addition to the table (for the second special symbol), a large hit variation pattern determination table, a small hit variation pattern determination table, a loss variation pattern determination table, a general figure display result determination table (not shown), and a general figure variation pattern determination table (not shown) ) Etc. are included.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment is configured such that the winning probability (winning rate) of the big hit and the small hit changes according to the set value. Specifically, in a special symbol normal process of a special symbol process process to be described later, by using a display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to a set value, a winning probability (winning rate) of a big hit and a small hit is changed. Has become. The set value has three stages of 1 to 3, 1 is the highest payout rate, and the payout rate decreases as the value increases in the order of 1, 2, and 3. That is, when 1 is set as the set value, the advantage is the highest for the player, and as the value increases in the order of 2, 3, the advantage gradually decreases. In other words, the setting value 1 is the smallest value, which is the most disadvantageous value to the game arcade side, and the larger the value becomes in the order of 2, 3, the more advantageous the game value side is.

  FIGS. 8-6 (A) to 8-6 (C) are explanatory diagrams showing display result determination tables corresponding to each set value. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In the feature section 122SG of the present embodiment, a common display result determination table is used for the first special figure and the second special figure as the display result determination table, but the present invention is not limited to this. Alternatively, separate display result determination tables may be used for the first and second special maps.

  As shown in FIGS. 8-6 (A) to 8-6, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state is the probable change state (high-probability state), the normal state or the time saving state (low-probability state) Are assigned to the special map display result of "big hit". Thus, in the probable change state (high-precision state) in which the probable change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time-saving state (low-precision state) is set, the special map display result is set to the "big hit" to control the big hit gaming state. Then, the determined probability (in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, 1/99 when the set value is 1, 1/150 when the set value is 2, and 1/200 when the set value is 3) In comparison, the probability that it is determined that the special map display result is controlled to the big hit game state as the “big hit” is increased (in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the set value is 1, 1/50, and the set value is (1/99 for 2 and 1/150 for 3). That is, in each display result determination table, when the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the probable state (high accuracy state), the probability that the pachinko gaming machine 1 is determined to be controlled to the big hit gaming state compared to the normal state or the time saving state. Is determined, the determination value is assigned to the determination result of whether or not to control to the big hit gaming state.

  In each of the display result determination tables, the special figure display result is set to “small hit” depending on whether the gaming state is a normal state or a time saving state (low-probability state) or a probable change state (high-probability state). The determination values are assigned so that the probability of being determined to control the small hit game is the same (for example, 1/50 when the set value is 1, 1/99 when the set value is 2, 1/99, the set value Is 1/200 if is 3.)

  Further, as described above, in each gaming state, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the special figure display result is "big hit" or "small hit", and the big hit gaming state or the small hit When the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a high probability of being determined to be controlled to the gaming state, the special value display result is "big hit" or "small hit" when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is "big hit" or "big hit". The determination values are assigned so that the probability of being determined when the state is controlled is low (big hit probability and small hit probability: setting value 1> setting value 2> setting value 3).

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines that the value of MR1 corresponds to the big hit shown in FIGS. 8-6 (A) to 8-6 (C). If any of the hit determination values match, the special symbol is determined to be a big hit (big hit A to big hit C). When MR1 matches one of the hit determination values corresponding to the small hits shown in FIGS. 8-6 (A) to 8-6 (C), it is determined that the special symbol is to be a small hit. That is, the winning of the big hit and the small hit is determined with the probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 8-6 (A) to 8-6 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit and the probability (ratio) of a small hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to a big hit game state, but to determine whether to stop the symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol. Determining whether or not to make a small hit means determining whether or not to control the small hitting game state. However, the stop in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B is performed. That is, it is determined whether or not the symbol is a small hit symbol.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, in the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-6 (A) to 8-6 (C), an example is shown in which the winning probability of a small hit is made different. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and regardless of which display result determination table is used, the winning probability per small hit is the same (regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1). It may be.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit or a small hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 8-6 (A) to 8-6 (C). However, a big hit determination table and a small hit determination table are separately provided for each set value, and it is individually determined whether or not the fluctuation display result is a big hit or a small hit. Is also good. Further, as shown in FIGS. 8-6 (A) to 8-6 (C), the judgment values are assigned to the small hits in the respective display result judgment tables, but as shown in FIG. 8-6 (C). In the display result determination table (display result determination table referred to when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3), the determination value may not be assigned to the small hit. That is, the fact that the ratio of the small hit probability differs depending on the set value includes that the small hit probability is 0%.

  In the present embodiment, a total of three setting values 1 to 3 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine is not limited thereto. The set value that can be set to 1 may be two or four or more.

  FIGS. 8A and 8B are explanatory diagrams showing a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) and a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) stored in the ROM 101. It is. Among these, FIG. 8-7 (A) determines the big hit type by using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a table in the case of doing. In addition, FIG. 8-7 (B) determines the jackpot type using the hold memory based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening (that is, when the variation display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a case table.

  The big hit type determination table indicates that the big hit type is one of the big hit A to the big hit C based on the hit type determination random number (MR2) when the change display result is determined to be a big hit symbol. Is a table that is referred to in order to determine.

  Here, the big hit type in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as the big hit type, a big hit A (also referred to as a non-probable variable big hit) in which only the time-saving control is executed after the end of the big hit game state to shift to the low-probability high base state, After the end, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control are executed, and a big hit B and a big hit C (also referred to as a big change big hit) which shift to the high-precision high base state are set.

  The jackpot game state by the "big hit A" is a normally open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. The big hit game state by “B” is a normal open big hit that is repeatedly executed ten times (so-called ten rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. Further, the big hit game state by the "big hit C" is a normal open big hit that is repeatedly executed 15 times (so-called 15 rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player.

  The time-saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the “big hit A” is executed by executing a predetermined number of special figure games (100 times in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment) or by executing the special number of special times game. The game ends when the big hit game state is reached before the figure game is executed.

  On the other hand, the high-accuracy control and the time-saving control executed after the big hit game state of the big hit B and the big hit C are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the big hit game state is ended. Therefore, if the big hit that has occurred again is the big hit B or the big hit C, the high-precision control and the time-saving control are executed again after the end of the big hit gaming state, so that the big hit gaming state is continuous without going through the normal state. , A so-called connected state.

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, an example in which three types of big hits A to big hit C are provided as the big hit types is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the big hit types are two. You may provide below kind, or four or more kinds.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 8A, in the big hit type determination table (for the first special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the MR2 determination value range is 0 to 299. , 0 to 99 are assigned to jackpot A, 100 to 149 are assigned to jackpot B, and 150 to 299 are assigned to jackpot C. When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 199 are assigned to the big hit B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range 0 to 299 of MR2, 0 to 99 are allocated to the big hit A, and 100 to 249 are allocated to the big hit B. , 250 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

  As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the first special symbol, the rate of determining the big hit A in which only the time saving control is executed after the big hit game is finished is the same, while the time saving control after the big hit game is finished. Of the jackpot B and the jackpot C in which both of the jackpot B and the jackpot C are executed, the ratio of determining the jackpot C decreases in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. That is, when the fluctuation special figure is the first special symbol, the payout rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is 3 when the payout rate is the lowest.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 8-7 (B), in the big hit type determination table (for the second special symbol), when the set value is “1”, the determination value range of MR2 is 0 to 299. Among them, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 299 are assigned to the big hit C (the judgment value is not assigned to the big hit B). When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 299 of the determination value of MR2, 0 to 99 are assigned to the big hit A, and 100 to 149 are assigned to the big hit B. , 150 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C. When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range of MR2 0 to 299, 0 to 99 are assigned to the jackpot A, and 100 to 199 are assigned to the jackpot B. , 200 to 299 are assigned to the jackpot C.

  As described above, when a big hit occurs in the special figure game of the second special symbol, the rate of determining the big hit A in which only the time-saving control is executed after the big hit game ends is the same, while the time-saving control after the big hit game ends. Among the big hits B and big hits C in which both the positive hit control and the positive change control are executed, the ratio of determining the big hit C decreases in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. In other words, when the fluctuating special figure is the second special symbol, the payout rate is highest when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is 3 when the payout rate is the lowest.

  In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, if the fluctuation special map is the second special map and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the big hit type is determined to be the big hit B. The example in which the jackpot type is determined in accordance with the set value differs from that in which one of the jackpot types is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%). Although it is included, even when the change special map is the second special map and the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, a case where the big hit type is determined to be the big hit B may be provided. .

  As described above, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the determination ratio of the big hit type when the variable display result is a big hit is different depending on the set value, so that the gaming interest can be improved. It has become.

  In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the big hit type is determined using MR2 which is a random value for big hit type determination, but the present invention is not limited to this. The determination may be performed using MR1 which is a random value for determining the special figure display result.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, the smaller the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is, the more advantageous to the player (the big hit probability and the small hit probability are increased, and the big hit C as the big hit type is determined. Although the present invention is not limited to this, the present invention is not limited thereto, and a larger set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be more advantageous to the player. .

  In addition, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, while the big hit probability and the small hit probability change according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the game performance itself does not change. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the game characteristics may be changed according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  For example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 1, the jackpot probability in the normal state is 1/320, and the probability change state loops at a rate of 65% (so-called probability change loop type). When the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 2, the big hit probability in the normal state is 1/200, and the game ball is set in the special variable winning ball device 7 during the big hit game. On the other hand, the game state after the end of the big hit game is controlled to be in a certain change state, while the ratio of the game balls passing through the predetermined switch during the big hit game is different according to the fluctuation special map (so-called V). If the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 3, the big hit probability is 1/320 and the small hit probability is 1/50, and the game is played during a high base (during time saving control). Ball is specially variable A predetermined switch provided in the sphere device 7 may be a game of (so-called one two-kind mixed type) which controls the jackpot gaming state based on passing. Furthermore, although the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the same as 1 to 3, the gaming property is the same, but the big hit probability and the small hit probability are higher than when these set values are any of 1 to 3. A setting may be provided in which the number of prize balls that can be acquired during the big hit game is small (for example, when the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is 4).

  Furthermore, when changing the playability according to the set value, the common switch may be used for different purposes. Specifically, in the above-described example, when the set value is 1 or 4, the predetermined switch provided in the special variable prize ball device 7 is switched to the effect switch (every time the game ball passes through the predetermined area). Used as a switch for executing a predetermined effect), and when the set value is 2 or 3, the predetermined switch is used as a game switch (the game state is changed based on the fact that the game ball has passed the predetermined switch, It may be used as a switch for controlling a big hit game state.

  Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. Is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, as the variation pattern determination table, a variation pattern determination table for a big hit which is used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “big hit”, and the variation display result is “small hit”. A variation pattern determination table for big hits used when it is predetermined is determined, and a variation pattern determination table for loss used when it is determined in advance that the variation display result is “losed” is prepared in advance. ing.

  In the jackpot variation pattern determination table, the variation pattern of the normal reach jackpot (PB1-1), the variation pattern of the super reach α jackpot (PB1-2), and the variation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3) On the other hand, a predetermined random number value within a range that the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination can take is assigned as a determination value.

  As shown in FIG. 8A and FIG. 8B, the jackpot variation pattern determination table used when the jackpot type is the jackpot A (the jackpot A ) And a jackpot variation pattern determination table (for jackpot B and jackpot C) used when the jackpot type is for jackpot B and jackpot C are prepared in advance. A) and the big hit change pattern determination tables (big hit B and big hit C) have a normal reach big hit change pattern (PB1-1), a super reach α big hit change pattern (PB1-2), and a super reach β big hit For each variation pattern of the variation pattern (PB1-3), a predetermined random number within a range that a random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take The value is assigned as the judgment value.

  As shown in FIG. 8A, in the big hit variation pattern determination table (for big hit A), when the set value is “1”, the MR3 determination value range is 0 to 997 in the range of 0 to 997. Up to 300 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, 301 to 800 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and 801 to 997 are assigned to the super reach β. It is assigned to the jackpot fluctuation pattern (PB1-3). When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 350 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 351 to 825 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is allocated, and the fluctuation pattern of 826 to 997 is allocated to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3). When the set value is “3”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 400 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 401 to 850 are The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is assigned, and 851 to 997 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β jackpot (PB1-3).

  As shown in FIG. 8-9 (B), in the change pattern determination table for big hits (for big hit B and big hit C), when the set value is “1”, the determination value range of MR3 is 0 to 997. , 0 to 100 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach jackpot, 101 to 350 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot, and 351 to 997 are assigned to the It is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “2”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 150 are assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 151 to 450 are assigned. The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α big hit is allocated to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β big hit. When the set value is “3”, in the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 200 are assigned to the variation pattern (PB1-1) of the normal reach big hit, and 201 to 550 are assigned. The fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is assigned to the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of 551 to 997.

  As described above, when the jackpot A is won in the special figure game, the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-2) of the super reach α jackpot is the rate of determining the fluctuation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot. And lower in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3. Further, when the jackpot B or the jackpot C is won in the special figure game, the rate of determining the variation pattern (PB1-3) of the super reach β jackpot determines the variation pattern (PB1-2) of the superreach α jackpot. It is higher than the ratio and lowers in the order of the set values 1, 2, and 3.

  In other words, in the present embodiment, when the type of the big hit is “big hit B” or “big hit C”, the super reach β is easily determined, and the big hit type is “big hit A”. In this case, the super reach α is assigned so as to be easily determined, so that when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β is executed, the player may determine that “big hit B” or “big hit C” may be obtained. Expectations can be increased.

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for small hits, a predetermined random number value within a range that the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take for the variation pattern of the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1) is the determination value. Assigned as. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8C, in the small hit variation pattern determination table, even if the set value is any of “1”, “2”, and “3”, MR3 Of the determination value range 0 to 997, 0 to 997 are assigned to the small hit variation pattern (PC1-1). In addition, although only PC1-1 is provided as a small hit variation pattern in the present embodiment, the present invention is not limited to this, and two or more variation patterns are provided as small hit variation patterns. With the setting values “1”, “2”, and “3”, the small hit variation pattern may be determined at a different rate from a plurality of variation patterns.

  Further, the loss variation pattern determination table includes a loss variation pattern determination table A, which is used when the number of stored games is 1 or less in the low base state in which the game state is not subjected to the time saving control, and a low base. Loss variation pattern determination table B used when the total number of pending storages is 2 to 4 in the state, and variation for loss used when the total number of pending storages is 5 to 8 in the low base state A pattern determination table C and a loss variation pattern determination table D used when the game state is the high base state in which the time saving control is performed are prepared in advance.

  In the variation pattern determination table A for loss, the variation pattern of non-reach loss without shortening (PA1-1), the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), the super reach A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range where a random value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for a variation pattern of β loss (PA2-3).

  As shown in FIG. 8-10 (A), in the variation pattern determination table for losing (for one or less low base medium total pending storage number), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 0 to 997, the range from 0 to 350 is assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and the range from 351 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and up to 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range of MR3 0 to 997, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range of MR3 0 to 997, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table B, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach that correspond to the total number of stored memories of 2 to 4 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range where a random number value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 8-10 (B), in the loss variation pattern determination table B (for 2 to 4 low-base medium total pending storages), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 Of the range 0 to 997, 0 to 400 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 401 to 700 are assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), 701 to 900 are assigned to a variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and 901 to 997 are assigned to a variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range of MR3 0 to 997, 0 to 450 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 451 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). Further, when the set value is “3”, out of the determination value range of MR3 0 to 997, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3).

  Further, in the loss variation pattern determination table C, the shortened non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-3), the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1), and the super reach that correspond to the total number of stored memories of 5 to 8 are stored. A predetermined random number value is assigned as a determination value in a range where the random pattern value MR3 for determining a variation pattern can be taken for the variation pattern of α loss (PA2-2) and the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). ing.

  As shown in FIG. 8-10 (C), in the loss variation pattern determination table C (for five or more low base medium total pending storages), when the set value is “1”, the determination value of MR3 is Of the range 0 to 997, the range from 0 to 450 is assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and the range from 451 to 700 is assigned to the normal reach loss variation pattern (PA2-1). Up to 900 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and up to 901 to 997 are assigned to the variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range of MR3 0 to 997, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3).

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table D for loss, the variation pattern of the shortened non-reach loss (PA1-4), the variation pattern of the normal reach loss (PA2-1), and the variation pattern of the super reach α loss corresponding to the time reduction control are shown. PA2-2) and a variation pattern of super reach β loss (PA2-3), a predetermined random number value within a range that the random value MR3 for variation pattern determination can take is assigned as a determination value.

  As shown in FIG. 8D, when the set value is “1” in the loss variation pattern determination table D (for medium high base), the determination value range for MR3 is 0 to 997. 0 to 450 are assigned to the variation pattern of non-reach loss (PA1-1), 451 to 700 are assigned to the variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1), and 701 to 900 are assigned to super reach α. Loss variation patterns (PA2-2) are assigned, and 901 to 997 are assigned to super reach β loss variation patterns (PA2-3). When the set value is “2”, out of the determination value range of MR3 0 to 997, 0 to 500 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 501 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3). When the set value is “3”, out of the range of 0 to 997 of the determination value of MR3, 0 to 550 are assigned to the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1), and 551 to 700 are assigned. The variation pattern of normal reach loss (PA2-1) is assigned, the variation pattern of 701 to 900 is assigned to the variation pattern of super reach α loss (PA2-2), and the variation pattern of 901 to 997 is the variation pattern of super reach β loss ( PA2-3).

  As described above, when the loss variation pattern determination tables A to D are used, the ratio of determining the non-reach variation pattern or the normal reach variation pattern is higher than that of determining the super reach variation pattern, and the set values 1, 2, and It becomes lower in the order of 3. Further, when using the variation pattern determination tables A to D for loss, the variation values of 701 to 900 among the determination values are the variation patterns of the super-reach α loss, and 901 to 997 are the variation patterns of the super reach β If the fluctuation display result is lost, that is, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is determined by the common determination ratio regardless of the set value, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach It is possible to prevent the effect from being reduced due to the fact that the variable display is not executed.

  It should be noted that the “common determination ratio” in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment is not only a case where the determination ratio is completely the same at different setting values (this embodiment), but also a determination ratio at different setting values. (E.g., the setting ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach is different by about 1% between the setting values 1 to 3).

  Note that, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the form in which the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach is the same regardless of the set value is exemplified. The present invention is not limited to this. If the fluctuation display result is a loss, the determination ratio of all fluctuation patterns of non-reach, normal reach, and super reach may be the same regardless of the set value. Alternatively, only the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of any of the non-reach and the normal reach may be the same.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, both the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss are determined regardless of the set value. Exemplifies the same form regardless of the set value which is set, but the present invention is not limited to this. If the fluctuation display result is a loss, the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss May be the same irrespective of the set value in which only one of the determination ratio of the change pattern and the determination ratio of the variation pattern of the super reach β loss is set.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, both the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach α loss and the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach β loss, regardless of the set value. Exemplifies a mode in which the set value is the same irrespective of the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the variable display result is a big hit, the set value Regardless of the set value, the determination ratio of the fluctuation pattern of the super reach jackpot may be the same regardless of the set value.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, when the fluctuation display result is a loss, the form in which the determination rate of the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach or the normal reach is different according to the set setting value is illustrated. Depending on the set value that is present, one or more of the non-reach fluctuation patterns and the normal reach fluctuation pattern that are not determined may be present. That is, the fact that the determination ratio of the variation pattern differs according to the set value that has been set means that one of the variation patterns is not determined (the determination ratio is 0%) or that the specific variation pattern is 100%. It also includes the decision of the percentage.

  The variation time of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach loss variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening. The variation time of the pattern (PA1-3) is shorter (see FIG. 8-5). Therefore, when the number of reserved memories increases, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss with a short fluctuation time is determined, and the reserved memories are easily digested, and the number of reserved memories reaches the upper limit of four. When the start winning is sometimes made, it becomes difficult to cause useless starting winnings in which the holding memory is not made, and when the number of the holding memories is reduced, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach loss without shortening the fluctuation time is long ( By determining PA1-1), it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game due to the fact that the variable display is not executed because the variable display time is lengthened.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-10 (A) to 8-10 (C), the variation is determined by using a loss variation Although the mode of determining the pattern is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, The variation pattern may be determined by using a different loss pattern determination table in accordance with the number of stored special symbols and the variation display of the second special symbol when executing the variation display of the second special symbol.

  In addition, in the variation pattern determination table for each loss of the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, even if the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is any numerical value of 1 to 3, the variation pattern of the super reach loss The range of random numbers assigned to (PA2-2 and PA2-3) is the same. However, the jackpot probability and the losing probability are different depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Therefore, the ratio in which the variable display is actually executed in the super-reach losing variation pattern (the super-reach losing variation pattern) (Appearance rate) differs depending on the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Note that, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, an example is shown in which the ratio at which the variable display is executed in the super reach loss variation pattern varies according to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, The present invention is not limited to this. Considering the jackpot probability and the loss probability for each set value, the fluctuation display is performed at the same ratio regardless of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 with the super reach loss. It may be executed in a variation pattern.

  The RAM 102 included in the game control microcomputer 100 shown in FIG. 8A may be a backup RAM partially or wholly backed up by a backup power supply created on a predetermined power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 102 is stored for a predetermined period (until the capacitor serving as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply becomes unable to supply power). You. In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (such as a special figure process flag) and the data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls may be stored in the backup RAM. The data corresponding to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for restoring the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like occurs. Further, data corresponding to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game.

  In the RAM 102, a game control data holding area (not shown) is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. The game control data holding area includes a first special figure reservation storage section, a second special figure reservation storage section, a general figure reservation storage section, a game control flag setting section, a game control timer setting section, a game control counter, and the like. It has a setting unit and a game control buffer setting unit.

  The first special map holding storage unit stores a special map which has not yet started, although a game ball has passed (entered) a first starting winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has been generated. The storage unit stores the pending data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the detection order of the game balls) with the reservation number in the first start winning opening and establishes the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. The random number value MR1 for variation display result determination, the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 and the like based on The storage is performed until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the first special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display result) in this special figure game ) Is the hold information that enables the determination as to whether or not a big hit will occur.

  The second special map holding storage unit stores a special winning start (second starting winning) when a game ball passes (enters) a second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B but has not yet started. The game data (a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special map holding storage unit associates the winning order (the order in which game balls are detected) with the hold number in the second starting winning opening, and establishes the second starting condition when the game ball passes (enters). The random number value MR1 for variation display result determination, the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination extracted by the CPU 103 from the random number circuit 104 and the like based on It is stored until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the second special figure holding storage unit indicates that execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display result) in this special figure game ) Is the hold information that enables the determination as to whether or not a big hit will occur.

  Note that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the passing of the game ball through (entering) the first starting winning opening and the gaming ball passed (entering) through the second starting winning opening. Thus, the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port or the second start winning port may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. .

  The ordinary figure holding storage unit stores the information on the ordinary figure game that has not been started by the ordinary symbol display 20 yet, even though the game ball passing through the passing gate is detected by the gate switch 21. For example, the general figure holding storage unit associates the game balls with the holding numbers in the order in which the game balls passed through the pass gate, and based on the passing of the game balls, the CPU 103 extracts the general figure display result determination from the random number circuit 104 and the like. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR4 and the like are stored as pending data until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit value (for example, “4”).

  The game control flag setting section is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, the game control flag setting unit stores, for each of a plurality of types of flags, data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state.

  The game control timer setting section is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control timer setting unit stores data indicating a timer value for each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting section is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control counter setting unit stores data indicating the count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting section may be provided with a random counter for counting a part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit, random number values not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR1 to MR4 are stored as random count values. Numerical data indicating each random number value is updated on a target or irregular basis. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the operation of updating the numerical data in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random number value may be updated by performing a predetermined process such as a scramble process or an arithmetic process on all or a part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  Next, a game control main process in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 8-11 is a flowchart showing a game control main process executed by the CPU 103. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (122SGSa001). Subsequently, necessary initial settings are made (122SGSa002). The initial setting includes setting of a stack pointer, register setting of a built-in device (CTC (counter / timer circuit), parallel input / output port, etc.), setting for making the RAM 102 accessible.

  Next, it is determined whether or not the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003). The clear switch is mounted on, for example, a power supply board. When the power is turned on while the clear switch is ON, an output signal (clear signal) is input to the game control microcomputer 100 via the input port. If the clear switch is ON (122SGSa003; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014. If the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa003; N), it is further determined whether or not backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (backup RAM) (122SGSa004). When the power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped due to an unexpected power failure or the like (power interruption), the CPU 103 executes the power supply stop process immediately before it becomes unable to operate due to the stop of the power supply. In the power supply stop process, a process for turning on a backup flag indicating that data is backed up in the RAM 102, a data protection process for the RAM 102, and the like are executed. Data protection processing includes addition of error detection codes (checksum, parity bits, etc.) and processing for backing up various data. The data to be backed up includes various data (including various flags and various timer states) for progressing the game, as well as the status of the backup flag and an error detection code. In step S4, it is determined whether the backup flag is ON. If the backup flag is OFF and the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; N),

  If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa004; Y), the CPU 103 checks the data of the backed up data (performed by using an error detection code) and determines whether the data is normal (122SGSa005). . In 122SGSa005, for example, it is determined whether or not the data in the RAM 102 matches the data at the time of stopping the power supply by using a parity bit or a checksum. If it is determined that they match, it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is not normal (122SGSa005; N), the process proceeds to 122SGSa014.

  When it is determined that the data in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa005; Y), the CPU 103 sets an effect control board activation start waiting timer for waiting until the effect control board 12 is activated (122SGSa006). Then, the value of the effect control board activation start waiting timer is decremented by one (122SGSa007), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board activation start waiting timer has expired (122SGSa008). When the effect control board activation start waiting timer has not expired (122SGSa008; N), 122SGSa007 is executed again, and the operation control board 12 waits until the activation. When the effect control board activation start wait timer is out (122SGSa008; Y), the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa008; Y), a set value confirmation process for displaying the set value set for the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed, and the salesclerk of the game hall displays the set value. The set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is set in a state (set change state) in which the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be confirmed by visually checking the monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa010). When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa008; N) or after executing the set value confirmation processing, the process proceeds to 122SGSa011.

  In 122SGSa011, the CPU 103 performs a recovery process for returning the internal state of the main board 11 to the state at the time of stopping the power supply. In the restoration process, the CPU 103 sets a work area based on the storage contents of the RAM 102 (contents of backed up data). As a result, when the game state is restored when the power supply is stopped and the special symbol is changing, the change of the special symbol is resumed from the state before the recovery by executing the game control timer interrupt processing described later. Will be.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has recovered (started by hot start) in a state before the power interruption, transmits a command at the time of recovery including a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021. (122SGSa013).

  In 122SGSa014, the CPU 103 sets an effect control board activation start waiting timer for waiting until the effect control board 12 is activated. Then, the value of the effect control board activation start waiting timer is decremented by one (122SGSa015), and it is determined whether or not the effect control board activation start waiting timer has expired (122SGSa016). If the effect control board activation start waiting timer has not expired (122SGSa016; N), 122SGSa015 is executed again to stand by until the effect control board 12 is activated. When the effect control board activation start waiting timer is out (122SGSa016; Y), the CPU 103 executes the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017) for clearing the contents of the RAM 102, and then turns the lock switch 122SG051 ON. It is determined whether or not there is (122SGSa019).

  If the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa019; N), the CPU 103 determines that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by a cold start, transmits a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, and proceeds to 122SGSa021.

  Further, when the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa019; Y), the CPU 103 executes a setting change process (122SGSa020) for changing the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and proceeds to 122SGSa021.

  In 122SGSa021, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 104. Then, a register of a CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 is set so that a timer interrupt is periodically performed at predetermined time intervals (for example, 2 ms) (122SGSa022), and an interrupt is permitted (122SGSa023). Thereafter, the loop processing is started. Thereafter, an interrupt request signal is sent from the CTC to the CPU 103 every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms), and the CPU 103 can periodically execute timer interrupt processing.

  FIG. 8-12 is a flowchart showing the setting value confirmation processing executed by the CPU 103. In the setting value confirmation process, the CPU 103 first transmits a setting value confirmation start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa031), and is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 (see FIG. 8-13 (B)). The set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa032). Then, it is determined whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033). When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa033; N), the CPU 103 waits until the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF by repeatedly executing 122SGSa033.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF (122SGSa051; N), the CPU 103 ends the display of the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa034), and sends a set value confirmation end notification command to the effect control board 12. The setting value confirmation process is transmitted and the process ends (122SGSa035).

  In the characteristic section 122SG of the present embodiment, the setting confirmation state is completed (the set value confirmation processing is completed), so that the state becomes the same state as when the apparatus is started by the normal hot start. The command transmitted to the effect control board 12 may be a hot start notification command.

  FIG. 8A is a flowchart illustrating the RAM clear processing executed by the CPU 103. In the RAM clearing process, the CPU 103 first determines whether the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041). If the data stored in the RAM 102 is normal (122SGSa041; N), it is further determined whether backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042). If the backup data is stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; Y), the CPU 103 specifies the second address from the top in the RAM 102 and proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa043).

  On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when the backup data is not stored in the RAM 102 (122SGSa042; N), the start address in the RAM 102 is designated and the process proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa044).

  In 122SGSa045, the CPU 103 sets (stores) “00H” at the designated address. In particular, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), "00H" is set to the address F000, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 automatically sets the set value. 1 is set. Then, it is determined whether or not the specified address is the last address (FXXX described later) of the RAM 102 (122SGSa046). If the specified address is not the last address of the RAM 102 (122SGSa046; N), the next address in the RAM 102 is specified and the process proceeds to 122SGSa045 (122SGSa047). If the specified address is the last address of the RAM 102 (122SGSa046). ; Y) ends the RAM clearing process.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, addresses (F000 to FXXX) are assigned to the storage areas of the RAM 102 in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment. Of these storage areas, the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored in the head address (F000) of the RAM 102, and the second address (F001) from the head of the RAM 102 is described later. The temporary setting value is stored. Further, other addresses (F002, F003, etc.) include clear switch backup information that can specify whether or not the clear switch was ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 was started, as well as special figure storage and general figure storage. Game information including storage, values of various counters, various timers, various flags, and error information generated in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stored.

  In other words, the RAM clear processing in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment means that when there is no abnormality in the RAM 102 and there is backup data, the addresses (F001 to FXXX) except the address (F000) storing the set value are stored. ) Stores “00H” in the RAM 102 to clear data other than the set value. On the other hand, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 or when there is no backup data, “00H” is stored in all the addresses (F000 to FXXX) in the RAM 102. Is a process of clearing all the data including the set value by storing.

  In the feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, the set value is stored in the first address F000 of the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102. Is also good. When the set value is stored in the last address of the RAM 102 as described above, when executing the RAM clear processing shown in FIG. 8A, the address immediately before the last address of the RAM 102 is used as the address for clearing data. , And "00H" may be stored sequentially from the address F000 to the address immediately before.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, an example in which data excluding the set value in the RAM 102 is cleared is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, only the game information stored at a predetermined address of the RAM 102 (address F003 in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment) is cleared. It may be.

  Further, in the feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, the form in which the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102 is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. A process of storing and reading clear switch backup information in the RAM 102 by storing it in a register of the microcomputer 100 (for example, any of an accumulator that is the center of operation, a flag register that stores the state of the accumulator, and a general-purpose register). May be omitted so that the processing load on the CPU 103 can be reduced. When the clear switch backup information is stored in the RAM 102, the degree of freedom of the register can be improved as compared with the case where the clear switch backup information is stored in the register of the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to prevent other information (data) from being overwritten by the processing.

  FIG. 8-14 is a flowchart illustrating the setting change process executed by the CPU 103. In the setting change processing, the CPU 103 first transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). The set value change start notification command may be transmitted immediately before the start of the set value change processing (at the timing when the lock switch 122SG051 is determined to be ON in 122SGSa018). Then, the setting value stored at the address F000 (see FIG. 8-13 (B)) in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified setting value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa053).

  Next, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the setting change switch 122SG052 has been operated (122SGSa054). When the setting switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “1”, “2”, which is one step less favorable for the player than “1”, is set as a temporary set value. When the setting value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “2”, the setting value “3”, which is one step less favorable for the player than “2”, is temporarily set. It is stored as a set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102. If the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored as a temporary set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). When the setting switch is not operated in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the process of 122SGSa057 is executed without executing the processes of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processes of 122SGSa054 to 122SGSa056 to store a new temporary set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or stores it in the address F001. A process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

  When the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 stores the set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102 in the address F000. That is, the CPU 103 stores the set value stored at the address F001 (the provisional set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029) at the address F000, thereby changing the set value stored at the address F001 to the actual set value. (Change the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1). Then, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value designation command corresponding to the setting value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102 and a setting value change end notification command to the effect control board 12, and ends the setting change process. (122SGSa059, 122SGSa060).

  In the characteristic section 122SG of the present embodiment, a mode in which the setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12 in the setting change process is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, the set value change end notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12 within the game control main process (immediately after the end of the setting change process).

  In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 by turning off the lock switch 122SG051 (the provisional set value stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102). Is stored in the address F000), but the present invention is not limited to this. The game ball is placed in the starting winning opening, the clear switch is operated, the lock switch 122SG051 is pressed, and the like. By executing the operation described above, the lock switch 122SG051 may be turned off, so that a new set value may be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start or started in a setting change state, a cold start notification command or a setting value change start is issued to the effect control board 12. Although the form in which the RAM clear processing is executed before transmitting the notification command is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. It may be executed after transmitting the command or the setting value change start notification command.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the RAM clear processing is executed before the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed. Although illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RAM clear processing is executed again after the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed (other than the set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102). May be cleared). By doing so, it is possible to prevent such a problem that a game is started while illegal data is stored in the RAM.

  Furthermore, in the characteristic part 122SG of the present embodiment, the common RAM clearing process (122SGSa017) is performed after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a setting change state. Although a mode according to the state (a cold start notification command, a setting value change start notification command, and a setting value change end notification command) is transmitted to the effect control board 12, the present invention is not limited to this. However, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when the pachinko game machine 1 is started by a setting change state, a command (a cold start notification command, a setting value change start notification command, a setting value change Common RAM clear after sending the end notification command) to the effect control board 12 It may perform the physical.

  Next, a game control timer interrupt process in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIG. 8-15, in the game control timer interrupt process, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process (122SGS020), and then executes a switch process (S21) to a command control process (S27). . As shown in FIGS. 8 to 16, in the power-off detection process, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not there is a power-off signal indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value from a power supply board (not shown). Is determined (122SGSa051). If there is no input of the power-off signal (122SGSa051; N), the process is terminated. (122SGS053), the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 102 (122SGS053). Then, after creating check data to be used for restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS054), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no processing is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

  Next, a description will be given of an effect control main process in the characteristic unit 122SG of the present embodiment. FIG. 8-17 is a flowchart illustrating the effect control main process executed by the effect control CPU 120. In the effect control main process, the effect control CPU 120 first executes a predetermined initialization process (122SGS401a), clears the RAM 122, sets various initial values, and sets the CTC (counter / timer) mounted on the effect control board 12. Circuit). Further, an initial operation control process is executed (122SGS401b). In the initial operation control processing, control for performing an initial operation of the movable body 32, such as control for driving the movable body 32 to return to the initial position and control for confirming a predetermined operation, is executed.

  Further, effect control CPU 120 sets a command reception waiting timer according to the reception waiting period of the command transmitted from main board 11 (122SGS402). Then, the value of the command reception waiting timer is decremented by one (122SGS403), and it is determined whether or not the command reception waiting timer has expired (122SGS404). When the command reception waiting timer has expired (122SGS404; N), the processes of 122SGS403 and 122SGS404 are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the command reception waiting timer expires.

  When the command reception waiting timer has expired (122SGS404; Y), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a hot start notification command has been received (122SGS405). When the hot start notification command is received (122SGS405; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is restored from the power interruption, the player information stored in the RAM 122 (the player information is input in a player information input process described later). After receiving the input of the information, the information (information including the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc.) stored in the RAM 122 is cleared, and the process proceeds to 122SGS417 (122SGS406).

  If no hot start notification command has been received (122SGS405; N), effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not a cold notification command has been received (122SGS407). If the cold notification command has been received (122SGS407; Y), the player information and effect information stored in the RAM 122 (the number of fluctuations and the number of big hits stored in the RAM 122 since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1) , Information including the number of times of super reach, etc.) (122SGS408), and that the information stored in the RAM 102 has been cleared, and that the player information and effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. A RAM clear notification process for notification (execution of RAM clear notification) is executed (122SGS409). In the RAM clear notification process, display of an image on the image display device 5, emission of the game effect lamp 9, sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like are performed for a predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started. It is only necessary to be able to notify the clerk or the like of the amusement arcade that the player information and the effect information stored in the RAM 122 have been cleared. After the execution of the RAM clear notification process, the process proceeds to 122SGS417.

  If no cold start notification command has been received (122SGS407; N), effect control CPU 120 determines whether a setting value change start notification command has been received (122SGS410). When the setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410; Y), that is, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, a notification that the setting value change operation is being performed (a notification that the setting value is being changed) is issued. ) Is executed (122SGS411). Note that the state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state generally means that the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is open and the clerk or the like of the game hall that changes the setting value uses the main board 11 Of the display monitor 122SG029 mounted on the camera. That is, the setting change state is a state in which the image displayed on the image display device 5 cannot be visually recognized by a clerk or the like of the game hall that changes the setting value. It is considered that it cannot be determined from the display of the device 5 whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting change state. Therefore, as the notification during the change of the set value, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in the setting change state by the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R or the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 to the clerk of the game hall changing the set value. You just need to be notified that

  Further, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the set value change end notification command and the set value designation command have been received, that is, whether or not the set value of the set value has ended (122SGS412). If the setting value change end notification command and the setting value designation command are received (122SGS412), the setting value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the received setting value designation command (the setting value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102). The value is specified, and the specified setting value is updated and stored in the RAM 122 as setting value information (a value of “1” to “3” corresponding to the setting value) (122SG413). Then, after executing the above-described processing of 122SGS408 and 122SGS409, the process proceeds to 122SGS417. If at least one of the set value change end notification command and the set value designation command is not received (122SGS412; N), the processes of 122SGS411 and 122SGS412 are repeatedly executed.

  Although the feature section 122SG of the present embodiment illustrates an example in which the RAM 122 is cleared after the execution of the notification of the change of the set value, the present invention is not limited to this. The RAM 122 may be cleared in parallel. If the clearing of the RAM 122 is completed during the execution of the notification of the change of the set value, the RAM clear notification may be executed in parallel with the notification of the change of the set value. Notification may be performed.

  Further, when the setting value change start notification command is not received (122SGS410; N), the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the setting value confirmation start notification command is received, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in the setting confirmation state. It is determined whether or not it has been started (122SGS414). If the setting value check start notification command has been received (122SGS414; Y), a setting value checking informing process for notifying that the setting is in the setting check state (the setting value can be checked from the display monitor 122SG029). Execute (122SGS415). In the setting value confirmation informing process, the display of an image on the image display device 5, the emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, etc. What is necessary is just to be able to notify the setting confirmation state around the pachinko gaming machine 1. If no effect of the setting value confirmation end notification command is received (122SGS410; N), the effect control CPU 120 proceeds to the process of 122SGS405, and issues a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change start notification command, It waits until any of the value confirmation start notification commands is received (the processing of 122SGS405, 122SGS407, 122SGS410, and 122SGS414 is repeatedly executed).

  As described above, in the effect control main process in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-18, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the hot start or the setting change state, the player information ( While the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, etc. after receiving the input of the player information are cleared from the RAM 122, the production information (the number of fluctuations since the previous start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the number of big hits, The super-reach count, etc.) and the set value information (any one of “1” to “3” corresponding to the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1) are not cleared from the RAM 122. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared from the RAM 122, but the set value information is not cleared from the RAM 122. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up in the setting change state, the player information and the effect information are not cleared from the RAM 122, while the setting value information is set to the setting value information already stored in the RAM 122. The data is overwritten (updated).

  That is, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, information to be cleared from the RAM 122 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting confirmation state, or a setting change state.

  In the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the player information and the effect information are cleared, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state. Exemplifies a form in which the player information and the production information are not cleared, but the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, The player information and the effect information may be cleared.

  Returning to FIG. 8-17, in 122SGS417, the effect control CPU 120 specifies which of the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the setting value change end notification command, and the setting value confirmation end notification command has been received, and displays the image. The display of the initial symbol corresponding to the received command is started in the device 5. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-19, when the received command is a hot start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command, or a cold start notification command, that is, a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. If not set, the display of the decorative symbol is started on the image display device 5 as a combination of "1", "2", and "3" from the left as an initial symbol. When the received command is the setting value change end notification command, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value has been set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the image display device 5 sets the initial symbol from the left as “ The display of the decorative pattern is started with the combination of "4", "5", and "6".

  In the characteristic section 122SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, “4”, “5” from the left as initial symbols are displayed on the image display device 5. "," 6 ", the display of the decorative symbol is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example," 1 ") that is advantageous to the player is provided. In the case where the setting is made, the decorative pattern is set as a combination of "4", "5", and "6" as the initial pattern at a higher ratio than when the setting value (for example, "3") disadvantageous to the player is set. It may be displayed. By doing so, it is possible to suggest that a setting value that is advantageous to the player is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and it is possible to improve the entertainment of the game.

  In the characteristic section 122SG in the present embodiment, when there is a possibility that a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, “4”, “5” from the left as initial symbols are displayed on the image display device 5. "," 6 ", the display of the decorative symbol is started, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a set value (for example," 1 ") that is advantageous to the player is provided. The initial symbol displayed on the image display device 5 may be different between the case where the setting is set and the case where a setting value disadvantageous to the player (for example, “3”) is set. Further, when the setting value (for example, “1”) that is advantageous to the player is set and when the setting value that is disadvantageous to the player (for example, “3”) is set, the speakers 8L and 8R output The volume of the output sound, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the like may be varied.

  Then, returning to FIG. 8-17, the effect control CPU 120 sets “4” to the look-ahead restriction counter in order to regulate the execution of the prefetch notice effect in the first four fluctuations (122SGS418). Then, effect control CPU 120 shifts to a loop process for monitoring a timer interrupt flag (122SGS419). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 120 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set (turned on), the effect control CPU 120 clears the flag (122SGS420) and executes the following processing.

  The effect control CPU 120 first executes a startup notification process for notifying that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started (122SGS421). In the start notification process, for example, it is determined whether or not the interrupt is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1. If this is the first interrupt from the start of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is determined which of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, and a setting value confirmation end notification command has been received. A start notification process table corresponding to the received command is selected, and a start notification process timer corresponding to the received command is started. After the start-up notification process timer is started, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started based on the value of the start-up notification process timer and the start-up notification process table by executing the start-up notification process in the next and subsequent interrupts. The notification may be executed.

  In the characteristic section 122SG in the present embodiment, the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value change end notification command, or a setting value confirmation end notification command. The state of the start notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 differs depending on whether there is any.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, when a hot start notification command or a setting value confirmation end notification command has been received, that is, a new pachinko gaming machine 1 When the set value is not set, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same. The output start timing of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  When the cold start notification command is received when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, that is, when a new set value is not set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the data in the RAM 102 is cleared. , The light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed. The light emission start timing of these game effect lamps 9 for 60 seconds and the output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R are the same. The output start timing of the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R may be different.

  In other words, the specific control in the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start or a setting confirmation state, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and the speakers 8L and 8R for 30 seconds. Output of the output sound A, and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the effect control CPU 120 emits light of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and output sound for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R. Performing the output of B includes both.

  When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated and receives a setting value change end notification command, that is, when there is a possibility that a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1, the gaming effect The lamp 9 emits light for 40 seconds, the speakers 8L and 8R output the output sound C for 20 seconds, and the image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the setting value has been changed). Execute It should be noted that the timing at which the gaming effect lamp 9 starts emitting light for 40 seconds, the timing at which output of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R starts for 20 seconds, and the timing at which the display of the message image on the image display device 5 starts are the same. The emission start timing of the gaming effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds, the output start timing of the output sound C from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds, and the display start timing of the message image on the image display device 5 may be different.

  In particular, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the setting value change end notification command is received. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command is received. In contrast, since the message image is displayed on the image display device 5, it is easy to recognize that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been changed.

  In other words, the special control according to the present invention means that when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, the effect control CPU 120 causes the gaming effect lamp 9 to emit light for 40 seconds and output sound from the speakers 8L and 8R for 20 seconds. C, and display of a message image for 40 seconds on the image display device 5.

  As described above, the timing of starting emission of the game effect lamp 9, the timing of starting sound output of the speakers 8L and 8R, and the timing of starting display of an image on the image display device 5 are the same. As for the notification mode at the time of starting the machine 1, the notification period when the hot start notification command or the set value confirmation end notification command is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by hot start) is 60 seconds, and the cold start notification command is issued. When the notification is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up by a cold start), the notification period is 60 seconds, and when the set value change end notification command is received (when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started up in a setting changed state). The period is 40 seconds.

  Note that, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, an example is described in which the start notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started is executed using the game effect lamp 9, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image display device 5. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with an external output terminal capable of outputting a signal to a management computer such as a management computer for a game arcade or a counter for each unit, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated. As an activation notification at the time of the activation, a signal that can specify that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated may be output from the external output terminal to the management device.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the present embodiment, even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in any of the hot start, the cold start, the setting change state, and the setting confirmation state, a device for executing the start notification is partially common. Although a certain form (in which light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are executed) is shown as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. The device that executes the start notification differs depending on whether the device is started in a start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. (For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the image display device 5 When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, a signal is output from the above-mentioned external output terminal to the management device. It may be, or the like) that.

  Further, the notification mode of each device that executes the start notification may be made different depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, all the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 are turned on, while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state. In this case, only some of the gaming effect lamps 9 provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1 may emit light.

  Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, since the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is open, sound is output from only one of the speakers 8L and 8R (to the pachinko gaming machine 1). When three or more speakers are provided, sound is output from only some of the speakers.) When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, the gaming machine frame 122SG003 is closed. Since there are many cases, sound output from all speakers 8L and 8R may be performed. Further, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the image display device 5 displays a message image indicating that the setting is being changed, such as “setting is being changed,” while the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cold. When started at the start, a message image indicating that the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 have been cleared, such as “RAM cleared”, may be displayed on the image display device 5.

  Further, in the case where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided with a plurality of the above-described external output terminals, the terminals for outputting signals to the management device may be different according to each notification. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the period until the change of the setting value is completed (the time until the setting value change end notification command or the setting value designation command is received) is used as the setting value change notification. During the period, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the setting change to the management device, and after the change of the set value is completed, a signal is output from the terminal corresponding to the error or the RAM clear to the management device as the RAM clear notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, it is only necessary to output a signal to the management device from a terminal corresponding to an error or RAM clear as the RAM clear notification.

  When the external output terminal is used in common for each notification, the timing of outputting a signal to the management device may be made different according to each notification.

  As described above, in the start-up notification process, a form in which the start-up notification mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is different according to the received command is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 May be executed in one notification mode regardless of the received command. In addition, the start notification of the pachinko gaming machine 1 exemplifies a mode in which the start notification is performed even when any of a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, a setting value confirmation end notification command, and a setting value change end notification command is received. The present invention is not limited to this. Among the hot start notification command, the cold start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the set value change end notification command, the pachinko gaming machine 1 A command that does not execute the start notification may be provided.

  Further, in the feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, as an initialization effect in the present invention, a start notification in a different mode is executed according to a command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated, or the pachinko gaming machine 1 Although the form which displays the decoration pattern of a different combination according to the command received at the time of starting on the image display device 5 is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. The mode of the start notification and the combination of the decorative symbols may be all different depending on the command received when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, or only a part may be the same.

  Further, in feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a hot start, activated by a cold start, activated by a setting change state, or activated by a setting confirmation state. Also, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or started in a setting confirmation state, the start notification is performed. May not be executed.

  Returning to FIG. 8-17, next, effect control CPU 120 executes power-off detection processing (122 SGS422). In the power-off detection process, as shown in FIGS. 8 to 22, first, effect control CPU 120 receives a power-off signal from a power supply board (not shown) indicating that the power supply voltage has dropped below a predetermined value. It is determined whether or not (122SGS431). If there is no input of the power-off signal (122SGS431; N), the processing is terminated, and if there is an input of the power-off signal (122SGS431; Y), the setting value information and player information stored in the RAM 122 are deleted. The backup data included is specified (122SGS432), and the specified backup data is stored in the backup data storage area provided in the RAM 122 (122SGS433). Then, after creating check data to be used for restoring the backup data and storing it in the backup data storage area (122SGS434), the process proceeds to a loop process in which no processing is executed until the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned off.

  Returning to FIG. 8-17, next, the effect control CPU 120 analyzes the received effect control command, and performs a process of setting a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process: 122SGS423). In this command analysis process, the effect control CPU 120 confirms the content of the command transmitted from the main board 11 stored in the reception command buffer. The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 100 is received by an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM 122. In the command analysis processing, the effect control command stored in the buffer area is analyzed as to which command (see FIG. 8C).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 performs an effect control process (122SGS424). In the effect control process, a process corresponding to the current control state (effect control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the image display device 5 is executed.

  Next, an effect random number update process (122SGS425) for updating the count value of a counter for generating an effect random number such as a jackpot symbol determination random number, a player information input process for accepting input of player information (122SGS426), A player information output process of outputting player information (122SGS427) and an effect information totaling process of totaling effect information (122SGS428) are executed. Then, the process proceeds to S52.

  In the player information input process, the effect control CPU 120 operates the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player to change the password (the password generated by an external server in which the player's game information is stored in advance). The player accesses the server by using a communication terminal such as a smartphone and can receive the generated password), and stores the player information specified from the password in the RAM 122. Further, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, and the like as player information stored each time the fluctuation display, the big hit game, and the super reach are executed.

  In the player information output process, the effect control CPU 120 generates a two-dimensional code based on the player information stored in the RAM 122 by operating the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B of the player, and generates the two-dimensional code. Is displayed on the image display device 5. Then, after the display of the two-dimensional code is completed, the player information stored in the RAM 122 is cleared. The player reads the two-dimensional code displayed on the image display device 5 with a portable terminal such as a smart phone and transmits the player information totalized in the current game to an external server, so that the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be stored in the server.

  In the effect information totalizing process, the effect control CPU 120 updates and stores the number of fluctuations, the number of big hits, the number of super reach, and the like stored in the RAM 122 as effect information each time a variable display, a big hit game, or a super reach is executed. I do.

  Next, a description will be given of an effect control process performed by the characteristic unit 122SG according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 8-22, in the effect control process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is “0” (122SGS441). If the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is “0” (122SGS441; Y), after executing the look-ahead notice setting process (S161), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is performed according to the effect control process flag. Perform the above processing.

  When the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is any one of “1” to “4” (122SGS441; N), it is further determined whether or not the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (122SGS442). ). If the value of the effect control process flag is “0” or any of “2” to “7” (122SGS442; N), any of S170 to S177 (see FIG. 7) is performed according to the effect control process flag. If the process is executed and the value of the effect control process flag is “1” (122SGS442; Y), the value of the look-ahead restriction counter is decremented by 1 (122SGS443), and S170 to S177 (S170 to S177) are performed according to the effect control process flag. (See FIG. 7). By executing the processes of 122SGS441 to 122SGS443 as described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 immediately after startup, the execution of the pre-read notice effect is restricted until the variable display is executed four times.

  In the characteristic section 122SG in the present embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process and the effect control process process based on the activation of the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the variable display is performed four times. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the CPU 103 determines whether or not the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated, based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been activated. 5), the execution of the prefetch notice effect may be restricted over four variable displays.

  Further, in feature section 122SG in the present embodiment, regardless of whether pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start or in a setting change state, it is related to the progress of the game based on the fact that the game is enabled. As a setting, the form in which the execution of the pre-reading notice effect is controlled over four variable displays is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is set whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start. Regardless of whether the game is started in the changed state, based on the fact that the game is enabled, the settings relating to the progress of the game are set according to the volume of the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, the light amount of the game effect lamp 9, and the RTC. The effect setting and the like may be set to the state at the time of factory shipment.

  As described above, in pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9 (H), effect control CPU 120 performs the reach effect of super reach A or super reach B as the first suggestion effect, and the second effect. The super-reach C and the super-reach D can be performed as a suggestion effect, and the super-reach C and the super-reach D can be performed when the super-reach C and the super-reach D are performed. Since the title corresponding to the reach effect of Super Reach C or Super Reach D is notified from the start of the effect, notification of the title according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved.

This embodiment also includes a fourth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as the pachinko gaming machines, there are, for example, those described in JP-A-2016-42880 and those described in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the gaming machine is powered on and started (power supply to the gaming machine is started. ), A command (control information) output from the main board to the effect control board (effect control means) to restore the gaming machine based on the memory in which the main board (game control board) is backed up. And a command output from the main board to the effect control board to clear the backed-up memory regardless of the memory where the main board is backed up, and a state in which the set value of the gaming machine can be changed When the command output from the main board to the effect control board is the same, when the game machine is powered on and activated, the effect control board is Making it impossible perform appropriate processing according to the movement state. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the fourth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A setting unit (for example, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process shown in FIG. 8-14) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation. Part) and
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) Part) and
A backup storage unit (for example, the RAM 102) capable of holding the stored content for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
Effect control means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 clears the RAM shown in FIGS. 8-17) capable of controlling the effect based on control information (for example, the effect control command shown in FIG. 8-3) output from the game control means. A notification process, a notification process during a setting value change, a notification process during a setting value check, etc.),
With
After the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, the game control means sets a startup state when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and restores the state based on the storage content stored in the backup storage means. State (for example, hot start), a second activation state (for example, cold start) for erasing and restoring the stored contents regardless of the stored contents stored in the backup storage means, and setting by the setting means is possible , And outputs different control information corresponding to the activated state to the effect control means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-11 and 8-14). If the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start, the CPU 103 transmits a hot start notification command to the effect control board 12, and the pachinko gaming machine When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start mode, the CPU 103 transmits a cold start notification command to the effect control board 12. The part that sends the setting value change start notification command)
According to this feature, the effect control means can execute an appropriate process according to the activation state of the game control means when the power supply is started. .

Further, as means 2 of the fourth invention,
An effect control storage means (for example, a RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the effect control means;
The information to be erased among the information stored in the effect control storage means differs depending on whether the activation state corresponding to the control information is the second activation state or the third activation state ( For example, as shown in FIG. 8-18, information cleared from the RAM 102 differs depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting confirmation state, or a setting change state.
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to perform appropriate erasure according to the activation state.

Further, as means 3 of the fourth invention,
The game control means can output control information (for example, a set value change end notification command) for designating the end of the third activation state,
The effect control means performs special control according to the end of the third activation state based on output of control information designating the termination of the third activation state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20). Thus, based on the reception of the setting value change end notification command, the effect control CPU 120 emits the game effect lamp 9 for 40 seconds and outputs the output sound C from the speakers 8L, 8R for 20 seconds in the startup notification process. The image display device 5 displays a message image for 40 seconds (for example, a message image indicating that the change of the set value has been completed).
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize that the third activation state in which the set value can be set has ended by the special control.

Further, as means 4 of the fourth invention,
When the control information corresponding to the first activation state or the second activation state is output, the effect control means performs specific control according to the output (for example, as shown in FIG. Based on the reception of the start notification command and the cold start notification command, the effect control CPU 120 executes the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R in the startup notification process.
According to this feature, it is possible to recognize, by the specific control, that the game machine is in a startup state in which a set value cannot be set.

Further, as means 5 of the fourth invention,
The effect control means performs different control in accordance with the activation state corresponding to the control information (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, based on the reception of the hot start notification command, the effect control CPU 120 In the start-up notification processing, the effect control CPU 120 is configured to execute the 60-second light emission of the game effect lamp 9 and the output of the output sound A for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R and to receive the cold start notification command. In the start-up notification processing, a part for performing the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 for 60 seconds and outputting the output sound B for 30 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the effect of controlling the production control based on the reception of the set value change end notification command. The CPU 120 emits light for 40 seconds from the game effect lamp 9 and 20 seconds from the speakers 8L and 8R in the startup notification process. A part for outputting the output sound C and executing a message image for 40 seconds in the image display device 5. Also, as shown in Fig. 8-19, based on the reception of the hot start notification command or the cold start notification command, The decorative symbol is displayed as a combination of "1,""2," and "3" as the initial symbol, and the decorative symbol is set to "4" or "5" as the initial symbol based on the reception of the setting value change end notification command. , "6")
A gaming machine characterized by the following is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to easily recognize which activation state is in effect.

Further, as means 6 of the fourth invention,
When the set value is changed in the third activation state, the game control unit deletes the backup information stored in the backup storage unit except for the specific information (for example, FIG. As shown in 8-23, the RAM clear processing is executed based on the change of the set value, and the data after the address F001 except the data of the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is cleared.)
According to this feature, it is possible to execute appropriate erasure of backup information according to a change in a set value.

Further, as means 7 of the fourth invention,
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game,
The timing of erasing at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means differs between the first activation state and the second activation state (for example, as shown in a modification 11, a pachinko gaming machine) When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start mode, the RAM clearing process is executed at a timing before the cold start notification command is transmitted to the staging control board 12. The part that executes the RAM clear processing at the timing after transmitting the set value change start notification command to the control board 12)
According to this feature, it is possible to execute the erasing of the game information at an appropriate timing according to the activation state.

The present embodiment also includes a fifth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as the pachinko gaming machines, there are, for example, those described in JP-A-2016-42880 and those described in JP-A-2010-200902. However, in the gaming machines described in JP-A-2016-42880 and JP-A-2010-200902, when the gaming machine is powered on and started (power supply to the gaming machine is started. When the main board is backed up regardless of the backed up storage (general startup state) and when the set value of the gaming machine can be changed (set startup state) If the notification mode is the same, it is difficult to determine whether the gaming machine is in the general activation state or the setting activation state, and it is difficult to find an illegal setting change or the like of the gaming machine. Was. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the fifth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A setting unit (for example, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process shown in FIG. 8-14) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation. Part) and
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) Part) and
A backup storage unit (for example, the RAM 102 or the RAM 122) capable of holding the stored content for a predetermined period even when the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped;
A start notifying unit (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes the start notifying process illustrated in FIGS. 8 to 17) capable of notifying the starting state of the game control unit when the power supply to the gaming machine is started;
With
The game control means includes, as the start state, a general start state (for example, a state in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start) in which the storage contents stored in the backup storage means are cleared and started, and A setting activation state (for example, a setting change state) for validating the setting,
The start notifying unit performs the notification in a different manner between the general start state and the set start state (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start). When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, the light emission of the game effect lamp and the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R are performed. A part for displaying a message image on the display device 5)
According to this feature, it is possible to easily specify whether the activation state is the general activation state or the setting activation state, and thus it is possible to easily find a fraud by the setting. .

Further, as means 2 of the fifth invention,
The start notification unit can execute various types of notification according to the priority,
The priority of the notification of the setting activation state is higher than the priority of the notification of the general activation state (for example, as shown in Modification 12, the priority is higher during the execution of the high-priority setting value change notification. To prevent low RAM clear notification from being executed)
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, the notification of the setting activation state is given priority, so that it is possible to prevent an improper setting from being discovered.

Further, as means 3 of the fifth invention,
The start notifying unit notifies the set start state and the general start state in different notification periods (for example, the notification period when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start is 60 seconds, the pachinko gaming machine 1 (A part in which the notification period when the device is started in the setting change state is 40 seconds). According to this feature, it is possible to execute appropriate notification in a period corresponding to the start state. .

Further, as means 4 of the fifth invention,
The activation notifying means,
A first notification unit (for example, the image display device 5) and a second notification unit (for example, the game effect lamp 9 and the speakers 8L and 8R) different from the first notification unit;
The setting notification state is notified by the first notification means (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-20, a portion displaying a message image on the image display device 5),
The general start-up state is notified by the second notification means (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8-20, a portion that emits light from the game effect lamp 9 and outputs sound from the speakers 8L and 8R). According to this feature, the start notification is performed by different notification means, so that it is easy to recognize which start state is in effect.

Further, as means 5 of the fifth invention,
The game control unit is configured to perform a game control (for example, by a common setting as a setting related to a game progress) in a game possible state after the setting start state and a game possible state after the general start state. A game in which the CPU 103 does not execute the start winning determination process after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, and thereby, it is possible to execute the prefetch notice effect up to four times of variable display). According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience, such as recognizing that the setting has been changed, by executing game control with different settings.

The present embodiment also includes a sixth invention described below. That is, conventionally, as a gaming machine, for example, there is a gaming machine described in JP-A-2006-137351. However, in the gaming machine described in JP-A-2006-137351, if the game information is unintentionally erased due to a change in the set value, the game or the game machine in which the gaming machine is installed may be lost. There is a risk of giving disadvantage. Therefore, when focusing on the problem, as a gaming machine of the means 1 of the sixth invention for solving the problem,
A gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot gaming state) advantageous to the player,
A setting unit (for example, the CPU 103 executes a setting change process shown in FIG. 8-14) which can be set to any one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting values 1 to 3) by a predetermined operation. Part) and
Game control means capable of controlling the progress of the game and executing control to the advantageous state based on the set value set by the setting means (for example, the CPU 103 executes the process control processing shown in FIG. 5) Part) and
Game information storage means (for example, RAM 102) capable of storing game information used by the game control means to control the progress of the game,
A notifying unit capable of notifying in advance that the game information stored in the game information storage unit is to be deleted (for example, a part in which the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting value change confirmation notifying process in Modification 8);
With
The game control means deletes at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means when a new set value is set by the setting means (for example, when the CPU 103 RAM clear processing),
The predetermined operation includes a setting change start operation (for example, an operation of turning on a clear switch), a setting change operation (for example, an operation of turning on the setting changeover switch 122SG052), and a setting change completion operation (for example, turning off the lock switch 122SG051). Operation) and
The setting unit can perform the setting change operation by performing the setting change start operation (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-23 as a modified example 8, the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON ( 122SGSa054a; the portion where the processing of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 can be performed after Y)), the setting change completion operation is performed after the enabled setting change operation, and the setting changed by the setting change operation is performed. A value is set (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-23 as a modified example 8, the CPU 103 determines that the lock switch is OFF (122SGSa057; N) and then executes the process of 122SGSa058),
The notification unit executes the notification when the setting change start operation is performed (for example, as shown in FIGS. 8 to 24 as Modification 8, the effect control CPU 120 transmits the first setting value change start notification command). (The part that executes the setting value change confirmation notification processing based on the determination that the setting value has been received (122SGS410; Y))
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent the game information from being unintentionally erased due to a change in the set value.

Further, as means 2 of the sixth invention,
The game control means, after the setting change start operation is performed, if the setting change completion operation is performed without performing the setting change operation, the game information stored in the game information storage means After the CPU 103 determines that the setting changeover switch has not been operated (122SGSa054d; N), the CPU 103 further determines that the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF, as illustrated in FIGS. In this case, based on the fact that the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), the part for ending the set value changing process without executing the RAM clear process (122SGSa060). )
According to this feature, it is possible to prevent a player from being disadvantaged due to erasing of game information even though a set value is not changed. be able to.

Further, as means 3 of the sixth invention,
The notifying unit can notify that the game information is not deleted by the game control unit when the predetermined operation is completed without performing the setting change completion operation (for example, FIG. As shown at -25, the effect control CPU 120 executes the set value change confirmation notification processing, and thereby the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5).
According to this feature, the gaming machine can be recognized by the operator because it is possible to recognize an operation method for preventing the gaming information from being erased. Erase can be further prevented.

Further, as means 4 of the sixth invention,
When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the erasure condition is satisfied, and when a predetermined confirmation operation is performed, the game control means stores the game information stored in the game information storage means. After erasing at least a part of the information (for example, as shown in FIG. 8-11), the CPU 103 determines that the clear switch is ON in the game control main process (122SGSa003; Y), and then executes the RAM clear process (122SGSa017). Part),
The notification unit also performs the notification even when the erasure condition is satisfied (for example, a portion in which the message image 122SG005M2 is displayed on the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 8-26 as Modification 9).
A gaming machine characterized by this is described, and according to this feature, it is possible to prevent game information from being erased unintentionally.

Further, as means 5 of the sixth invention,
Effect control means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of controlling effects based on control information output from the game control means;
Effect control storage means (for example, RAM 122) capable of storing information used by the effect control means;
Selecting means (for example, a stick controller 31A or a push button 31B) capable of selecting whether or not to execute erasure in the effect control storage means;
With
When the erasing condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started, and when it is selected by the selection means not to execute the erasure in the effect control storage means, the game information storage is performed. At least a part of the game information stored in the means is erased (for example, as shown in a modified example 10, only the RAM 102 is cleared), and the erase condition is satisfied when the power supply to the gaming machine is started. And when it is selected by the selection means to execute the deletion in the effect control storage means, at least a part of the game information stored in the game information storage means is deleted. Erasing at least a part of the information stored in the effect control storage means (for example, as shown in Modification 10, RAM 102 and RAM 122 Part to clear both)
According to this feature, when the erasing condition is satisfied, whether or not to erase the effect control storage means together with the erasure in the game information storage means is described. Can be selected.

  As described above, the characteristic portion 122SG according to the embodiment of the present invention has been described with reference to the drawings. This is also included in the present invention.

  For example, in the characteristic part 122SG of the embodiment, as shown in FIG. 8-11, if the clear switch is ON at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, after executing the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017), the lock switch is executed. When the 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa018; Y), the setting change process (122SGSa020) is executed, and an example in which a new set value can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. However, if the clear switch is ON when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, it is first determined whether or not the lock switch 122SG051 is ON. If the lock switch 122SG051 is ON, the setting change process is performed. RAM clear processing is executed based on the setting of a new set value for the pachinko gaming machine 1. It may be.

  When the RAM clearing process is executed based on the setting of the new setting value in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting changing process, the setting change is performed as shown in FIG. In the processing, the CPU 103 first transmits a first setting value change time notification command indicating that the CPU 103 has started the execution of the setting change processing to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa051). Next, the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 is specified (122SGSa052), and the specified set value is displayed on the display monitor 122SG029.

  The CPU 103 determines whether the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a). If the clear switch is OFF (122SGSa054a; N), the CPU 103 further determines whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa054a; N). 122 SGSa054b). If the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa054b; Y), the processes of 122SGSa054a and 122SGSa054b are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the clear switch is turned ON or the lock switch 122SG051 is turned OFF. If the lock switch 122SG051 is OFF, a setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the setting change process ends (122SGS061).

  When the clear switch is ON (122SGSa054a; Y), the CPU 103 issues a second setting value change start notification command indicating that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed by operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052. It is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa054c), and it is determined whether or not the setting changeover switch 122SG052 has been operated (122SGSa054d).

  If the setting switch 122SG052 is operated (122SGSa054d; Y), the content of the address F001 in the RAM 102 is updated (122SGSa055). Specifically, when the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “1”, “2”, which is one step less favorable for the player than “1”, is set as a temporary set value. When the setting value stored in the address F001 of the RAM 102 and displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is “2”, the setting value “3”, which is one step less favorable for the player than “2”, is temporarily set. It is stored as a set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102. If the set value displayed on the display monitor 122SG029 is "3", "1" may be stored as a temporary set value in the address F001 of the RAM 102.

  Then, the CPU 103 displays the set value (temporary set value) stored at the address F001 in the RAM 102 on the display monitor 122SG029 (122SGSa056), and determines whether the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057). When the setting switch is not operated in 122SGSa054 (122SGSa054; N), the process of 122SGSa057 is executed without executing the processes of 122SGSa055 and 122SGSa056.

  When the lock switch 122SG051 is ON (122SGSa057; Y), the CPU 103 repeatedly executes the processing of 122SGSa054d to 122SGSa056 to store a new temporary setting value in the address F001 of the RAM 102, or stores it in the address F001. A process of displaying the set value on the display monitor 122SG029 is executed.

  When the lock switch is OFF in 122SGSa057 (122SGSa057; N), the CPU 103 determines whether or not a set value (temporary set value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a). If the setting value (temporary setting value) is not stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102, that is, if the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off without operating the setting changeover switch 122SG052, a setting value change end notification command is produced. The setting is transmitted to the control board 12 and the setting change process is terminated (122SGS061).

  On the other hand, when the set value (temporary set value) is stored in the address 001 of the RAM 102 (122SGSa057a; Y), the set value stored in the address F000 in the RAM 102 and the set value stored in the address F001 (122SGSa057b), and it is determined whether the same setting value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c). If the same set value is stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; Y), that is, if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has not been changed, a set value change end notification command is issued. The setting is transmitted to the substrate 12 and the setting change process is terminated (122SGS061).

  When different setting values are stored in the address F000 and the address F001 in the RAM 102 (122SGSa057c; N), that is, when the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is changed, the setting value is stored in the address F001 in the RAM 102. The set value is stored at the address F000, that is, the set value stored at the address F001 is stored as the main set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (122SGSa058).

  Then, a setting value designation command corresponding to the setting value (the newly set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1) stored at the address F000 in the RAM 102 is transmitted to the effect control board 12 (122SGSa059), and the RAM is cleared. The process is executed (122SGSa060). The RAM clear processing (122SGSa060) executes the same processing as the RAM clear processing described with reference to FIG. Clear data). After the execution of the RAM clear processing (122SGSa060), a setting value change end notification command is transmitted to the effect control board 12, and the setting change processing ends (122SGS061).

  FIG. 8-24 is a flowchart illustrating a part of the effect control main process according to the eighth modification. In the effect control main process according to Modification 8, when the effect control CPU 120 determines that the cold start notification command has not been received (122SGS407; N), as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a command has been received (122SGS410a). If the first setting value change start notification command has not been received (122SGS410a; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 8-17). If the first setting value change start notification command has been received (122SGS410a; Y), The setting value change confirmation notification processing is executed (122SGS410b), and the game information or the like stored in the RAM 102 is cleared by changing the setting value on the image display device 5, or the lock is set when the setting value is not changed. An instruction to turn off the switch 122SG051 is displayed as a message image 122SG005M1 (see FIG. 8-25A).

  Then, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the second setting value change start notification command has been received (122SGS410c). If the second set value change start notification command has not been received (122SGS410C; N), it is further determined whether or not the set value change end notification command has been received (122SGS410d). If the setting value change end notification command has not been received (122SGS410d; N), the processing of 122SGS410b to 122SGS410d is repeatedly executed, and waits until the first setting value change start notification command or the setting value change end notification command is received. If a setting value change end notification command has been received (122SGS410d; Y), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 8-17).

  Further, when the second setting value change start notification command is received (122SGS410c; Y), the effect control CPU 120 executes a setting value change notification process for notifying that the setting value change operation is being performed. (122SGS411), it is determined whether or not a setting value change end notification command has been received (122SGS411a). If the setting value change end notification command has not been received (122SGS411a; N), the processes of 122SG411 and 122SGS411a are repeatedly executed, and the process waits until the setting value change end notification command is received. If the setting value change end notification command has been received (122SGS411a; Y), it is determined whether or not the setting value designation command has been received (122SGS411b). If the setting value designation command has not been received (122SGS411b; N), the process proceeds to 122SGS414 (see FIG. 8-17). If the setting value designation command has been received (122SGS411b; Y), the process proceeds from the received setting value designation command. A set value newly set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (set value stored in the address F000 of the RAM 102) is specified, and the specified set value is set value information (“1” to “3” corresponding to the set value). Is updated and stored in the RAM 122 (122SG413). Then, the process proceeds to 122SGS408 (see FIG. 8-17).

  As described above, the CPU 103 executes the setting change process, and the effect control CPU 120 executes the effect control main process, so that the clerk at the game hall or the like turns on the clear switch and the lock switch 122SG051 in the pachinko game machine. 8A, the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102 are cleared by changing the set value, and the set value is changed in the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. If not, an instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1.

  When the clerk of the game hall or the like turns off the lock switch 122SG051 while the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5 as described above, as shown in FIG. Are not changed and the RAM 102 is not cleared, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of "1", "2", and "3". On the other hand, when the clerk of the game hall or the like turns on the clear switch again while the message image 122SG005M1 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. 8-25 (C), the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is in a setting change state, and the display of the image on the image display device 5, the light emission of the game effect lamp 9, the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the like inform that the setting value is being changed.

  Then, in the setting change state, the clerk at the game hall or the like turns off the lock switch 122SG051 without setting a new setting value, or the clerk at the game hall or the like as the new setting value is the same as the original setting value. When the set value is set and the lock switch 122SG051 is turned off, the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not changed and the RAM 102 is cleared, as shown in FIG. Instead, a decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of “1”, “2”, and “3”. Further, in the setting change state, when a store clerk at the game hall or the like sets a new set value (changes the set value) and turns off the lock switch 122SG051, the set value is changed as shown in FIG. Is changed, the RAM 102 is cleared, and the decorative symbol is displayed on the image display device 5 as an initial symbol in a combination of "4", "5", and "6".

  In the eighth modification, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated with the clearing switch and the lock switch 122SG051 being turned on by the clerk or the like at the amusement arcade, thereby changing the set value to the image display device 5 and thereby changing the RAM 102 The example in which the game information or the like stored in is cleared and the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the set value is not changed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. The present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 8 to 26 as a ninth modification, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state where the clear switch is turned on, so that the image display device 5 displays the pachinko machine. Starting the gaming machine 1 with a cold start clears the game information and the like stored in the RAM 102, Instructs to reboot the pachinko gaming machine 1 if it does not start 1 at cold start, may be displayed as a message image 122SG005M2.

  By doing so, for example, when a clerk at a game hall or the like accidentally turns on the clear switch to start the pachinko gaming machine 1 by hot start, the pachinko gaming machine 1 starts up at a cold start. This prevents the game information stored in the RAM 102 from being unintentionally cleared.

  In the modified examples 8 and 9, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state or started in a cold start, the message images 122SG005M1 and 122SG005M2 are displayed on the image display device 5. Although the form in which confirmation is made as to whether or not to clear the RAM 102 is illustrated by way of example, the present invention is not limited to this. The confirmation may be made only when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state or when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a cold start, or both.

  In the eighth modification, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated with the clearing switch and the lock switch 122SG051 being turned on by the clerk or the like at the amusement arcade, thereby changing the set value to the image display device 5 and thereby changing the RAM 102 The example in which the game information or the like stored in is cleared and the instruction to turn off the lock switch 122SG051 when the set value is not changed is displayed as the message image 122SG005M1. The present invention is not limited to this. When the RAM 102 is cleared based on the fact that the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been started by a cold start or the set value has been changed, as shown in FIG. That the image display device 5 has changed the set values, that the RAM 102 has been cleared, and that these set values have been changed A message image 122SG005M3 including an option of whether to clear the RAM 122 in response to the clear of the RAM 102 is displayed, and a selection of whether to clear the RAM 122 by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A is received. It may be.

  When clearing of the RAM 122 is selected by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the effect control CPU 120 executes the RAM clearing process to clear other information except the set value information in the RAM 122 (results). If the user does not select clearing of the RAM 122 by operating the push button 31B or the stick controller 31A, the RAM 122 is not cleared (as a result, only the RAM 102 is cleared).

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the same timing (the cold start notification command or the setting command for the effect control Although the RAM clear processing is executed at the timing before the value change start notification command is transmitted), the present invention is not limited to this. As a modification 11, for example, the pachinko gaming machine 1 When starting at the start, the RAM clearing process is executed at a timing before transmitting the cold start notification command to the effect control board 12, and when starting the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change state, the effect control board 12 After the setting value change start notification command is sent to the When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start, for example, by executing a RAM clearing process after transmitting the set value change end notification command to the board 12, that is, after the end of the set value change, The timing for clearing the RAM 102 may be different between the case of starting in the state and the case of starting in the state.

  In the feature section 122SG in the embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8-17, the RAM 102 and the RAM 122 are always cleared when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a setting change state. Although the form in which the RAM clear notification process is executed to notify the fact (perform the RAM clear notification) is described as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. Is activated in the setting change state to notify that the setting value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is being changed (execution of a change in the setting value is executed). When a high priority notification (for example, notification of a change in the set value) is being performed, a low priority notification (for example, RAM clear notification) is not performed. Unishi may be.

  In the case where a priority is provided to each notification in this way, a low-priority notification may be executed after a high-priority notification is executed. In this case, the low-priority notification is executed in a shorter period than when the high-priority notification is not executed, so that the notification execution period is prevented from becoming long. You may.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the setting for the movable body 32 is not performed at the time of starting the pachinko gaming machine 1, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the starting of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is not limited to this. At the time, a confirmation operation of whether or not the movable body 32 operates normally may be executed in parallel with the above-described notification of RAM clear, notification of change in set value, notification of confirmation of set value, and notification of various activations. . When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a hot start or a cold start, a start-up notification for 60 seconds is executed, so that the operation of checking the movable body 32 can be executed during the start-up notification. When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the set value is changed in addition to the start notification for 40 seconds. Therefore, the movable body 32 is changed during the change of these set values and during the start notification for 40 seconds. Can be performed.

  The operation of checking the movable body 32 may be performed from the time the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, regardless of the activation mode of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a hot start notification command, a cold start notification command, The effect control CPU 120 (effect control board 12) may execute the set value change start notification command, the set value change end notification command, the set value confirmation start notification command, the set value confirmation end notification command, and the like, from the time when they are received. Further, in the case where the effect control CPU 120 executes the operation of confirming the movable body 32 from the time when the setting value change start notification command is received, that is, executes the operation of confirming the movable body 32 during the change of the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In such a case, even if an error occurs in the confirmation operation, the execution of the notification during the change of the set value is prioritized, and the error notification of the confirmation operation may not be executed.

  Also, in the feature section 122SG of the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, a new setting value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 so that the new setting value is directly reflected in the game. However, the present invention is not limited to this. When a new set value is set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change state, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is once restarted (pachinko gaming). The new setting value may be reflected in the game by activating the machine 1 by a hot start). When the new setting value is reflected in the game by restarting the pachinko gaming machine 1 as described above, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a setting change state, the moving body 32 is checked. After the movable body 32 is slightly moved from the origin position to the production position, a confirmation operation that can be performed in a relatively short period of time, such as moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again, is executed, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is restarted, as a confirmation operation of the movable body 32, a confirmation that a relatively long period of time is required, such as moving the movable body 32 from the origin position to the production position and then moving the movable body 32 to the origin position again. The operation may be performed. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the period required for the operation of checking the movable body 32 when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the above embodiment, the setting value stored in the address F000 is disclosed as the specific information that is not cleared from the RAM 102, but the present invention is not limited to this, The specific information that is not performed may include the setting of the RTC, an error history, and the like.

  Further, in the characteristic part 122SG of the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the set value as the specific information that is not cleared in the RAM 102, the temporary set value, the game information, and the like as the information that is cleared is stored is illustrated. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100, and one RAM stores specific information such as set values that are not cleared, and the other RAM stores provisional set values and game information. Information to be cleared, such as information, may be stored. By doing so, the other side of the RAM (temporary set values, game information, etc.) is stored depending on whether the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in a hot start, a cold start, a setting change state, or a setting confirmation state. (RAM) is cleared. Further, an area for storing specific information that is not cleared and an area for storing information that is cleared may be provided in the RAM 102.

  When two RAMs are provided on the game control microcomputer 100 as described above, a RAM (Static Random Access Memory) connected with a backup battery is connected to a RAM for storing specific information such as set values that are not cleared. On the other hand, by setting the RAM in which the temporary setting values and the game information are stored as FeRAM (Ferroelectric Random Access Memory), data having higher importance than other data such as setting values can be surely cleared. Alternatively, the information may be stored without being stored.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the above-described embodiment, the form in which the clear switch is mounted on the power supply board is illustrated, but the present invention is not limited to this. It may be mounted on. By doing so, there is no need to attach a clear switch to the existing power supply board, so that the manufacturing cost of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be reduced.

  In the above-described embodiment, in the characteristic portion 122SG, the mode in which the display monitor 122SG051 for displaying the set value is mounted on the main board 11 is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A display monitor 122SG051 may be provided at a position near the setting changeover switch 122SG052 in 11 to make it easy to execute a setting value changing operation.

  Further, in the feature section 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the form in which the display monitor 122SG051 for displaying the set value on the main board 11 is described as an example, but the present invention is not limited to this. When it is possible to calculate the accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio in the machine 1, the calculated accessory ratio and the continuous accessory ratio may be displayed on the display monitor 122SG051.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the above-described embodiment, an example is described in which the display monitor 122SG051 and the setting changeover switch 122SG052 are provided on the main board 11 so that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be changed. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, a set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be changed using a monitor (7-segment monitor) mounted on the payout control board, a reset button, or the like.

  Further, in the characteristic section 122SG in the above-described embodiment, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the CPU 103 transmits a setting value change start notification command to the effect control board 12 as an example. However, the present invention is not limited to this. As shown in FIGS. 8-11, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started in the setting change state, the same as when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started by a cold start. Since the RAM clear processing (122SGSa017) is executed, both the setting value change start notification command and the cold start notification command may be transmitted to the effect control board 12.

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the above-described embodiment, the setting value 1 is set to the most advantageous setting value for the player, and the setting value 3 is set to the most disadvantageous setting value for the player (setting value 1 is most disadvantageous for the game hall). Although the setting value 3 is set to be the most advantageous setting value for the game arcade), the present invention is not limited to this, and the setting value 1 is the most disadvantageous for the player. The set value may be set as the set value 3 and the set value that is most advantageous to the player.

  In particular, in the feature section 122SG, when there is an abnormality in the RAM 102 (122SGSa041; Y) or when there is no backup data (122SGSa042; N), “00H” is set to the address F000, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 Is a state in which the set value 1 is automatically set, that is, the pachinko gaming machine 1 becomes the most advantageous state for the player. For this reason, some of the players may cause the pachinko gaming machine 1 to illegally set the set value 1 by causing the CPU 103 to execute the RAM clearing process (see FIG. It is assumed to be set. Therefore, as described above, by setting the setting value 1 to the most disadvantageous setting value for the player, the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute the game based on the fact that the CPU 103 has executed the RAM clearing process when the RAM 102 has an abnormality or the like. It is possible to prevent a situation that is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to improve the security of the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  Also, in the characteristic portion 122SG of the embodiment, the special control and the specific control executed by the effect control CPU 120 perform the lighting period of the game effect lamp 9, the sound and the output period output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the image. Although the form in which the image is displayed on the display device 5 is different (the control relating to the notification at the time of starting is different) has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this. In addition to the control related to the above-described notification at the time of starting, an initial symbol (see FIGS. 8-19), a background image, and a character displayed on the image display device 5 after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in a state where a game can be played. (For example, the effect state and the effect state after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is ready to play) are different, and the movable body 32 is checked. Whether to execute the work, aspects and execution period of the confirmation operations may include control surrounding confirmation operation, such as different. That is, the special control and the specific control in the present invention may be any control as long as at least a part of the control target of the effect control CPU 120, the control mode of the effect control CPU 120, the control period of the effect control CPU 120, and the like are different. .

  Further, in the characteristic portion 122SG in the above-described embodiment, a pachinko gaming machine is applied as an example of a gaming machine. However, for example, by setting a predetermined number of bets for one game using a gaming value, Can be started, and a variable display result is derived on an image display device capable of variably displaying a plurality of types of symbols each of which can be identified. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which a prize can be generated according to the result.

  In the above embodiment, the title corresponding to the super-reach reach effect is displayed from the start of the super-reach reach effect, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 is operated by operating the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052. Any one of a plurality of setting values can be set, and by opening and closing the gaming machine frame 109SG003 and the glass door frame 109SG003a, the lock switch 109SG051 and the setting changeover switch 109SG052 can be operated and cannot be operated. In a switchable mode, the main board 11 (CPU 103) can set any one of a plurality of set values in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and stores a set secret value obtained by converting the set set value in the RAM 102 to produce an effect. Control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) In a mode in which a suggestion effect (a morning background effect) indicating the set value is executable, the main board 11 (CPU 103) switches the effect control board 12 (effect control) according to the activated state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A different command is transmitted to the pachinko gaming machine 1), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can execute a different start notification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated by a cold start and when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is activated in a setting change state. Although the form of notifying that the RAM 102 is cleared when changing the set value has been disclosed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be applied with a plurality of characteristic units among these characteristic units.

(Explanation of the characteristic part 111SG)
FIG. 9A is an explanatory diagram illustrating an example of the content of the effect control command used in the characteristic unit 111SG. The effect control command has, for example, a 2-byte structure, and the first byte indicates MODE (command classification), and the second byte indicates EXT (command type). The first bit (bit 7) of the MODE data is always "1", and the first bit of the EXT data is "0". Note that the command form shown in FIG. 9A is an example, and another command form may be used. In this example, the control command is composed of two control signals. However, the number of control signals constituting the control command may be one, or may be three or more.

  In the example shown in FIG. 9-1 (A), the command 8001H is a first variation start command for designating a variation start in a special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A. Command 8002H is a second variation start command for designating the start of variation in a special symbol game using the second special symbol in second special symbol display device 4B. Command 81XXH is an effect that is displayed in a variable manner in each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R in the image display device 5 in response to the change display of the special symbol in the special symbol game. This is a variation pattern designation command for designating a variation pattern (variation time) such as a symbol. Here, XXH indicates an unspecified hexadecimal number, and may be a value arbitrarily set according to the instruction content by the effect control command. In the variation pattern designation command, different EXT data is set according to the variation pattern to be designated.

  The command 8CXXH is a variation display result designation command, and is an effect control command that designates a variation display result such as a special symbol or an effect symbol. In the variable display result designation command, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), for example, a determination result (predetermined result) as to whether the variable display result is “outside” or “big hit”, Different EXT data is set according to the result of determining which of the plurality of types is the big hit type in the case of "big hit" (big hit type determination result).

  In the variable display result specifying command, for example, as shown in FIG. 9-1 (B), the command 8C00H is a first variable display result specifying command indicating a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “losing”. The command 8C01H is a second variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable big hit A”. The command 8C02H is a third variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable big hit B”. The command 8C03H is a fourth variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable big hit C”. The command 8C04H is a fifth variable display result designation command for notifying the advance determination result and the big hit type determination result that the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “non-probable big hit”. The command 8C05H is a sixth variable display result designation command for notifying a predetermined result indicating that the variable display result is “small hit”.

  The command 8F00H is a symbol confirmation command for designating stoppage (decision) of the effect symbols in the effect symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” in the image display device 5. The command 95XXH is a gaming state designation command for designating the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the gaming state designation command, for example, different EXT data is set according to the current gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1. As a specific example, the command 9500H is a first gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability low base state, normal state) in which neither the time shortening control nor the probability variation control is performed, and the command 9501H is performed by the time shortening control. On the other hand, a second gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (low probability high base state, short time state) in which probability variation control is not performed is used. In addition, the command 9502H is a third gaming state designation command corresponding to a gaming state (high probability low base state, timeless probability variation state) in which probability variation control is performed while time variation control is not performed, and command 9503H is probability variation and time variation control. It is assumed that the fourth gaming state designation command corresponds to the gaming state in which the control is performed together (highly accurate high base state, time-varying probability changing state).

  The command A0XXH is a hit start designation command (also referred to as a “fanfare command”) for designating display of an effect image indicating the start of a big hit game or a small hit game. The command A1XXH is a large winning opening opening notification command for notifying that the big winning opening is in the open state in the big hit gaming state. The command A2XXH is a notification command after the big winning opening is opened to notify that the big winning opening is changed from the open state to the closed state in the big hit gaming state. The command A3XXH is a hit end designation command for designating display of the effect image at the end of the big hit game or the small hit.

  In the hit start designation command and the hit end designation command, for example, EXT data similar to that of the variable display result designation command is set, so that different EXT data may be set according to the predetermined determination result or the big hit type determination result. . Alternatively, in the hit start designation command or the hit end designation command, the correspondence relationship between the pre-determined result and the big hit type decision result and the set EXT data may be different from the correspondence relationship in the variable display result designation command. . In the notification command during the opening of the big winning opening and the notification command after the opening of the big winning opening, for example, different EXT data corresponding to the number of round executions (for example, “1” to “16”) in the normal opening big hit state or the high speed opening big hit state Is set.

  The command B100H is based on the fact that the game ball that has passed (entered) the first start winning opening formed by the winning ball apparatus 6A is detected by the first start opening switch 22A and a start winning (first start winning) has occurred. This is a first start opening prize designation command for notifying that the first start condition for executing the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A is established. The command B200H is based on the fact that a game ball that has passed (entered) a second start winning opening formed by the variable winning ball apparatus 96SG006B is detected by the second start opening switch 22B and a start winning (second start winning) has occurred. The second start opening prize designation command for notifying that the second start condition for executing the special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B is established.

  The command C1XXH is a first reserved memory number notification command for notifying the first special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified. The command C2XXH is a second reserved memory number notification command for notifying the second special figure reserved memory number so that the special figure reserved memory number can be specified. The first reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the first start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the first starting winning opening and the first start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. The second reserved memory number notification command is, for example, when the second start opening winning designation command is transmitted based on the fact that the game ball passes (enters) the second start winning opening and the second start condition is satisfied. , Transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In addition, the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command are used when the first start condition or the second start condition is satisfied (when the reserved memory number decreases). It may be transmitted in response to the start of execution.

  Instead of the first reserved memory number notification command and the second reserved memory number notification command, a total reserved memory number notification command for notifying the total reserved memory number may be transmitted. That is, a total pending storage number notification command for notifying an increase (or decrease) in the total pending storage number may be used.

  The command C4XXH and the command C6XXH are effect control commands (winning-time determination result designation commands) indicating the content of the winning-time determination result. Among them, the command C4XXH is a symbol designation command indicating whether or not the fluctuation display result is “big hit” and the result of determining the big hit type (probable change, non-probable change, and saliency) as the winning result determination result. The command C6XXH is a fluctuation category indicating, as a prize-winning determination result, a result of determining whether the random value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern is a fluctuation pattern of “non-reach”, “super-reach”, or “other”. Command.

  FIG. 9B is an explanatory diagram illustrating a random number value counted on the main board 11 side. As shown in FIG. 9B, in the present embodiment, on the side of the main substrate 11, a random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining the big hit type, and a random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern. Numerical data indicating each of the random number values MR4 for determining the normal figure display result is controlled to be countable. In addition, in order to improve a game effect, random numbers other than these may be used. Such random numbers used to control the progress of the game are also referred to as game random numbers.

  The random number circuit 104 only needs to count numerical data indicating some or all of these random number values MR1 to MR4. The CPU 103 updates various numerical data by software using a random counter different from the random number circuit 104, such as a random counter provided in a game control counter setting unit (not shown), so that the random number values MR1 to MR4 are updated. May be counted.

  The random value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is a random value used for determining whether or not to control the big hit gaming state with the fluctuation display result of the special symbol or the like in the special figure game as “big hit”. It takes a value in the range of “1” to “65536”. The random number MR2 for determining the big hit type is any one of “probable big hit A”, “probable big hit B”, “probable big hit C”, and “non-probable big hit” when the variation display result is “big hit”. This is a random value used to determine the value, for example, a value in the range of “1” to “100”.

  The random number value MR3 for determining the variation pattern is a random number value used to determine the variation pattern in the variation display of the special symbol or the effect symbol as one of a plurality of types prepared in advance. For example, “1” to “ It takes a value in the range of “997”.

  The random value MR4 for determining the normal map display result is used to determine whether the fluctuation display result in the normal game by the normal symbol display 20 is “per normal map” or “displaced from the normal map”. For example, a value in the range of “1” to “997”.

  FIG. 9A illustrates a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 1 stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, a special figure display result determination table common to the first special figure and the second special figure is used as the special figure display result determination table 1, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, separate special figure display result determination tables may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

  The special figure display result determination table 1 is used to display a variation display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display apparatus 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display apparatus 4B. In order to determine based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result whether or not the variable display result is to be controlled as the "big hit" before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed. Table to be referenced.

  In the special figure display result determination table 1 in the present embodiment, depending on whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a normal state, a time-saving state (low-probability state), or a probable change state (high-probability state), A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for special figure display result determination is assigned to the special figure display result of “big hit” or “out”.

  In the special figure display result determination table 1, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result determination is based on whether the special figure display result is set to "big hit" and whether or not to control to the big hit game state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result. In the special figure display result determination table in the present embodiment, when the gaming state is the probability variation state (high probability state), more determination values are obtained than when the game state is the normal state or the short time state (low probability state). It is assigned to the special figure display result of "Big hit". Thus, in the probable change state (high-precision state) in which the probable change control is performed in the pachinko gaming machine 1, when the normal state or the time-saving state (low-precision state) is set, the special map display result is set to the "big hit" to control the big hit gaming state. Then, as compared with the determined probability (about 1/300 in the present embodiment), the probability that the special figure display result is determined to be the big hit and controlled to the big hit game state is higher (in the present embodiment, about 1/300). / 30). That is, in the special figure display result determination table, when the gaming state in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is the probability variation state (high probability state), it is determined that the big hit gaming state is controlled as compared with the normal state or the short time state. The determination data is assigned to the determination result as to whether or not to control the big hit gaming state so that the probability increases.

  FIG. 9B illustrates a configuration example of the special figure display result determination table 2 stored in the ROM 101. In the present embodiment, the special figure display result determination table 2 is a separate special figure display result determination table for the first special figure and the second special figure, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, a common special figure display result determination table may be used for the first special figure and the second special figure.

  The special figure display result determination table 2 is used to display a variation display result in a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display apparatus 4A or a special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display apparatus 4B. Before the determined special symbol is derived and displayed, it is determined based on the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result whether or not to control the change display result to the small hitting game state as "small hit". Is a table that is referred to.

  In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the present embodiment, a special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A or a second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is used. A numerical value (judgment value) to be compared with the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result is assigned to the special figure display result of “small hit” according to whether the special figure game has been played.

  In the special figure display result determination table 2, the table data indicating the determination value to be compared with the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result determination is based on whether the special figure display result is "small hit" and the small hitting game state is controlled. The determination data is assigned to the result of the determination. In the special figure display result determination table 2 in the present embodiment, the special figure display result of “small hit” is assigned only when the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. In the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B, the special figure display result of “small hit” is not assigned. In the present embodiment, the probability that it is determined that the special figure display result is set to “small hit” and the state is controlled to the small hitting game state when the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is performed. It is 1/100.

  FIG. 9D shows a configuration example of the big hit type determination table stored in the ROM 101. In the jackpot type determination table in the present embodiment, when it is determined to control the jackpot gaming state with the special figure display result as “big hit”, the jackpot type is determined based on the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination. It is a table that is referenced to determine whether or not. In the jackpot type determination table, the special symbol on which the variable display (variation) is performed in the special symbol game is the first special symbol (the special symbol game by the first special symbol display device 4A) or the second special symbol (second Depending on whether it is a special symbol game by the special symbol display device 4B, the numerical value (determination value) compared with the random value MR2 for determining the big hit type is "non-probable variable big hit", "probable big hit A", It is assigned to a plurality of types of big hits such as “big hit B” and “probable big hit C”.

  Here, the big hit type according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 9-4 (B). In the present embodiment, the high-precision control and the time-saving control are performed as the big hit type after the end of the big hit game state. The probable big hit A or the probable big hit B that is executed and shifts to the high-accuracy high-base state, and the probable big hit that shifts to the high-probability low-base state where the high-precision control is executed but the time-saving control is not executed after the end of the big-hit gaming state. C and a non-probable variable jackpot in which only the time-saving control is executed after the end of the jackpot gaming state to shift to the low-probability high-basis state.

  The jackpot game state based on the “probable change jackpot A” is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed 16 times (so-called 16 rounds) for changing the special variable winning ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. On the other hand, the jackpot game state based on the “probable change jackpot B” is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the special variable prize ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . The jackpot game state based on the “non-probable variable jackpot” is a normal open jackpot that is repeatedly executed five times (so-called five rounds) to change the special variable prize ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player. . Thus, “probability variation big hit A” may be referred to as 16 rounds (16R) probability variation big hit, and “probability variation big hit B” may be referred to as five rounds (5R) probability variation big hit. Further, in the jackpot game by the “probable change jackpot C”, the round for changing the special variable prize ball device 7 to the first state advantageous to the player is repeatedly executed twice (so-called two rounds), and the special in each round is performed. The opening period of the variable winning ball device 7 is a high-speed opening big hit that is shorter (for example, 0.1 second) than other big hit games. Note that the probability variation control and the time reduction control are not executed during any of the big hit types of big hit games.

  Although not particularly shown, the small hitting game state in the present embodiment changes the special variable prize ball device 7 twice to the first state advantageous to the player, and the opening time is the same as the certain variable big hit C. This is an open period (0.1 second in the present embodiment). In addition, after the end of the small hit game, the game state immediately before the small hit game is taken over.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the same fluctuation pattern (PC1-1 shown in FIG. 9-5) is used for the case where the fluctuation display result is “probable variable big hit C” and the case where it is “small hit”. Since the variable display is executed and the opening pattern of the special variable winning ball device 7 is the same, the probability change control is executed for the player after the big hit game or the small hit game of the big hit C is completed. It is possible to continue the game while expecting that there is.

  The high-accuracy control and the time-shortening control executed after the end of the big hit gaming state of the probability changing big hit A and the probability changing big hit B are continuously executed until the big hit occurs again after the end of the big hit gaming state. Therefore, when the big hit that has occurred again is the probable big hit A or the probable big hit B, the high-precision control and the short-time control are executed again after the big hit gaming state ends, so the big hit gaming state does not go through the normal state. It becomes a so-called consecutive resort state that occurs continuously.

  On the other hand, the time saving control executed after the end of the big hit game state by the “non-probable variable big hit” is that the special figure game is executed a predetermined number of times (100 times in the present embodiment) or the special figure game of the predetermined number of times is executed. Before the game is executed, the game ends with the big hitting game state.

  In the setting example of the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), “probable big hit A”, “probable big hit B” depends on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. , "Probable variable big hit C", and "non-probable variable big hit" are different in the assignment of the determination values to the big hit types. That is, when the fluctuation special chart is the first special chart, the predetermined range of judgment values (values in the range of “81” to “100”) are “probability big hit B” or “probability big hit C” with a small number of rounds. On the other hand, when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, no determination value is assigned to the big hit types such as “probability variable big hit B” and “probable big hit C”. With such a setting, the jackpot type is determined as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the first start condition for starting the special figure game using the first special figure by the first special symbol display device 4A is satisfied. And determining the jackpot type as one of a plurality of types based on the fact that the second start condition for starting the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display device 4B is satisfied. Thus, the ratio of determining the big hit type as “probable big hit B” or “probable big hit C” with a small number of rounds can be varied. In particular, in the special map game using the second special map, the jackpot type is determined to be “probably variable big hit B” or “probably variable big hit C”, and it is not determined to control to the normally open big hit state or the fast open big hit state with a small number of rounds. Therefore, for example, by the high opening control accompanying the time saving control, in the game state in which the game ball easily enters the second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B, it is possible to avoid the frequent occurrence of the big hit state in which the obtained prize ball is small. It is possible to prevent the entertainment interest from being reduced.

  In addition, in the setting example of the jackpot type determination table shown in FIG. 9-4 (A), the assignment of the determination value to the “non-probable change” jackpot type is based on whether the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. The probability of being a non-probable variable jackpot and the probability of being a probable variable jackpot are the same regardless of whether the variation special map is the first special map or the second special map. It has been.

  Therefore, as described above, the assignment of the determination value to “probably variable big hit B” or “probably variable big hit C” differs depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. Therefore, the assignment of the determination value to “probable variable jackpot A” also differs depending on whether the variation special figure is the first special figure or the second special figure. It is set so that the figure is more easily determined when the figure is the second special figure than when the figure is the first special figure.

  Even when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, the judgment value in a predetermined range different from the case where the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure is a big hit of “probable big hit B” or “probable big hit C”. It may be assigned to a type. For example, when the fluctuation special chart is the second special figure, a smaller judgment value than the case where the fluctuation special figure is the first special figure is a big hit type such as “probable big hit B” or “probable big hit C”. May be assigned. Alternatively, regardless of whether the fluctuation special chart is the first special chart or the second special chart, the jackpot type may be determined with reference to the common table data.

  FIG. 9-5 shows a variation pattern in the present embodiment. In the present embodiment, among the cases where the variation display result is “losing”, the variation display mode of the production symbol is “non-reach” and “reach”, respectively, Corresponding to the case where the display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, a plurality of variation patterns are prepared in advance. The variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “losing” and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “non-reach” is referred to as a non-reach variation pattern (also referred to as “non-reach deviation variation pattern”). A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “out of” and the variation display mode of the effect symbol is “reach” is referred to as a reach variation pattern (also referred to as “reach out of variation pattern”). Further, the non-reach fluctuation pattern and the reach fluctuation pattern are included in the deviation fluctuation pattern corresponding to the case where the fluctuation display result is “out of”. A variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “big hit” is referred to as a big hit variation pattern.

  The big hit variation pattern and the reach variation pattern include a normal reach variation pattern in which a normal reach reach effect is executed and a super reach change pattern in which a super reach reach effect such as super reach α and super reach β is executed. In the present embodiment, only one type of normal reach variation pattern is provided, but the present invention is not limited to this, and like normal reach, normal reach α, normal reach β,. A plurality of normal reach variation patterns may be provided. Also, in the super reach variation pattern, three or more super reach variation patterns such as super reach γ... In addition to super reach α and super reach β may be provided.

  The variation pattern in the present embodiment includes a variation pattern per special hit corresponding to the case where the variation display result is “small hit” or the variation display result is “big hit” and the big hit type is “probable big hit C” ( PC1-1) is also included.

  As shown in FIG. 9-5, the special figure variation time of the normal reach variation pattern in which the reach reach of the normal reach is performed in the present embodiment is set to be shorter than the super reach variation patterns of super reach α and super reach β. Have been. Further, regarding the special figure variation time of the super-reach variation pattern in which the super-reach effect such as super-reach α and super-reach β in the present embodiment is executed, the variation pattern in which the super-reach effect of super-reach β is executed is The special figure fluctuation time is set longer than the fluctuation pattern in which the super reach effect of the super reach α is performed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the super reach β, the super reach α, and the normal reach are set so that the fluctuation display result becomes “big hit” so that the big hit expectation becomes higher. In the super reach fluctuation pattern, the longer the fluctuation time, the higher the expectation of a big hit.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, as described later, these fluctuation patterns are determined first, for example, the types of the fluctuation patterns, such as the type of non-reach, the type of normal reach, and the type of super reach. Then, instead of determining the variation pattern to be executed from the variation patterns belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type, the variation pattern to be executed is determined using only the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination without determining these types. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, in addition to the random value MR3 for determining the variation pattern, a random value for determining the variation pattern type is provided, and the random number value for determining the variation pattern is determined. The type of the variation pattern is determined first from the random number value of the variation, and then the variation is executed from the variation pattern belonging to the variation pattern belonging to the determined type Turn may be determined.

  Further, the ROM 101 also stores a fluctuation pattern determination table for determining a fluctuation pattern based on the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination. Is determined to be one of the fluctuation patterns.

  Specifically, a variation pattern determination table as shown in FIG. 9-6 is prepared in advance as the variation pattern determination table. When the jackpot type is “non-probable big hit”, when the big hit type is “probable big hit A” and “probable big hit B”, and when the big hit type is “probable big hit C” and “small hit”, A case where the total number of pending storages is 2 or less, a case where the total number of pending storages is 3 and a case where the total number of pending storages is 4; , And the number of determination values according to is prepared in advance.

  The variation time of the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-2) is shorter than that of the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern (PA1-1) without shortening, and the non-reach out-of-reach variation pattern is shorter than the variation pattern (PA1-2). The variation time of the variation pattern (PA1-3) is shorter. Therefore, when the number of pending storages increases, the fluctuation pattern of the non-reach out-of-reach time with a short fluctuation time is determined, so that the pending storages are easily digested, and the number of pending storages reaches the upper limit number of four. When the number of pending memories is reduced, non-reach fluctuations with a long fluctuation time are not achieved if the number of pending memories is reduced. When the pattern (PA1-1) is determined, the time of the variable display is lengthened, so that it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game due to the non-execution of the variable display.

  In the RAM 102 in the present embodiment, for example, a game control data holding area (not shown) is provided as an area for holding various data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. The control data holding area includes a first special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), a second special figure reservation storage unit (not shown), a general figure reservation storage unit (not shown), and a game control flag setting unit ( (Not shown), a game control timer setting unit (not shown), a game control counter setting unit (not shown), and a game control buffer setting unit (not shown).

  The first special map holding storage unit stores a special map which has not yet started, although a game ball has passed (entered) a first starting winning port formed by the winning ball device 6A and a starting winning (first starting winning) has been generated. The storage unit stores the pending data of the game (the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display device 4A). As an example, the first special figure reservation storage unit associates the winning order (the detection order of the game balls) with the reservation number in the first start winning opening and establishes the first start condition in the passage (entry) of the game ball. Based on the above, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 or the like a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern, and the like as reserved data. Are stored until the storage number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the first special figure holding storage unit indicates that the execution of the special figure game using the first special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display result) in this special figure game ) Is the hold information that enables the determination as to whether or not a big hit will occur.

  The second special map holding storage unit stores a special winning start (second starting winning) when a game ball passes (enters) a second starting winning opening formed by the variable winning ball device 6B but has not yet started. The game data (a special figure game using the second special figure in the second special symbol display device 4B) is stored. As an example, the second special figure holding storage unit associates the winning order (the order in which game balls are detected) into the second starting winning opening with the holding number and establishes the second starting condition when the game ball passes (enters). Based on the above, the CPU 103 extracts from the random number circuit 104 or the like a random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result, a random number value MR2 for determining a jackpot type, and numerical data indicating a random number value MR3 for determining a fluctuation pattern, and the like as reserved data. , Until the number reaches a predetermined upper limit (for example, “4”). The hold data thus stored in the second special figure holding storage unit indicates that execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is suspended, and the fluctuation display result (the special figure display result) in this special figure game ) Is the hold information that enables the determination as to whether or not a big hit will occur.

  Note that the holding information (first holding information) based on the establishment of the first starting condition due to the passing of the game ball through (entering) the first starting winning opening and the gaming ball passed (entering) through the second starting winning opening. Thus, the hold information (second hold information) based on the establishment of the second start winning prize may be stored in association with the hold number in the common hold storage unit. In this case, the start port data indicating whether the game ball has passed (entered) through the first start winning port or the second start winning port may be included in the hold information and stored in association with the hold number. .

  The game control flag setting unit (not shown) is provided with a plurality of types of flags that can be updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the like. For example, a game control flag setting unit (not shown) stores data indicating a flag value and data indicating an ON state or an OFF state for each of a plurality of types of flags.

  The game control timer setting unit (not shown) is provided with various timers used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, a game control timer setting unit (not shown) stores data indicating a timer value of each of a plurality of types of timers.

  The game control counter setting unit (not shown) is provided with a plurality of types of counters for counting count values used to control the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, a game control counter setting unit (not shown) stores data indicating a count value of each of a plurality of types of counters. Here, the game control counter setting unit (not shown) may be provided with a random counter for counting a part or all of the game random numbers so that the CPU 103 can be updated by software.

  In the random counter of the game control counter setting unit (not shown), a random number value that is not generated by the random number circuit 104, for example, numerical data indicating the random number values MR2 to MR4 is stored as a random count value. Accordingly, the numerical data indicating each random number value is updated regularly or irregularly. The software executed by the CPU 103 to update the random count value may be for updating the random count value separately from the numerical data update operation in the random number circuit 104, or may be extracted from the random number circuit 104. The random count value may be updated by performing predetermined processing such as scramble processing or arithmetic processing on all or part of the numerical data.

  The game control buffer setting section is provided with various buffers for temporarily storing data used for controlling the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. For example, the game control buffer setting unit stores data indicating a buffer value in each of a plurality of types of buffers.

  FIG. 9-7 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S110 of FIG. 5 as the special symbol normal process. In the following description of each step of the flowchart, for example, a part described as “step S1” may be abbreviated as “S1” or “111SGS1”.

  In the special symbol normal processing shown in FIG. 9-7, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the second special figure reserved storage number is “0” (111SGS141). The second special figure reserved storage number is the reserved storage number of the special figure game using the second special figure by the second special symbol display 4B. For example, in the process of 111SGS141, the count value of the second reserved storage number stored in the game control counter setting unit (not shown) may be read, and it may be determined whether the read value is “0”.

  If the second special figure reserved storage number is other than “0” in 111SGS141, the special figure display result is stored as the reserved data corresponding to the reserved number “1” in the second special figure reserved storage unit 151B. Numerical data indicating the random number MR1 for determination, the random number MR2 for jackpot type determination, and the random value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination are read out (111SGS142). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for variation and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the process of 111SGS142, the second special figure reserved storage count and the total reserved storage count are decremented by 1, and the second special figure reserved storage count and the total reserved storage count are subtracted by one. And the data in the second special figure reservation storage unit 151B is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the hold number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the hold numbers “2” to “4”) in the second special figure holding storage unit 151B are stored. The pending data shown is shifted upward by one entry (111SGS143).

  Thereafter, the variable special figure designating buffer value, which is the storage value of the variable special figure designating buffer, is updated to “2” (111SGS144), and then the process proceeds to 111SGS149.

  On the other hand, when the second special figure reserved storage number is “0” in 111SGS141, it is determined whether the first special figure reserved storage number is “0” (111SGS145). The first special figure reserved storage number is the reserved number of special figure games using the first special figure by the first special symbol display 4A. For example, in the process of 111SGS145, the game control counter setting unit 154 reads the first hold storage number count value stored in the first hold storage number counter, and determines whether the read value is “0”. Good. As described above, the process of 111SGS145 is executed when it is determined in 111SGS141 that the second special figure reserved storage number is “0”, and whether the first special figure reserved storage number is “0” is determined. Is determined. Thereby, execution of the special figure game using the second special figure is started in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure.

  It should be noted that the special figure game using the second special figure is not limited to being executed in preference to the special figure game using the first special figure. For example, the first start winning opening and the second start winning opening may be changed. The execution of the special figure game may be started in the order in which the game balls enter (pass) and the starting prize is generated. In this case, a table for storing data that can specify the order in which the start winnings are specified is provided, and the execution of the special figure game using either the first special figure or the second special figure is started from the stored data. It suffices if it can be determined.

  If the first special figure reservation storage number is other than “0” in 111SGS145, the special figure display result is regarded as the reservation data stored in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A corresponding to the reservation number “1”. Numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determination, the random number value MR2 for large hit type determination, and the random number value MR3 for variation pattern determination are respectively read (111SGS146). The numerical data read at this time may be stored in, for example, a random number buffer for variation and temporarily stored.

  Subsequent to the processing of 111SGS146, the first special figure reserved storage count and the total reserved storage count are decremented by one to update the first special figure reserved storage count and the total reserved storage count. And the data in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A is updated. Specifically, the random number values MR1 to MR3 stored in the entries lower than the reservation number “1” (for example, the entries corresponding to the reservation numbers “2” to “4”) in the first special figure reservation storage unit 151A are stored. The pending data shown is shifted upward by one entry (111SGS147).

  After that, the variable special figure designating buffer value, which is the storage value of the variable special figure designating buffer, is updated to “1” (111SGS148), and then the process proceeds to 111SGS149.

  In 111SGS149, the display result determination table 1 shown in FIG. 9-3 (A) is selected as a use table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the fluctuation display result of the special symbol, is set to “big hit”. set. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of "big hit", and the special figure display is performed. It is determined whether the result is a "big hit" (111SGS150a). In this 111SGS150a, if the gaming state at that time is a high-precision state in which the probability change flag is set, if the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result falls within the range of 10000 to 12180, the "big hit" Is determined. If the probability change flag is not set and the random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result falls in the range of 1 to 219, it is determined to be a "big hit".

  As described above, in the special figure display result determination table 1 selected in 111SGS149, since different determination values are assigned to the "big hit" according to the game state (high accuracy, low accuracy) at that time, In the process of 111SGS150a, the special figure display result is determined by using different determination data (judgment value) depending on whether or not the gaming state at the time of starting the variable display of the special figure game or the like is a highly accurate state. By determining whether or not to make a "big hit", when the gaming state is in the high-accuracy state, it is determined to be "big-hit" with a higher probability than in the case of the low-probability state.

  If it is determined in 111SGS150a that it is a "big hit", a big hit flag provided in a game control flag setting unit (not shown) is set to an on state (111SGS152). At this time, the big hit type determination table shown in FIG. 9-4 (A) is selected and set as the use table for determining the big hit type to any of a plurality of types (111SGS153). By referring to the jackpot type determination table set in this way, numerical data indicating the random number value MR2 for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation, and “non-probable change” and “probable change A” in the jackpot type determination table , "Probable change B", or "probable change C", it is determined which of the plurality of types is the big hit type according to which of the determination values assigned to the big hit types (111SGS154).

  By determining the jackpot type in the processing of 111SGS154, the gaming state after the end of the jackpot gaming state can be set to any one of the time-saving state and the probable state in which the player has a higher degree of advantage than the time-saving state. Whether to control is determined before the determined special symbol as the variable display result is derived. In response to the jackpot type determined in this way, for example, a jackpot type buffer value which is a storage value of a jackpot type buffer provided in a game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is set (111SGS155). The jackpot type is stored. As an example, if the jackpot type is "non-probable variable" corresponding to the non-probable variable jackpot, the buffer type of the jackpot is set to "0", if "probable variable A" corresponding to the probable variable jackpot A is set to "1", In the case of “probable change B” corresponding to “C”, it is set to “2”, and for “probable change C” corresponding to the jackpot C, it is set to “3”.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in 111SGS151 that it is not "big hit", the process proceeds to 111SGS150b. In the 111SGS 150b, the display result determination table 2 shown in FIG. 9-3 (B) is selected as a use table for determining whether the special figure display result, which is the fluctuation display result of the special symbol, is set to “small hit”. Set. Subsequently, the numerical data indicating the random number value MR1 for determining the special figure display result stored in the random number buffer for fluctuation is compared with the determination value assigned to each special figure display result of “small hit”, and It is determined whether the display result is “small hit” (111SGS150b). In this 111SGS150b, if the special figure game using the first special figure in the first special symbol display 4A is used, if the random number value MR1 for the special figure display result determination falls within the range of 54000 to 54651, “ After a small hit flag is set (111SGS151), the process proceeds to 111SGS156. In the case of a special figure game using the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B, the process directly proceeds to 111SGS156 without determining “small hit”.

  In 111SGS156, it is determined according to the result of the prior determination of whether or not to control the jackpot game state (whether or not the jackpot flag is set) and the determination result of the jackpot type in the case of the jackpot game state. Set special symbols. As an example, a special symbol indicating a symbol "-" to be a non-standard symbol is set as a fixed special symbol corresponding to a predetermined result indicating that the special symbol display result is "non-standard". If the special map display result is determined to be "big hit" in the 111SGS 150a, the big hit symbols "3", "5", "7", One of the special symbols indicating the number “9” is set as the fixed special symbol. That is, the special symbol indicating the number “3” is set as the fixed special symbol according to the result of the determination that the jackpot type is “non-probable”. In addition, a special symbol indicating a number of “7” is set as a fixed special symbol according to the determination result of setting the jackpot type to “probable change A”. The special symbol indicating the number of “5” is set as the fixed special symbol according to the determination result of the jackpot type being “probable change B”. The special symbol indicating the number “9” is set as the fixed special symbol according to the result of the determination that the jackpot type is “probable change C”.

  After setting the fixed special symbol in 111SGS156, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “1” corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (111SGS157), and the special symbol normal process ends.

  If the reserved number of special figure games using the first special figure is “0” in 111SGS145, a predetermined demonstration display setting is made (111SGS158), and the special special pattern normal processing ends. In this demonstration display setting, for example, an effect control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) for designating a demonstration display (demo screen display) by displaying a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 5 is transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control. It is determined whether or not the data has been transmitted to the board 12. At this time, if the customer waiting demonstration designation command has already been transmitted, the demonstration display setting ends. On the other hand, if it is not transmitted, the setting for transmitting the customer waiting demonstration designation command is performed, and then the demonstration display setting is terminated.

  FIG. 9-8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S111 of FIG. 5 as a variation pattern setting process. In the variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 9-8, the CPU 103 first determines whether or not the big hit flag is on (111SGS161). If the big hit flag is on, the big hit type buffer value stored in the game control buffer setting unit (not shown) is read out, and the big hit types are “non-probable big hit”, “probable big hit A”, “probable big hit”. B "or" probable change big hit C "is specified (111SGS162).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the jackpot type is “probable variable jackpot C” (111SGS163). If the jackpot type is not “probable variable jackpot C”, a use table for determining a variation pattern to any of a plurality of types is provided. Then, the large hit variation pattern determination table A or the big hit variation pattern determination table B is selected and set according to the specified big hit type (111SGS164). If the big hit type is "probable big hit C", a special hit (probability / small hit) change pattern determination table is selected and set as a use table for determining the change pattern to one of a plurality of types. (111SGS165).

  When the big hit flag is off in 111SGS161, for example, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag provided in the game control flag setting unit (not shown) is on (set) to determine whether the small hit is set. Is determined (111SGS166). If the small hit flag is on, a special hit (probability / small hit) change pattern determination table is selected and set as a use table for determining any of a plurality of types of change patterns (111SGS167). .

  When the small hit flag is off at 111SGS166, the game state is determined by, for example, determining whether or not the time reduction flag provided in the game control flag setting unit (not shown) is on (set). It is determined whether or not is under the time saving control in which the time saving control is performed in the probability change state or the time saving state (111SGS168). If the time reduction flag is on, the outlier variation pattern determination table D is selected and set as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns (111SGS169).

  On the other hand, when the time saving control is not being performed, that is, when the time saving flag is off (when it is not set), for example, the first hold storage number count value provided in the game control counter setting unit (not shown) or By reading the second reserved storage number count value or the like, the reserved storage number corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value is specified, and it is determined whether the specified reserved storage number is 1 or 2 (111SGS170). .

  If the number of reserved storages corresponding to the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value is 1 or 2, select the outlier fluctuation pattern determination table A as a use table for determining any of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns. It is set (111SGS171).

  If the number of reserved storages corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value is not 1 or 2, the process proceeds to 111SGS172, and it is further determined whether the number of reserved storages corresponding to the variable special figure designation buffer value is three. The determination is made (111SGS172).

  In the case where the number of retained storages corresponding to the variation special figure designation buffer value is 3, the variation pattern determination table B for out-of-position is selected and set as a use table for determining any of a plurality of types of variation patterns. (111SGS173).

  In addition, when the number of retained storages corresponding to the variation special figure designation buffer value is not 3, the outlier variation pattern determination table C is selected as a use table for determining one of a plurality of types of variation patterns. It is set (111SGS174).

  After executing any of the processes of 111SGS164, 111SGS165, 111SGS167, 111SGS169, 111SGS171, 111SGS173, and 111SGS174, for example, based on numerical data indicating the random number value MR3 for fluctuation pattern determination stored in a fluctuation random number buffer or the like. The variation pattern is determined to be one of a plurality of types by referring to the selected one of the variation pattern determination tables for the jackpot or the variation pattern determination tables A to D (111SGS175).

  When the big hit flag is OFF, the fluctuation pattern is determined in the process of 111SGS175, thereby determining whether or not the fluctuation display mode of the effect symbol is “reach”. That is, the process of 111SGS175 includes a process of determining whether or not the variable display state of the effect symbol is to be the reach state when the variable display result is “out”.

  After the variation pattern is determined by 111SGS175, the special figure game using the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A and the second special figure display on the second special symbol display 4B according to the fluctuation special figure designation buffer value. The setting for starting the change of the special symbol is performed so as to start any of the special figure games using the two special figures (111SGS176). As an example, if the variable special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the first special figure on the first special symbol display 4A is performed. On the other hand, if the variable special figure designating buffer value is “2”, the setting for transmitting the drive signal for updating the display of the second special figure on the second special symbol display 4B is performed.

  Subsequent to the processing of 111SGS176, the setting for transmitting various commands for starting the change of the special symbol is performed (111SGS177). For example, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “1”, the CPU 103 sends the game state designation command, the first variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variation display result to the effect control board 12 from the main board 11. In order to sequentially transmit the designated command and the first reserved storage number notification command, the game control buffer setting unit 155 stores setting data indicating the storage address (head address) of the first variation start command table prepared in the ROM 101 in the ROM 101. In the transmission command buffer provided in the buffer area specified by the transmission command pointer. On the other hand, when the variation special figure designation buffer value is “2”, the CPU 103 sends the game state designation command, the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, and the variation display result from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. In order to sequentially transmit the designation command and the second reserved storage number notification command, the setting data indicating the storage address in the ROM 101 of the prepared second variation start command table is designated by the transmission command pointer in the transmission command buffer. Stored in the buffer area.

  After executing the processing of 111SGS177, the special figure fluctuation time which is the fluctuation display time of the special symbol according to the determination result of the fluctuation pattern is set (111SGS178). The special figure fluctuating time, which is the special figure fluctuating display time, is the time required from the start of the special figure fluctuating in the special figure game to the derivation and display of the fixed special symbol which is the fluctuating display result (special figure display result). It is. After that, the value of the special figure process flag is updated to “2” which is a value corresponding to the special symbol change processing (111SGS179), and then the change pattern setting processing ends.

  Each time the command control process of S27 shown in FIG. 4 is executed after the variation pattern setting process is completed based on the command transmission setting in 111SGS177, the game status designation command is sent from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12. , The first variation start command or the second variation start command, the variation pattern designation command, the variation display result designation command, the first pending storage number notification command, or the second pending storage number notification command are sequentially transmitted. Note that the order in which these production control commands are transmitted can be arbitrarily changed. For example, after transmitting a fluctuation display result designation command first, a first fluctuation start command or a second fluctuation start command, a fluctuation pattern designation command The game state designation command, the first reserved storage number notification command, or the second reserved storage number notification command may be transmitted in this order.

  FIG. 9-9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a process executed in S113 of FIG. 5 as a special symbol stop process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 103 sets the end flag referred to in the special symbol change process of S112 to end the change of the special symbol, and stops at the first special symbol display 4A and the second special symbol display 4B. Control for deriving and displaying the symbol is performed (111SGS180). If the variable special figure designation buffer value is "1" indicating the first special figure, the variation of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 4A is terminated, and the variation special figure designation buffer value is changed. If the value is "2" indicating the second special symbol, the change of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 4B is ended. Further, control for transmitting a symbol confirmation command to the effect control board 12 is performed (111SGS181). Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit flag is set (111SGS182).

  If the big hit flag has not been set, it is determined whether or not the small hit flag has been set (111SGS183). If the small hit flag has been set, the hit start 5 is designated on the effect control board 12. The setting for transmitting the command (small hit) is made (111SGS190a). Then, the small hit display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the small hit display time (for example, a time for notifying the occurrence of the small hit or the probable accuracy in the effect display device 5) (111SGS190b). In addition, the number of open times (for example, two times) is set in the special winning opening number counter (111SGS190c). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to "8", which is the value corresponding to the small hit pre-opening process (S118) (111SGS190d), and the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the jackpot flag is set in 111SGS182, the CPU 103 clears the probable change flag and the time saving flag if the probable change flag and the time saving flag are set (111SGS184), and stores it in the effect control board 12. The setting for transmitting the jackpot start 1 designation command (probable variation A), the jackpot start 2 designation command (probability variation B), and the jackpot start 3 designation command (non-probable variation) is performed according to the type of the jackpot (111SGS185).

  Further, the CPU 103 performs setting for transmitting the game state designation command indicating the normal state to the effect control board 12 (111SGS186).

  Then, a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, a time for notifying the occurrence of the big hit in the effect display device 5) is set in the big hit display time timer (111SGS187). Further, the number of times of opening (for example, 16 times in the case of the non-probable variable jackpot or the probable variable jackpot A and 5 times in the case of the probable variable jackpot B) is set in the special winning opening counter (111SGS188). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “4” which is the value corresponding to the pre-big hit opening process (S114) (111SGS189).

  On the other hand, in 111SGS190, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the value of the time reduction counter is “0”. When the value of the time reduction counter is “0”, the process proceeds to 111SGS196.

  On the other hand, if the value of the time-saving counter is not "0", that is, if the high-base state in which the number of time savings remains, the value of the time-saving counter is decremented by 1 (111SGS191). Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the time reduction counter after subtraction is “0” (111SGS193). If not, the process proceeds to 111SGS196, and if the value of the time reduction counter is “0”, Is a game state designation command corresponding to a game state (specifically, a low-probability and low base) corresponding to a set state of the probable change flag or the time reduction flag after the time reduction flag is cleared (111SGS194) to end the time reduction control. After performing the transmission setting (111SGS195), the process proceeds to 111SGS196.

  In 111SGS196, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to “0” corresponding to the special symbol normal process, and then the special symbol stop process ends.

  FIG. 9-10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the processing executed in S117 of FIG. 5 as the big hit end processing.

  In the big hit end processing, the CPU 103 determines whether the big hit end display timer is operating, that is, whether the timer is counting (111SGS201). When the big hit end display timer is not operating, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time for performing the big hit end display (big hit end display time) in the effect display device 5 is set in the big hit end display timer (111SGS202). , And the process ends.

  On the other hand, when the big hit end display timer is operating, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (111SGS203). Then, the CPU 103 checks whether or not the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (111SGS204). If not, the process ends.

  If the big hit end display time has elapsed, the CPU 103 determines whether the stored big hit type is a non-probable variable big hit (111SGS205). If the big hit type is the non-probable variable big hit, the time saving flag is set (111SGS211), the time saving counter is set to "100" (111SGS212), and the process proceeds to 111SGS213. If the big hit type is not the non-probable big hit, it is determined whether the stored big hit type is the probable big hit C (111SGS206).

  If the jackpot type is not the probability variable jackpot C, it is determined that the stored jackpot type is the probability variable jackpot A or the probability variable jackpot B, the probability variable flag is set (111SGS207), the time reduction flag is set (111SGS208), and the time reduction number counter is set. Is set to “0” (111SGS209), and the process proceeds to 111SGS213. On the other hand, when the big hit type is the certainty big hit C, after setting the certainty change flag (111SGS210), the process proceeds to 111SGS213.

  In 111SGS213, the big hit flag is cleared, and the transmission setting of the big hit end designation command according to the big hit type is performed (111SGS214). Then, after setting the transmission of a game state designation command for notifying the effect control board 12 of the game state based on the set probability change flag and the time reduction flag (111SGS215), the value of the special figure process flag is set to the special symbol normal processing. Is updated to “0” (111SGS216).

  FIG. 9-11 is a flowchart showing the variable display start setting process (S171) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the variable display start setting process, first, effect CPU 120 determines whether or not the first variable start command reception flag is set (111SGS371). When the first variation start command reception flag is set, the first variation start-time reception command buffer (not shown) is associated with the buffer numbers “1-0” to “1-4” of the first special figure hold storage. The stored various command data and various flags are shifted upward by one buffer number (111SGS372). Note that the contents of the buffer number "1-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift.

  More specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “1-1” of the first special figure pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “1-0”. Then, the command data and the various flags stored in association with the buffer number “1-2” of the first special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “1-1”. The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “1-3” of the special map pending storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “1-2”, and the first special map is stored. Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “1-4” of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “1-3”.

  If the first change start command reception flag is not set in 111SGS371, it is determined whether the second change start command reception flag is set (111SGS373). If the second change start command reception flag is not set, the process is terminated. If the second change start command reception flag is set, the second special figure in the start winning reception command buffer (not shown) is set. The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer numbers “2-0” to “2-4” of the hold storage are shifted upward by one buffer number (111SGS374). Note that the contents of the buffer number "2-0" are erased because they cannot be shifted because there is no destination to shift.

  More specifically, various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “2-1” of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “2-0”. Then, various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “2-2” of the second special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “2-1”. The various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “2-3” of the 2nd special figure hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “2-2”. Various command data and various flags stored in association with the buffer number “2-4” of the hold storage are shifted so as to be stored in association with the buffer number “2-3”.

  After execution of 111SGS372 or 111SGS374, the effect control CPU 120 reads a variation pattern specification command from the variation pattern specification command storage area (111SGS375).

  Next, the display result (stop symbol) of the effect symbol is determined according to the data stored in the display result specifying command storage area (that is, the received display result specifying command) (111SGS376). In this case, the effect control CPU 120 determines the stop symbol of the effect symbol according to the display result designated by the display result designation command, and stores the data indicating the determined stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area. I do.

  In this embodiment, when the received variable display result designation command is the second variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation big hit A, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the three symbols are “7” as stop symbols, for example. ", And determine the combination of the effect symbols (big hit symbols). When the received variable display result designation command is the third variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability variation big hit B, as the stop symbol, a plurality of combinations of odd-number symbols other than “7” (for example, “111”, (Combination of effect symbols such as "333", "555", "999"). In the case where the received variable display result designation command is the fourth variable display result designation command corresponding to the non-probable variable jackpot, the effect control CPU 120 determines, for example, the effect symbol in which three symbols are arranged as even symbols as stop symbols. Determine the combination (big hit symbol). In the case where the received variable display result designation command is the fifth variable display result designation command corresponding to the probability change jackpot C, the effect control CPU 120 determines, for example, a combination of effect symbols in which odd symbols are not aligned as stop symbols ( For example, a combination of effect symbols such as “135” is determined. If the received variation display result designation command is the first variation display result designation command corresponding to a loss, a combination of production symbols (losing symbol) in which three symbols are irregular as stop symbols is determined.

  In determining these stop symbols, the effect control CPU 120 extracts, for example, a random number for determining a stop symbol, and uses a stop symbol determination table in which data indicating a combination of the effect symbols and numerical values are associated with each other. Then, the stop symbol of the effect symbol may be determined. That is, the stop symbol may be determined by selecting data indicating a combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical values corresponding to the extracted random numbers.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 performs a notice effect determination process shown in FIG. 9-12 to determine whether or not to execute a notice effect in the variable display (111SGS377). In the present embodiment, it is suggested that a step-up effect (also referred to as an SU effect) in which a notice image changes stepwise in a notice effect determination process, as described later, may result in a big hit. It is possible to determine a step-up notice (also referred to as an SU notice) and a battle notice suggesting a possibility of a big hit by performing a battle production in which a character and an enemy character appear as a super reach production and confront each other. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and as these advance notices, notice notices of other aspects, for example, a notice of a character in which a character appears or a group notice in which a group of predetermined characters crosses a display area. May be determined, and in the case of determining a notice effect of these different modes, the timing of starting the notice effect Differs depending on the mode of advance notification effect, the announcement attraction start wait timer to be described later, it may be set to different time periods in accordance with aspects of the announcement attraction.

  In the announcement effect determination process of the present embodiment, effect control CPU 120 first specifies a variable display result and a change pattern (111SGS291). The fluctuation display result stores a fluctuation display result designation command for specifying a fluctuation display result (outlier, probability variation big hit A, probability variation big hit B, probability variation big hit C, non-probability variation big hit) transmitted from the main board 11 at the start of the variation. Can be specified by the variable display result designation command stored in the variable display result designation command storage area. Further, as described above, the variation pattern can be specified by the variation pattern designation command stored in the variation pattern designation command storage area. Note that, in the present embodiment, the target of the announcement effect is a jackpot (probably variable jackpot A, probable variable jackpot B, non-probable variable jackpot), super reach, and normal reach. A, probable big hit B, non-probable big hit) is specified by the fluctuation display result specification command, and whether the fluctuation pattern is super reach or normal reach is specified by the fluctuation pattern specification command. Just do it.

  Then, the random number for the announcement effect determination is extracted, and the presence / absence of the announcement effect is determined using the announcement effect type determination table shown in FIG. (111SGS292).

  In the present embodiment, the random number for announcement effect determination is a random number in the range of 1 to 100, and any value in the range of 1 to 100 is extracted. That is, the number of judgment values of the random number for the announcement effect determination is set to 100 in the range of 1 to 100, but the present invention is not limited to this. You only have to decide. In addition, a random number counter for announcement effect determination for generating these random numbers for announcement effect determination is set in the RAM 122, and the random number counter for announcement effect determination is updated every time a timer is interrupted in a random number update process.

  As shown in FIG. 9A, the announcement effect type determination table according to the present embodiment includes an announcement effect type determination table corresponding to the announcement effect. In this embodiment, SU notice and battle notice can be executed as notice effects.

  In the notice effect type determination table, as shown in FIG. 9-13 (A), the variable display result is a probable big hit for each of “SU notice”, “battle notice”, and “no notice effect”. In this case, when the fluctuation display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, and when the fluctuation pattern is out of reach (super-reach, normal reach), the respective different determination values are the number of determination values shown in FIG. And so on.

  Specifically, in the case where the fluctuation display result is a probability change big hit, 25 judgment values are assigned to “SU notice”, and 65 judgment values are assigned to “battle notice”, Ten judgment values are assigned to “No notice effect”. Also, in the case where the fluctuation display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, 40 judgment values are assigned to “SU notice”, 40 judgment values are assigned to “battle notice”, Twenty determination values are assigned to “none”. When the fluctuation pattern is out of reach, 30 judgment values are assigned to “SU notice”, 10 judgment values are assigned to “battle notice”, and “no notice effect” Thus, 60 judgment values are assigned.

  By assigning the determination values in this way, when a big hit occurs in the variable display, the notice effect is more easily executed than when the super reach is lost or the normal reach is lost.

  Since the notice effect type determination table is set as shown in FIG. 9-13 (A), the probability of a “big battle” in the variable display is greater in the variable display than in the non-probable variable big hit. The "notification" is set so as to be easily determined, and when the reach is out of reach, the "SU notification" is set to be determined more easily than the "battle notification".

  By setting in this way, the big hit expectation is higher when the notice effect is executed than when the notice effect is not executed. Further, in the announcement effect, the degree of expectation of the probability change jackpot is higher when the battle announcement is executed than when the SU announcement is executed.

  The big hit expectation degree (reliability) of each announcement production is the probability of each announcement production being executed and a “big hit”, the probability of each announcement production being executed and a “big hit” and each announcement production being executed This is a numerical value obtained by dividing by the sum of the probabilities of being “out”.

  Returning to FIG. 9-12, in 111SGS293, it is determined whether or not execution of the notice effect has been determined (111SGS293). If the notice effect has not been executed, the process ends, and the execution of the notice effect has been determined. In this case, it is determined whether the execution of the SU notice is determined (111SGS294). If the execution of the SU notice has not been determined, that is, if the execution of the battle notice has been decided, the process proceeds to 111SGS296, and if the execution of the SU notice has been decided, the number of SU notices is determined (111SGS295).

  In the table for determining the number of SUs in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9-13 (B), the number of SUs “1”, “2”, “3”, “4” In the case where the fluctuation display result is a probability change big hit, the case where the fluctuation display result is a non-probability change big hit, and the case where the fluctuation pattern is out of reach (super reach, normal reach), different judgment values are respectively shown in FIG. It is assigned so that the number of judgment values shown in B) is obtained.

  Specifically, in the case where the fluctuation display result is a probable big hit, five judgment values are assigned to “one time”, and fifteen judgment values are assigned to “two times”. Seventy determination values are assigned to “three times”, and ten determination values are assigned to “four times”. Also, in the case where the fluctuation display result is a non-probable variable jackpot, ten judgment values are assigned to “one time”, thirty judgment values are assigned to “two times”, , 55 judgment values are assigned, and “4 times” are assigned 5 judgment values. Also, in the case where the fluctuation display result is out of reach, 60 judgment values are assigned to “1 time”, 30 judgment values are assigned to “2 times”, and “3 times” Are assigned to 10 determination values, and no determination value is assigned to “4 times”.

  By assigning the determination values in this manner, the number of SUs is larger in the case of a big hit in the variable display than in the case of a super-reach loss or a normal reach loss. In addition, in the case of a probability change big hit in the fluctuation display, it is set so that “3 times” or “four times” is easily determined as the number of SUs as compared with a case of a non-probability change big hit. In the case where the reach is out of reach, the setting is made so that “once” or “twice” is easily determined.

  With this setting, the larger the number of SUs, the higher the expectation of big hits. Further, in the announcement effect, the degree of expectation of the probability change jackpot is higher when the battle announcement is executed than when the SU announcement is executed.

  Returning to FIG. 9-12, in 111 SGS 296, the type of the determined announcement effect (including the number of SUs when the determined announcement effect is the SU announcement) is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122. Then, the process proceeds to 111SGS297 to set a notice effect execution determination flag, and ends the process.

  Returning to FIG. 9-11, after the notice effect determination processing of 111SGS377, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the notice effect execution determination flag is set in 111SGS378, that is, the “SU notice” in the notice effect determination processing of 111SGS377. Or, it is determined whether or not any of the announcement effects of “battle announcement” has been determined.

  If the notice effect execution determination flag is set, the process proceeds to 111SGS379, and a period corresponding to the determined type of the notice effect is set in the notice effect start waiting timer as a period until the notice effect starts (111SGS379). The notice effect execution determination flag is cleared (111SGS380). On the other hand, when the notice effect execution determination flag is not set, the process proceeds to 111SGS384.

  In the present embodiment, before the timing at which the above-described battle or SU production starts, the characters, songs, and production patterns appearing in the battle or SU production are selected as the period until the start of the notice production. A possible selection effect is performed, and a battle announcement (notification effect) including the selection effect and the battle effect is provided, and an SU announcement (notification effect) including the selection effect and the SU effect is provided. And, since the timing to start the selected production is the start timing of the preview production, a period shorter than the period until the start of the battle production or the SU production is set, and the start timing of these preliminary productions is The notice effect is specified and started based on the process table of the notice effect performed from the start, but the present invention is not limited to this, and these select effects are not performed in the notice effect. In such a case, the start timing of the preview effect is the start timing of the preview effect, so that the period up to the start timing of the preview effect may be set in the preview effect start wait timer.

(SU notice and battle notice)
As described above, in the present embodiment, before the timing at which the battle effect or the SU effect is started, the player displays the characters, songs, and effect patterns (items, options) appearing in the battle effect or the SU effect. A selectable selection effect is executed. The selection effect includes a first selection effect (see FIG. 9-20 (A)) in which a first selection screen on which a character appearing in the battle effect or the SU effect can be selected is displayed, and a BGM (music piece) flowing in the battle effect. ) Can be selected (see FIGS. 9-20 (B)-(D)), and a second selection screen for battle announcements and a second selection screen (SU) 9-20 (E)-(G)) is displayed, and a second selection effect for SU notice is displayed.

  The effect control CPU 120 executes a battle effect or an SU effect according to the character selected on the first selection screen and the music or the effect pattern selected on the second selection screen. In other words, the battle effect and the SU effect are effects in which the character (first item) received in the first selected effect and the effect pattern and music (second item) received in the second selected effect are reflected. The effect control CPU 120 selects a process table or a preview effect process table for executing an effect corresponding to the first item received in the first selection effect or the second item received in the second selection effect, and The effect is executed based on the selected process table and the notice effect process table.

(First selection effect)
As shown in FIG. 9A, in the first selection effect, a first item 111SG001A including images corresponding to a plurality of (for example, three types) of characters A to C that can appear in a battle effect or an SU effect. To 111SG001C, an image 111SG002 imitating the push button 31B as an operation promotion image for prompting the selection operation of the characters A to C, an indicator image 111SG003 indicating the operation validity period, and a character "press a button to select a character!" The image 111SG004 is displayed. The player can sequentially move the cursor image 111SG005 indicating the selected first item by pressing the push button 31B during the operation valid period indicated by the indicator image 111SG003.

  Then, at the time when the operation valid period ends, the characters A to C corresponding to the first items 111SG001A to 111SG001C in the selected state where the cursor image 111SG005 is positioned and highlighted (selected and displayed) (for example, FIG. 9-20 (A In), the character A) corresponding to the first item 111SG001A in which the cursor image 111SG005 is located is selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since characters A to C that can appear in the battle effect and the SU effect are common, the same first selection screen is displayed even when performing either the battle effect or the SU effect. However, if the characters that can appear in battle and SU productions are unique, the first selection screen for battle announcement and the first selection screen for SU announcement can be displayed separately. It may be.

(2nd selection effect for battle notice)
As shown in FIGS. 9-20 (B)-(D), in the battle selection second selection effect, the image 111SG001 of the character selected on the first selection screen and the BGM (music) output in the battle effect ), A plurality of second items 111SG020, 111SG021A to 111SG021C, an image 111SG002 imitating a push button 31B as an operation prompting image for prompting an operation of selecting the second item, an indicator image 111SG003 indicating an operation validity period, A character image 111SG006, "Press a button to select BGM in battle!" Is displayed. The player can sequentially move the cursor image 111SG005 indicating the selected second item by pressing the push button 31B during the operation valid period indicated by the indicator image 111SG003.

  Then, at the time when the operation validity period ends, the song corresponding to the second item 111SG020, 111SG021A to 111SG021C in the selected state where the cursor image 111SG005 is positioned and highlighted (for example, FIGS. 9-20 (B) to (D)) , “Medley” corresponding to the second item 111SG020 where the cursor image 111SG005 is located) is selected.

  When “Medley” corresponding to the second item 111SG020 is selected, rust portions of a plurality of songs are sequentially reproduced in the battle effect, and when the second items 111SG021A to 111SG021C are selected, each second item in the battle effect is selected. Is played back. It should be noted that, among the plurality of music pieces played in the medley, different music pieces flow according to the characters A to C selected in the first selection effect.

(Second selection for SU notice)
As shown in FIGS. 9-20 (E) to (G), in the second selection effect for SU notice, a plurality of images 111SG001 of the character selected on the first selection screen and a plurality of effect patterns of the SU effect can be selected. The second item 111SG022X, 111SG022Y, 111SG022Z, the image 111SG002 imitating the push button 31B as the operation promotion image for prompting the selection operation of the second item, the indicator image 111SG003 indicating the operation valid period, Is selected! "Is displayed. The player can sequentially move the cursor image 111SG005 indicating the selected second item by pressing the push button 31B during the operation valid period indicated by the indicator image 111SG003.

  Then, at the point in time when the operation effective period ends, the effect pattern corresponding to the second item 111SG022X, 111SG022Y, 111SG022Z in the selected state in which the cursor image 111SG005 is positioned and highlighted (for example, in the case of FIG. "Pattern X" corresponding to two items 111SG022X, "Pattern Y" corresponding to second item 111SG022Y in FIG. 9-20 (F), and "Pattern X" corresponding to second item 111SG022Z in FIG. 9-20 (E). Z ") is selected.

  “Pattern X” corresponding to the second item 111SG022X is selected, “pattern Y” corresponding to the second item 111SG022Y is selected, and “pattern Z” corresponding to the second item 111SG022Z is selected. In this case, the characters appearing in steps 1 to 3 are different, and in step 4, the characters A to C selected in the first selection effect appear.

  Further, when the character A is selected in the first selection effect when the second selection screen is displayed, the cursor image 111SG005 is in an initial selection state positioned at “pattern X”, and the character is selected in the first selection effect. When B is selected, the cursor image 111SG005 is in the initial selection state in which it is located at "Pattern Y", and when the character C is selected in the first selection effect, the cursor image 111SG005 is located at "Pattern Z". The state is initially selected.

  As described above, in the battle effect and the SU effect, depending on the first item received in the first selection effect and the second item received in the second selection effect, the type of the character appearing, the music to be reproduced, and the effect pattern are determined. Therefore, at a predetermined timing during the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 selects a process table or a notice effect process table for a battle effect or an SU effect according to the selection result in the first selection effect or the second selection effect. set.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (A), when performing a battle notice (battle effect), it is executed as a super-reach effect after reaching, according to the selection result in the first selection effect or the second selection effect. Since the types of battle effects are different, the effect control CPU 120 uses the first half process table (battle) corresponding to the period until the reach is established at the start timing of the variable display as the process table used for the variable display control of the effect symbols. At the timing when the reach is established, the latter half process table (selectable battle effect) corresponding to the period until the end of the variable display (battle effect period) is selected and set. That is, the second half process table is a process table for executing a battle effect having contents according to the selection result in the first selection effect and the second selection effect.

  In addition, since the first selection effect and the second selection effect only display the first selection screen and the second selection screen regardless of the selection result, the first selection effect and the second selection effect at the start timing of the variable display. A notice effect process table corresponding to a period in which the selected effect can be executed is set.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-14 (B), when executing the SU notice (SU effect), the SU effect to be executed before the reach is performed according to the selection result in the first selection effect or the second selection effect. Since the types are different, at the start timing of the variable display, the effect control CPU 120 sets the process table for executing the variable display of the effect symbols in a period from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable display after reaching the reach. Set the corresponding process table.

  On the other hand, since the first selection effect and the second selection effect only display the first selection screen and the second selection screen irrespective of the selection result, the effect control CPU 120 sets the first selection effect and the second selection effect at the start timing of the variable display. The first half SU effect presentation process table corresponding to the period in which the first selection effect and the second selection effect can be executed is set. At a predetermined timing after the second selection effect is completed, the first selection effect and the second selection effect are set. 2. Select and set the second half SU notice effect process table (selection-response SU effect) for executing the SU effect of the content corresponding to the selection result in the above.

  Returning to FIG. 9-11, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the type of the announcement effect determined to be executed is a battle announcement (111SGS381), and proceeds to 111SGS384 if it is determined that it is not a battle announcement. If it is determined to be a battle announcement, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern of the variable display is a super-reach variation pattern based on the variation pattern designation command (111SGS382). The first half process table for production is selected (111SGS383), and the process proceeds to 111SGS385. If the variation pattern for which the execution of the battle notice is determined is the normal reach variation pattern, the battle effect cannot be executed. That is, since it is not necessary to select the second half SU notice effect process table (selection-response SU effect), the 111SGS381 is used. Even if it is determined that a battle is to be announced, if the super reach variation pattern is not found in 111SGS382, a process table corresponding to the variation pattern is set.

  On the other hand, when the notice effect execution determination flag is not set in 111SGS378, when it is determined that the notice is not a battle notice in 111SGS381, or when the change pattern of the variable display is not a super reach change pattern in 111SGS382, a change pattern designation command is issued. (111SGS384). Then, the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (111SGS385).

  The process table includes display control execution data for controlling the display of the effect display device 5, lamp control execution data for controlling the lighting of each LED, and sound for controlling the sound output from the speakers 8L and 8R. Sound control execution data, operation section control execution data for controlling the operation of the push button 31B and the stick controller 31A, and the like are arranged in chronological order in association with each process data n (1 to N). I have.

  Next, the effect control CPU 120 renders an effect device (effect display as an effect component) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The control of the device 5, various lamps as effect parts, the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (111SGS386). For example, a command is output to the display control unit 123 in order to display an image according to the fluctuation pattern on the effect display device 5. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp control board 14 in order to control the turning on / off of various lamps. In addition, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound control board 13 to output sounds from the speakers 8L and 8R.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 performs control so that the effect symbols are displayed in a fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation pattern designation command on a one-to-one basis. A variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the designated command.

  Then, a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern designation command is set in the variable display time timer (111SGS387). Further, a predetermined time is set in the variable display control timer (111SGS388). The predetermined time is, for example, 30 ms, and the effect control CPU 120 writes the image data indicating the display state of the left-middle-right effect symbol in the VRAM every time the predetermined time elapses, and the display control unit 123 writes the image data in the VRAM. A signal corresponding to the image data is output to the effect display device 5, and the effect display device 5 displays an image corresponding to the signal, thereby realizing the variation of the effect symbol. Next, the value of the effect control process flag is set to a value corresponding to the effect processing during variable display (S172) (111SGS389).

  FIG. 9-15 is a flowchart showing the variable display effect processing (S172) in the effect control process processing. In the variable display effect processing, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the respective values of the process timer, the variable display time timer, and the variable display control timer by 1 (111SGS301, 111SGS302, 111SGS303). In addition, the effect control CPU 120 sets a notice effect start waiting timer (determined to perform the notice effect) or sets a notice effect execution flag (during the execution of the notice effect). Is determined (111SGS304), and if either is set, the announcement effect process shown in FIG. 9-16 is executed (111SGS305). When neither the announcement effect start waiting timer nor the announcement effect execution flag is set, the process proceeds to 111SGS306 without executing the announcement effect process of 111SGS305.

  In 111SGS306, effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the process timer has expired. If the process timer has expired, the process data is switched (111SGS307). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next set process timer value in the process table to the process timer (111SGS308). Further, the control state of the effect device (effect component) is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation unit control data, and the like which are set next (111SGS309a). On the other hand, when the process timer has not expired, the production device (for the production of the production) (111SGS309b).

  Next, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the control based on the first half process table (for the battle effect) set when the execution of the battle effect is determined based on the process timer set value (111SGS310). If it is not the end timing of the control based on the process table (for battle effect), the process proceeds to 111SGS314. If it is the end timing of the control based on the first half process table (for battle effect), the second half process table (selection corresponding battle effect) corresponding to the selection result in the battle notice is set (111SGS311), and the process data 1 of the selected process table is set. (111SGS312). Next, the effect control CPU 120 renders an effect device (effect display as an effect component) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The control of the device 5, various lamps as effect parts, the speakers 8L and 8R as effect parts, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (111SGS313).

  After executing the processing of 111SGS313, or when it is not the end timing of the control based on the first half process table (for battle effect) in 111SGS310, it is confirmed whether or not the variable display control timer is timer out (111SGS314). When the variable display control timer has expired, the effect control CPU 120 displays the next display screen of the left-middle-right effect symbol (the screen to be displayed after 30 ms has elapsed since the previous effect symbol display switching time). Image data is created and written to a predetermined area of the VRAM (111SGS315). In this way, the effect display device 5 realizes effect symbol variation control. The display control unit 123 transmits a signal based on data obtained by superimposing image data of a predetermined area such as a set background image and image data based on display control execution data set in the process table to the effect display device 5. Output. In this way, the effect display device 5 displays the background image, the character image, and the effect symbol in the variation of the effect symbol. Further, a predetermined value is reset in the variable display control timer (111SGS316).

  If the variable display control timer has not expired, after executing 111SGS316, the effect control CPU 120 checks whether or not the variable display time timer has expired (111SGS317). If the variable display time timer has expired, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the waiting process per special figure (S176) (111SGS319). Even if the variable display time timer has not expired, if the confirmation command reception flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received is set, the value of the effect control process flag is set according to the special figure waiting process (S176). The updated value is updated (111SGS319). Even if the variable display time timer is not out of timer, the control shifts to control to stop the fluctuation when the symbol confirmation designation command is received. For example, a fluctuation pattern specification command indicating a long fluctuation time due to noise between boards, etc. Is received, the fluctuation of the effect symbol can be ended when the normal fluctuation time has elapsed (at the end of the fluctuation of the special symbol).

  In the process table used for the variable display control of the effect symbol, the process data during the variable display of the effect symbol is set. That is, the sum of the process timer set values of the process data 1 to n in the process table corresponds to the fluctuation time of the effect symbol. Therefore, when the process timer of the last process data n in the process of 111SGS306 expires, there is no process data to be switched (display control execution data, lamp control execution data, etc.), and the effect control of the effect symbol based on the process table ends. (Excluding the first half process table and the second half process table for battle notice).

  FIG. 9-16 is a flowchart illustrating an example of the notice effect processing. In the notice effect process, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the notice effect execution flag is set, that is, whether or not the notice effect is started (111SGS421).

  When the notice effect execution flag is not set, effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the notice effect start waiting timer by one (111SGS422). The announcement effect start waiting timer is set in the selection of the process table when it is determined that the announcement effect is to be performed in the effect symbol variation start processing. Then, it is determined whether or not the advance notice effect start waiting timer has expired (111SGS423). If the advance notice effect start wait timer has not expired, the process is terminated. When the notice effect start waiting timer is out of the timer, that is, when it is the start time of the notice effect, a notice effect execution flag indicating that the notice effect is being executed is set (111SGS424). In addition, a value corresponding to the notice effect period corresponding to the notice effect is set in the notice effect period timer (111SGS425).

  Next, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not the notice effect to be executed is a battle notice (111SGS426). If the notice effect is a battle notice, it refers to the battle notice effect process table (see FIG. 9-14 (A)). Set (111SGS427) and proceed to 111SGS429. If it is not a battle announcement, that is, if it is an SU announcement, the first half SU announcement effect process table (see FIG. 9-14 (B)) is set (111SGS428), and the routine proceeds to 111SGS429.

  After reading and setting the notice effect process table corresponding to the notice effect type, the notice effect process timer in the process data 1 of the selected process table is started (111SGS429). In the present embodiment, an announcement effect process table corresponding to all combinations of each announcement effect (battle announcement, SU announcement) is stored in the ROM 121 in advance.

  The effect control CPU 120 effects the effect in accordance with the contents of the first process data 1 in the set announcement effect process table (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1, etc.). The control of the devices (the effect display device 5 as the effect component, the game effect lamp 9 as the effect component, the speakers 8L and 8R as the effect component, the stick controller 31A, and the push button 31B) is started (111SGS430).

  Also, when the flag effect execution flag is set in 111SGS421, the effect control CPU 120 decrements the value of the notification effect process timer for changing the process of the notification effect (111SGS431). Then, the value of the notice effect period timer for measuring the end of the notice effect period is decremented by 1 (111SGS432), and it is determined whether or not the notice effect period timer has timed out (the value becomes 0) (111SGS433). . When the notice effect period timer has expired (the value becomes 0), the notice effect execution flag is cleared (111SGS451), and the items selected and stored in the selected effect described later are cleared (111SGS452). Then, the announcement effect process ends.

  If the notice effect period timer has not expired, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display start timing of the first selection screen (ta1 in FIG. 9-14 (A) and tb1 in (B) based on the process timer set value). Is determined (111SGS434), and when the display start timing of the first selection screen is reached, the first item determined by lottery among the first items 111SG001A, 111SG001B, and 111SG001C is determined. The display of the first selection screen in the initial selection state where the cursor image 111SG005 is positioned in reverse video is started (111SGS435), and the process proceeds to 111SGS447.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, an example is described in which the first item to be initially selected is determined by lottery when the display of the first selection screen is started. However, the present invention is not limited to this. After the specific first item is set to the initial selection state when the gaming machine is initialized, the previously selected first item is set to the selected state, the specific first item is always set to the selected state, A different first item may be selected.

  Next, if it is not the display start timing of the first selection screen, the effect control CPU 120 determines the display end timing of the first selection screen (ta2 in FIG. 9-14 (A), (B) in FIG. (see timing of tb2) or not (111SGS436), and when it is the display end timing of the first selection screen, the first item 111SG001A, which is highlighted at that time and in which the cursor image 111SG005 is located, is displayed. 111SG001B and 111SG001C are stored (111SGS437), and the process proceeds to 111SGS447.

  Next, effect control CPU 120 determines whether or not it is the display start timing of the second selection screen (see the timing of ta3 in FIG. 9-14 (A) and the timing of tb3 in (B)) based on the process timer set value. It is determined (111SGS438), and when it is the display start timing of the second selection screen, the process proceeds to 111SGS460 of FIG. 9-17, and it is determined whether or not the notice effect is the SU notice (111SGS460). When the notice effect is SU notice, it is determined whether or not the first item selected in the first selection effect is the first item 111SG001A corresponding to the character A (111SGS461), and if the first item is the first item 111SG001A. It is determined that the second item to be initially selected is the second item 111SG022X corresponding to the pattern X having higher relevance to the character A than the characters B and C (111SGS462), and the process proceeds to 111SGS466.

  If the first item selected in the first selection effect is not the first item 111SG001A corresponding to the character A, is the first item selected in the first selection effect a first item 111SG001B corresponding to the character B? It is determined whether or not the first item is 111SG001B. If it is the first item 111SG001B, the second item to be initially selected is the second item corresponding to the pattern Y having a higher relevance to the characters B than the characters A and C. It is determined to be the item 111SG022Y (111SGS464), and the process proceeds to 111SGS466.

  If the first item selected in the first selection effect is not the first item 111SG001B corresponding to the character B, the first item selected in the first selection effect is the character C, and the first item is set to the initial selection state. It is determined that the two items are the second items 111SG022Z corresponding to the pattern Z having higher relevance to the characters C than the characters A and B (111SGS465), and the process proceeds to 111SGS466.

  After executing any of the processes of 111SGS462, 111SGS464, and 111SGS465, the display of the second selection screen for SU notice in a mode in which the second item corresponding to the determined character is initially selected is started (111SGS466). Proceed to 111SGS447.

  As described above, when starting the display of the second selection screen for the SU notice, the effect control CPU 120 sets the effect patterns X, Y, and the effect that are highly relevant to the character of the first item selected in the first selected effect. The second item corresponding to Z is displayed in an initial selection state.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 9-19 (B), when the selection of the first item corresponding to the character A is received in the first selection effect, the second item corresponding to the pattern X in the second selection effect When 111SG022X is set to the initial selection state and the selection of the first item corresponding to the character B is received in the first selection effect, the second item 111SG022Y corresponding to the pattern Y is set to the initial selection state in the second selection effect. When the selection of the first item corresponding to the character C is received in the one selection effect, the second item 111SG022Z corresponding to the pattern Z is set to the initial selection state in the second selection effect.

  On the other hand, if it is determined in 111SGS460 that it is not the SU notice, that is, if it is the battle notice, the battle notice for the mode in which the characters A to C corresponding to the first items selected in the first selection effect are displayed. The display of the second selection screen is started (111SGS467), and the process proceeds to 111SGS447.

  Returning to FIG. 9-16, if it is not the display start timing of the second selection screen, the effect control CPU 120 sets the display end timing of the second selection screen based on the process timer set value (ta4 in FIG. 9-14 (A)). , (B) timing (see timing tb4) (111SGS439), and if it is the display end timing of the second selection screen, the process proceeds to 111SGS470 of FIG. Is determined (111SGS470). If the announcement effect is not a battle announcement, that is, if it is an SU announcement, the effect patterns X, Y, and Z corresponding to the second items 111SG022X, 111SG022Y, and 111SG022Z at which point the cursor image 111SG005 is positioned and highlighted. Is stored (111SGS478), and the process proceeds to 111SGS447.

  When the notice effect is a battle notice, it is determined whether or not the second item selected in the second selection effect is the second item 111SG020 corresponding to “medley” (111SGS471). If it is the second item 111SG020, it is determined whether the first item selected in the first selection effect is the first item 111SG001A corresponding to the character A (111SGS472), and if it is the first item 111SG001A. Then, “Medley 1” is stored as the music (111SGS473), and the process proceeds to 111SGS447.

  If the first item selected in the first selection effect is not the first item 111SG001A corresponding to the character A, it is determined whether or not it is the first item 111SG001B corresponding to the character B (111SGS474), and the first item 111SG001B is determined. In the case of, “Medley 2” is stored as the music (111SGS475), and the process proceeds to 111SGS447. If the first item selected in the first selection effect is not the first item 111SG001B corresponding to the character B, it is determined to be the first item 111SG001C corresponding to the character C, and if the first item 111SG001C is the music, “Medley 3” is stored (111SGS476), and the process proceeds to 111SGS447.

  If the second item 111SG020 is not selected in the 111SGS471, that is, if any of the second items 111SG021A to 111SG021C is selected, the music corresponding to each of the second items 111SG021A to 111SG021C is stored (111SGS477). Proceed to 111SGS447.

  As described above, when “Medley” of the second item 111SG020 is selected, different music pieces are selected according to the type of the first item (character) selected in the first selection effect.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 9A, when the selection of the first item corresponding to the character A is received in the first selection effect, the second item 111SG020 corresponding to the medley in the second selection effect. Is accepted, a medley 1 in which the rust portion is repeatedly played back in the order of music 1 → 2 → 3 in the battle effect is executed, and the first item corresponding to the character B is selected in the first effect effect. In the case where the selection is accepted, when the selection of the second item 111SG020 corresponding to the medley is accepted in the second selection effect, the medley 2 in which the rust portion is repeatedly played in the order of the songs 4 → 5 → 6 is executed, and the first selection is performed. When the selection of the first item corresponding to the character C is received in the effect, the second item 111SG020 corresponding to the medley is selected in the second selected effect. When accepting the-option, the medley 3 rust of the parts are repeat playback in the order of the music 7 → 8 → 9 is executed.

  As described above, the “medley” that can be accepted in the second item 111SG020 is an item common to the medleys 1, 2, and 3 that can be executed in the battle effect, and which character is selected in the first selection effect. Is displayed in a predetermined mode (a mode in which only the character “Medley” is displayed) in the second selection effect, but when the selection of the second item 111SG020 is received, the selection is made in the first selection effect. Medleys 1, 2, 3 of different types are reproduced according to the type of the first item (character).

  When the selection of the second item 111SG021A is received, the music of the title A is reproduced, and when the selection of the second item 111SG021B is received, the music of the title B is reproduced, and the selection of the second item 111SG021C is received. In this case, the music of the title C is reproduced. These second items 111SG021A to 111SG021C are items unique to each of the music pieces A, B, and C that can be executed in the battle effect, and even if any character is selected in the first selection effect, When the selection of the two items 111SG021A to 111SG021C is accepted, the songs A, B, and C corresponding to the second items 111SG021A to 111SG021C are always present regardless of the type of the first item (character) selected in the first selection effect. It is to be played.

  Returning to FIG. 9-16, if it is not the display end timing of the second selection screen in 111SGS439, it is determined whether the first selection screen or the second selection screen is being displayed (111SGS440), and the first selection is performed. When the screen or the second selection screen is being displayed, it is determined whether or not a detection signal is input from the push sensor 35B, that is, whether or not an operation of the push button 31B is detected (111SGS441). If the detection signal is input, the cursor image 111SG005 is moved in a predetermined direction to change the item to be selected (111SGS442), and the process proceeds to 111SGS447. If the detection signal is not input, the 111SGS447 is left as it is. Proceed to.

  When the first selection screen or the second selection screen is not being displayed in 111SGS440, it is determined whether or not it is the end timing of the control based on the first half SU notice production process table which is set when execution of the SU production is determined. Is determined based on the process timer setting value (111SGS443). If the timing is not the end timing of the control based on the first half SU announcement production process table, the process proceeds to 111SGS447, and if the timing is the end timing of the control based on the first half SU announcement production process table. Sets the second half SU announcement effect process table corresponding to the selection result in the SU announcement (111SGS444), and starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the selected second half SU announcement effect process table (111SGS445). Next, the effect control CPU 120 renders an effect device (effect display as an effect component) in accordance with the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound control execution data 1, operation unit control execution data 1). The control of the device 5, the various lamps as effect components, the speakers 8L and 8R as effect components, and the operation unit (push button 31B, stick controller 31A, etc.) is executed (111SGS446), and the process ends.

  In 111SGS447, it is confirmed whether or not the notice effect process timer has expired (111SGS447). If the notice effect process timer has expired, the notice effect process data of the notice effect is switched (111SGS448). That is, the process timer is restarted by setting the next notice effect process timer set value set in the notice effect process table to the process timer (111SGS449). Further, based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, the sound control execution data, the operation section control execution data, the input control execution data, and the like included in the subsequent notification effect process data set next to the effect device (for effect The control state of the part is changed (111SGS450), and the notice effect processing ends.

  As described above, the control of the preview effect is performed based on the preview effect process table and the preview effect process timer, so that the preview effect is started at the start timing in the preview effect process table, and sequentially to the preview effect process table. By executing the described control contents of the notice effect, the notice effect is executed until the period of the notice effect ends.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9C, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the selection of the second item corresponding to the medley on the second selection screen of the battle notice, The medleys 1 to 3 of the type corresponding to the characters A to C received on the first selection screen are reproduced. Songs a to c are reproduced.

(Example of battle announcement and SU announcement)
Next, an example of the effect operation of the battle notice and the SU notice will be described with reference to FIGS. 9A to 9E are explanatory diagrams illustrating a flow of the first selection effect. 9A to 9F are explanatory diagrams illustrating a flow of a battle notice. 9A to 9D are explanatory diagrams illustrating a flow of the second selection effect in the SU notice. 9A to 9H are explanatory diagrams illustrating the flow of the SU effect.

  First, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (A), when the effect control CPU 120 determines to execute the battle notice or the SU notice at the start of the variable display of the effect symbol, as shown in FIG. 9-21 (B). Then, the display of the first selection screen is started when a predetermined period has elapsed since the start of the variable display of the effect symbols. Here, a case where it is determined that the first item 111SG001A is set to the initial selection state by lottery is shown.

  Next, if there is no operation of the push button 31B by the player within the operation valid period, the state where the cursor image 111SG005 is positioned on the first item 111SG001A as shown in FIG. If the player has operated the push button 31B, the cursor image 111SG005 is changed in accordance with the operation to the first item 111SG001A → the first item 111SG001B → the first item 111SG001C → the first item as shown in FIG. It moves in the order of item 111SG001A.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 9E, when the operation valid period has elapsed, the selection of the first item where the cursor image 111SG005 is located at that time is accepted (here, the first item 111SG001A is selected). Has been).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 9-22 (A), when the announcement effect determined to be executed is a battle announcement, the display of a second selection screen for battle announcement is started. Here, a case is shown in which an image of the character A selected in the first selection effect is displayed, and the second item 111SG020 is in the initial selection state.

  Next, if there is no operation of the push button 31B by the player within the operation valid period, the state where the cursor image 111SG005 is positioned on the second item 111SG020 as shown in FIG. If the player operates the push button 31B, the cursor image 111SG005 is changed in accordance with the operation, as shown in FIG. 9-22 (D), so that the second item 111SG021A → second item 111SG021B → second item 111SG021C → second item. It moves in the order of item 111SG021A ...

  Then, when the operation effective period has elapsed, the selection of the second item where the cursor image 111SG005 is located at that time is accepted. When the selection of the medley is accepted because the cursor image 111SG005 is positioned on the second item 111SG020 at the end of the display of the second selection screen, the variable display is developed to super reach, as shown in FIG. 9-22 (E). When the battle production (super reach production) is started, the selection of the character A is received in the first selection production and the selection of the medley is received in the second selection production, so that the medley 1 is reproduced as the BGM of the battle production. You. If the selection of the character B is received in the second selection effect while the selection of the character B is received in the first selection effect, the medley 2 is reproduced as the BGM of the battle effect, and the selection of the character C is performed in the first selection effect. When the selection of the medley is received in the second selection effect in the received state, the medley 3 is reproduced as the BGM of the battle effect.

  Also, when the selection of title B is accepted because the cursor image 111SG005 is positioned on the second item 111SG021B at the end of the display of the second selection screen, the variable display is developed into super reach, and FIG. 9-22 (F) When the battle effect (super-reach effect) is started, the music B of the title B whose selection has been accepted in the second selection effect is reproduced as the BGM of the battle effect as shown in FIG. When the selection of the title A is received at the end of the display of the second selection screen, the music A of the title A is played as the BGM of the battle effect, and the selection of the title C is received at the end of the display of the second selection screen. , The music C of the title C is reproduced as the BGM of the battle effect.

  Next, after the end of the first selection effect, as shown in FIG. 9-23 (A), when the announcement effect determined to be executed is the SU announcement, the display of the second selection screen for the SU announcement is started. . Here, a case is shown in which an image of the character A selected in the first selection effect is displayed, and the second item 111SG022X is in an initial selection state. When the selection of the character B is received in the first selection effect, an image of the character B is displayed, and the second item 111SG022Y is set to an initial selection state. When the selection of the character C is received in the first selection effect, an image of the character C is displayed, and the second item 111SG022Y is set to an initial selection state.

  Next, if there is no operation of the push button 31B by the player within the operation valid period, the state where the cursor image 111SG005 is positioned on the second item 111SG022X is maintained as shown in FIG. If there is an operation of the push button 31B by the player, the cursor image 111SG005 is changed to the second item 111SG022X → the second item 111SG022Y → the second item 111SG022Z → second as shown in FIG. It moves in order of item 111SG022X ....

  Then, when the operation effective period has elapsed, the selection of the second item where the cursor image 111SG005 is located at that time is accepted. When the selection of the pattern X is received because the cursor image 111SG005 is positioned on the second item 111SG022X at the end of the display of the second selection screen, the SU based on the pattern X shown in FIGS. The production starts. When the selection of the pattern Y is accepted because the cursor image 111SG005 is positioned on the second item 111SG022Y at the end of the display of the second selection screen, the SU based on the pattern Y shown in FIGS. The production starts. When the selection of the pattern Z is received because the cursor image 111SG005 is positioned on the second item 111SG022Z at the end of the display of the second selection screen, an SU effect (not shown) based on the pattern Z is started.

  As shown in FIGS. 9-24 (A) to (D), in the SU effect based on the pattern X, the image 111SG031A of the character X1 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 in step 1 shown in FIG. 9-24 (A). The image 111SG031B of the character X2 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 in step 2 shown in FIG. 9-24 (B), and displayed on the image display device 5 in step 3 shown in FIG. 9-24 (C). The image 111SG031C of the character X3 is displayed on the screen, and the image 111SG001A of the character A is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 in step 4 shown in FIG.

  The image of the character displayed at each step is such that a larger image of the character is displayed as the number of steps increases, such as image 111SG031A <image 111SG031B <image 111SG031C <image 111SG001A.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 9-24 (E) to (H), in the SU effect based on the pattern Y, the image of the character Y1 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 in step 1 shown in FIG. 9-24 (E). 111SG032A is displayed, the image 111SG032B of the character Y2 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 in step 2 shown in FIG. 9F, and the image display device 5 is displayed in step 3 shown in FIG. The image 111SG032C of the character Y3 is displayed on the display screen of FIG. 9, and the image 111SG001B of the character B is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 in step 4 shown in FIG.

  The image of the character displayed in each step is such that a larger character image is displayed as the number of steps increases, such as image 111SG032A <image 111SG032B <image 111SG032C <image 111SG001B.

  Also, although not specifically shown, in the SU effect based on the pattern Z, an image (not shown) of the character Z1 is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 in step 1, and the character is displayed on the display screen of the image display device 5 in step 2. The image of Z2 (not shown) is displayed, the image of character Z3 (not shown) is displayed on the display screen of image display device 5 in step 3, and the image 111SG001C of character C is displayed on the display screen of image display device 5 in step 4. Is displayed. The image of the character displayed in each step is such that a larger image of the character is displayed as the number of steps increases.

  In this manner, in the SU effect, in steps 1 to 3, the characters X1 to 3, Y1 to 3, and Z1 to 3 corresponding to the effect patterns X, Y, and Z can be displayed. In step 4, characters A to C corresponding to each of the effect patterns X, Y, and Z can be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, characters X1 to X3, Y1 to 3, and Z1 to 3 appearing in each of the effect patterns X, Y, and Z are separate from characters A to C selected in the first selection effect. Although the form of a character has been illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be a corresponding character A to C or a character similar to the character A to C. Characters X1 to X3, Y1 to 3, and Z1 to Z3 appearing in steps 1 to 3 of each effect pattern X, Y, and Z are different from each other, but only one character X, Y, and Z sequentially increases in size. May be.

  As described above, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of performing a game is an item corresponding to each of a plurality of different effects (for example, The first item and the second item are displayed so as to be selectable by the player, and the effect selection means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs the first step in 111SGS435, 111SGS466, and 111SGS467 in the notice effect process in which the effect control CPU 120 can receive the effect selection). A portion for displaying a selection screen or a second selection screen, etc.) and effect executing means capable of executing the effect accepted by the effect selecting means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 performs a battle announcement or an SU announcement in the announcement effect processing of the 111SGS305). And the like, wherein the effect selection means selects a unique item in each effect (for example, For example, the selection of the first item) and the second selection of the common item in each effect (for example, the selection of the second item) can be accepted. When the selection of the second item corresponding to the medley is received on the second selection screen, if the selection of the character A is received on the first selection screen, the medley 1 is reproduced in the battle effect, and the character is displayed on the first selection screen. If the selection of B is received, the medley 2 is reproduced in the battle effect, and if the selection of the character C is received on the first selection screen, the medley 3 is reproduced in the battle effect.

  By doing so, it is possible to increase the variation of the effect while preventing the selection items from increasing.

  Specifically, the player can select one of the second items corresponding to a plurality of types of effects (for example, medleys 1 to 3) and execute the effect according to the received second item. In this case, the second selection screen does not need to display a plurality of second items corresponding to each of the medleys 1 to 3, so that the player can easily select a suitable effect within the operation validity period without being confused. Note that "selection" includes customization, setting of an ON state / OFF state, and the like.

  At the second timing after the first timing at which the effect control CPU 120 displays the first selection screen and accepts the selection of the first item, the effect control CPU 120 displays the second selection screen to select the second item. Accept.

  By doing so, it is possible to prevent the selection items displayed at one time from increasing and the player from being confused. That is, by displaying the first item and the second item on one selection screen, it is possible to prevent the selection items from increasing and the player from being confused.

  Characters A to C accepted in the first selection effect of the battle announcement are characters appearing during the period in which the battle effect (super reach effect) is executed.

  By doing so, the period in which the effect corresponding to the selected item is executed is lengthened, so that interest can be enhanced.

  Further, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the selection of the second item corresponding to the medley on the second selection screen, the effect control CPU 120 displays the medleys 1 to 3 of the type corresponding to the received characters A to C on the first selection screen. The songs a to c to be played, but to be played back in a big hit effect different from the battle effect, are played according to the characters A to C accepted on the first selection screen.

  By doing in this way, the contents of the effects other than the first selection corresponding effect (battle effect) (such as the type of music played in the big hit effect) also differ depending on the item selected on the first selection screen. Enhancement of interest.

  The selection mode of the second selection screen depends on the first mode (for example, the second item of the medley) in which the effect changes according to the item selected on the first selection screen, and the selection mode of the first selection screen. And the second effect (for example, the second items of the titles A to C).

  As described above, since the selection mode of the second selection screen includes items that do not change according to the items selected on the first selection screen, it is possible to meet various needs of the player.

  Further, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 capable of performing a game is an item corresponding to each of a plurality of different types of effects (for example, a first item or a first item). The second item) is displayed so as to be selectable by the player, and the effect selection means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 uses the 111SGS435, 111SGS466, or 111SGS467) to display the first selection screen or the second selection screen with the effect selection. An effect execution means (for example, a part where the effect control CPU 120 executes a battle notice or an SU notice in the notice effect processing of the 111SGS305), and an effect executing means capable of executing the effect received by the effect selecting means. Specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first selected effect) capable of executing the specific effect. When accepting the selection of the character A on the first selection screen of the SU notice, the control CPU 120 sets the second item of the pattern X to the initial selection state on the second selection screen, and selects the character B on the second selection screen. Is received, the second item of the pattern Y is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen, and if the selection of the character C is received on the first selection screen, the second item of the pattern Z is initialized to the second selection screen. Select the state.

  By doing so, the display mode of the items is changed according to the mode of the specific effect, and the interest is improved. More specifically, since the second item in the initial selection state on the second selection screen changes according to the type of the character A to C whose selection has been accepted on the first selection screen of the SU notice, the player can select the second selection screen. Even if the selection operation is not performed, the effect pattern of the SU effect changes according to the type of the character received on the first selection screen, so that the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, in the present embodiment, since the first item to be in the initial selection state on the first selection screen is determined by executing the lottery, there is a case where the player does not perform the selection operation on the first selection screen. Since the character changes, the effect pattern of the SU effect changes accordingly, and the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the first item (for example, the character A) in the first mode has a higher relevance to the specific effect (for example, the characters B and C) in the second mode. For example, a second item (for example, corresponding to patterns Y and Z) in which the relevance to the specific effect of the second aspect is higher than the relevance to the specific effect of the first aspect is higher than the second item corresponding to the pattern X. 2) can be selectively displayed. When the selection of the character A is accepted on the first selection screen, the second item of the effect pattern X is selected on the second selection screen regardless of the operation of the player. When the characters are displayed in the mode and the selection of the characters Y and Z is received on the first selection screen, the second item of the effect patterns Y and Z is selected on the second selection screen regardless of the operation of the player.

  By doing so, it is possible to execute an effect according to the interest of the player. Specifically, when the selection of the first item corresponding to any of the characters A to C is received on the first selection screen, the first selection is performed on the second selection screen even if the player does not perform the selection operation. Since the selection of the effect pattern related to the character received on the screen is received, the SU effect based on the effect pattern related to the character can be provided to the player. In addition, it is possible to give an index to be selected in the next and subsequent first selection effects and second selection effects.

  In addition, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the selection of the character A on the first selection screen of the SU notice and receives the selection of the second item of the effect pattern X in the initial selection state on the second selection screen, the SU production In step 4, the character A appears.

  By doing so, the SU effect based on the effect pattern X related to the character A received on the first selection screen is an effect in which the character A itself appears, so that it is possible to improve the player's willingness to select. it can.

  In the present embodiment, the relevance to the character A received on the first selection screen, that is, the character A, which is the specific effect of the first mode, is higher than that of the characters B, C, which are the specific effect of the second mode. As an example of the high production pattern, the form in which the character A accepted on the first selection screen appears when Step 4 in the SU production is executed, but the present invention is not limited to this. The effect that the relevance to the specific effect of the first aspect is higher than the specific effect of the second aspect is, as described above, not only the effect in which the specific effect of the first embodiment can appear, but also, for example, each of the characters A to C and Identification of each aspect such as hostile characters A 'to C', robots A 'to C' on which each person A to C can ride, plants A 'to C' that each animal A to C likes Related to each production It may be any out.

  In addition, in the SU announcement, the effect control CPU 120 executes the SU effect based on the effect pattern set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen. Characters A to C appear.

  By doing so, it is possible to improve the player's expectation that the first selection effect is executed. In other words, in the SU production, there is a case where the character selected in the first selection production (specific production) does not change to Step 4 in Steps 1 to 4, so that the initial stage of the SU production (for example, It is difficult to predict that the characters A to C appear in the steps 1 to 3), whereby the sense of expectation can be maintained. In addition, since the step 4 is executed at a higher rate than the losing when a big hit occurs, the player expects the character to appear in the step 4.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines whether the first item displayed on the first selection screen or the second item displayed on the second selection screen is to be executed in the battle announcement or the SU announcement. Although the number is not changed, the present invention is not limited to this.For example, the number of jackpots reaches a predetermined number, or a predetermined period has elapsed since the operation of the gaming machine started. Or when a predetermined timing in the business period of the game arcade is reached, or when a specific condition is established in accordance with a game history such as interlocking with a mobile phone, an item that can be selected by the player in the first and second items, that is, a battle The number of songs reproduced in the effect, the effect pattern of the SU effect, and the like may be increased. By doing so, the selection variation is widened, and the interest is improved.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the effects (characters A to C) executed in accordance with the first item selected in the first selection effect of the battle notice, and the second item selected in the second selection effect, The effects (medleys and songs) that are performed in a single battle effect are the effects that constitute the battle effects, but the effects by the characters and the effects that play the songs are performed individually. May be used.

  Further, in the embodiment, in the first selection effect, a plurality of types of effects (for example, a battle effect or SU effect in which the character A appears, a battle effect or SU effect in which the character B appears, and a battle effect in which the character C appears) Although a plurality of first items (for example, first items 111SG001A to 111SG001C) corresponding to the effects and the SU effects are displayed, the present invention is not limited to this, and the present invention is not limited to this. May be used to select only one effect (for example, only character A can be selected).

  Further, in the embodiment, in the second selection effect, a plurality of second items (for example, the second item corresponding to a plurality of types of effects (for example, a medley or a title A to C reproduced in a battle effect)). Although the form in which the items 111SG020 and 111SG021A to 111SG021C are displayed has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and only one effect can be selected in the second selection effect (for example, only the medley can be selected). It may be.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, as an effect (first item) in which a selection can be accepted in the first selection effect, a form in which a plurality of types of battle effects or SU effects in which characters A to C appear are applied. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, an enemy character fighting in a battle effect, a background image in a battle effect or a SU effect, a line, a cut-in image, a music to be reproduced, a light emission display pattern, an effect Various effects other than the effect in which a character appears, such as a mode (for example, a mode in which a pre-reading effect is easily executed, a mode in which a premier effect is easily executed, etc.) may be used. In other words, for example, the effect element (for example, a character, a background image, a line, a cut-in image, music, a light emission display pattern, an effect mode, and the like) executed in the battle effect or the SU effect is selected in the first selection effect. What is necessary is just to be acceptable.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, in the first selection effect and the second selection effect, a form in which the type of the battle effect or the SU effect as the notice effect is selectable is exemplified, but the present invention is not limited to this. In addition, it is possible to select the type of production other than the announcement production (for example, a precursor production, hold change production, big hit production, high base production, high promising production, reach production, promotion production, demonstration production, production mode, etc.) Is also good.

  In the embodiment, the first selection effect and the second selection effect are executed at a first timing in a period from the start of the variable display to the end thereof, and the first selection effect is executed at the first timing. Although the form in which the second selection effect is executed at a second timing different from the first timing (after the first timing) has been exemplified, the present invention is not limited to this, and the first selection effect and the second selection effect are performed. The execution timing of the effect can be changed in various ways. For example, the first selection effect is executed at the first timing before the reach in the period from the start of the variable display to the end thereof, and the second selection during the reach or the second after the reach. The second selection effect may be executed at a timing.

  In addition, the first selection effect is executed at the first timing in the period from the start of the variable display to the end thereof, and the second timing after the end of the variable display (for example, a big hit middle production, a high base middle production) , A high-probability medium effect, etc.). Further, the first selection effect is executed at the first timing during the period from the start of the variable display to the end thereof, and the second timing after the end of the variable display (for example, during the next and subsequent variable displays). May be used to execute the second selection effect.

  Further, the first selection effect and the second selection effect may be executed at the same timing (for example, selection of the first item and selection of the second item can be accepted on one selection screen).

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the selection of the second item of the medley is accepted on the second selection screen in the battle announcement, the medley is reproduced in the battle effect according to the accepted first item on the first selection screen. Although the types of the medleys 1 to 3 are different (all the reproduced songs are different), the present invention is not limited to this. Some of the songs may be different. More specifically, some songs (for example, one song) among a plurality of songs played on medleys 1 to 3 are common to medleys 1 to 3, and other songs (for example, two to three songs) are first selected. It may be different depending on the first item received on the screen. Further, the medleys 1 to 3 have the same music to be played regardless of the type of the first item received on the first selection screen, but have the same type as the first item received on the first selection screen. Accordingly, the order of reproduction, the number of music to be reproduced, the version (tune), and the like may be different.

  Further, in the above embodiment, when the selection of the second item of the medley is accepted on the second selection screen in the battle announcement, the medley is reproduced in the battle effect according to the accepted first item on the first selection screen. Although the types of the medleys 1 to 3 are different, the present invention is not limited to this, and the second item is a song to be reproduced according to the first item received on the first selection screen. May be a single song instead of a medley. In this case, the song number or version (tune) to be played according to the first item accepted on the first selection screen, etc. Should be different.

  Also, in the above embodiment, when the effect control CPU 120 receives the selection of the character A in the first selection effect (specific effect) of the SU notice, the second item of the pattern X is initially selected on the second selection screen. State, and when the selection of the character B is received in the first selection effect (specific effect), the second item of the pattern Y is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen, and the character is selected in the first selection effect (specific effect). When the selection of C is accepted, the mode in which the second item of the pattern Z is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen has been exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this. To make the initial selection state on the second selection screen in accordance with, for example, the characters A to C (specific effects) determined by the lottery, without allowing the player to accept the selection by the player. It may be determined.

  In the above embodiment, the effect control CPU 120 determines that the relevance with the characters A to C of the first item selected in the first selection effect is higher than that of the other characters on the second selection screen for SU notice. Although the form in which the second items corresponding to the high effect patterns X, Y, and Z are displayed in an initial selection state has been described as an example, the present invention is not limited to this. Display mode when the selection of the second item is received on the second selection screen in the case where the selection is performed on the character A) and the case where the specific effect is performed in the second mode (for example, the character B or the character C). Is different (the second item in the initial selection state is different), the association between the specific effect and the second item in the initial selection state is not necessarily required.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, an example has been described in which the second selection screen for SU notice is displayed in an initial selection state by highlighting one of a plurality of second items and positioning the cursor image 111SG005. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the specific effect is executed in the first mode (for example, character A) and the specific effect is executed in the second mode (for example, character B or character C). It is sufficient that the display mode when accepting the selection of the second item on the second selection screen is different from the case where the second mode is selected. For example, the display mode of the second item is not changed and the display mode around the second item is not changed. Is changed to make the initial selection state, or the second item to be in the initial selection state is displayed larger than the other second items in a more conspicuous (highlighted) manner than the other second items. It may be displayed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, selectable items are sequentially switched by operating the push button 31B on the first selection screen or the second selection screen, and the items selected at the timing when the operation validity period ends. Although the mode in which the selection is accepted is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the item selection operation can be performed by the first operation means such as the stick controller 31A or the cross key or the jog dial, and the push button 31B And the like, the item selected by the second operation means may be accepted within the operation validity period.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the mode in which the first selected effect and the second selected effect as the specific effect are executed within one variable display execution period has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. Instead, for example, in a first production state (for example, a reach production), a title information production is performed as a specific production, and in a second production state (for example, a big hit production) which shifts after the first production state ends. (E.g., music) selection can be accepted, and the display when accepting the selection of the second item in the case where the title notification effect is executed in the first mode and the case where the title information effect is executed in the second mode The aspect may be different.

  More specifically, the effect control CPU 120 starts the variable display as shown in FIG. 9-25 (A), and then enters the reach state (first effect state), as shown in FIG. 9-25 (B). As shown in the drawing, the effect of displaying and notifying the image 111SG040 indicating that the reach type is “reach A” among the reach A to C, and the reach type is “reach” as shown in FIG. And displaying an image 111SG041 indicating “reach A”, and informing “reach A”, as shown in FIG. 9-25 (D), In the selection screen where the music to be played in the big hit production can be selected from among a plurality of items, the item 111SG050 corresponding to the playback of the music of "Title A" is set to the initial selection state, and the notification of "Reach C" is given. FIG. As shown in 25 (E), in a selectable selection screen music to be reproduced from a plurality of the director in the jackpot may be an initial selected state item 111SG051 corresponding to the reproduction of the music of the "Title C".

  In this way, the effect of the specific effect executed in the reach state (first effect state) is performed in a jackpot medium effect (second effect state) different from the reach state (first effect state). The effect can be smoothly performed according to the progress of the game.

  In the above-described embodiment, the medleys 1 to 3 of the type corresponding to the characters A to C received on the first selection screen are reproduced. In this embodiment, the songs ac corresponding to the received characters A to C are reproduced. However, the present invention is not limited to this. In accordance with the type of one item, the video reproduced in the big hit effect, the reach effect, the effect mode, the background image, the type of the selectable notice effect, the expectation degree of the notice effect big hit, and the like may be changed.

  For example, in the case of applying the characteristic part 122SG of FIGS. 1 to 8 to 27 and the characteristic part 111SG of FIGS. 9-1 to 9-25 to the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example, as a notice effect of the characteristic part 111SG Instead of the illustrated battle notice or SU notice, a suggestion effect indicating the set value set for the characteristic portion 122SG may be applied.

  For example, according to the type of the character selected in the first selection effect of 111SG, in the second selection effect, it is possible to select the type of the suggestion effect indicating the setting value of the characteristic portion 122SG. In addition, when the setting value suggested in the suggesting effect of the characteristic portion 122SG is the first mode (for example, setting 1 is suggested) and the second mode (for example, setting 3), the second value of 111SG is set. The display mode (for example, the item in the initial selection state) when receiving the selection of the item in the selection effect may be different.

  The present invention is not limited to those described above. Further, the specific configuration thereof is included in the present invention even if there are changes and additions in a range not departing from the gist of the present invention, in addition to the above-described embodiment and other exemplary embodiments described below.

  Moreover, it is good also as combining all or one part structure arbitrarily among the structure shown to embodiment mentioned above and each modification, and the structure shown in the below-mentioned embodiment and each modification.

  In addition, it should be thought that the above-described embodiment and the later-described embodiment disclosed this time are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is defined by the terms of the claims, rather than the description above and the following description, and is intended to include any modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the terms of the claims.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is a gaming machine (for example, a pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of playing a game, and an item (for example, a first item) corresponding to each of a plurality of different types of effects. The effect selection means (for example, the effect control CPU 120 displays the first selection screen or the second selection on the 111SGS435, 111SGS466, or 111SGS467) by displaying the item or the second item so that the player can select the effect. A part for displaying a screen, etc.) and an effect executing means capable of executing the effect received by the effect selecting means (for example, a part in which effect control CPU 120 executes a battle notice or SU notice in the notice effect processing of 111SGS305). And a specific effect execution means (for example, a portion where the effect control CPU 120 executes the first selected effect) capable of executing the specific effect, The display mode when the effect selecting means receives the selection of an item differs between the case where the specific effect is executed in the first mode and the case where the specific effect is executed in the second mode (for example, for the effect control). When the CPU 120 receives the selection of the character A in the first selection effect of the SU notice, the second item of the pattern X is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen, and the selection of the character B is received in the first selection effect. The second item of the pattern Y is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen, and if the selection of the character C is accepted in the first selection effect, the second item of the pattern Z is set to the initial selection state on the second selection screen. The part that executes the processing of 111SGS460 to 111SGS466 in the notice effect processing), and further, an advantageous state (for example, a big hitting game state) that is advantageous to the player Suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect) that suggests being controlled, and title notification means (for example, for effect control) capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggestion effect. CPU 120), and the title notification means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIGS. 10-2 (D) and (F)). A) gaming machines.

  According to such a configuration, the display mode of the items is changed according to the mode of the specific effect, so that interest is improved. In addition, the effect of production can be enhanced.

  Furthermore, as an example of a game machine that can enhance the interest and enhance the effect of the game, a game machine (for example, pachinko game machine 1) that can be controlled to an advantageous state (for example, a jackpot game state) that is advantageous to the player And a suggestion effect execution means (for example, effect control CPU 120) capable of executing a suggestion effect (for example, a reach effect) indicating that the control is performed in the advantageous state, and a title corresponding to the suggestion effect can be notified. Title notification means (for example, effect control CPU 120), and the title information means can notify a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect (for example, FIG. 10-). 2 (D), (F)) gaming machines. Hereinafter, an example of the embodiment of the gaming machine will be described as another embodiment.

(Other examples)
Hereinafter, the characteristic portion 31AK of another embodiment will be described. FIG. 10A is a diagram for explaining a variation pattern and a type of reach in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment. As shown in FIG. 10A, in this embodiment, the non-reach loss variation patterns PA1-1 and PA1 in which the variable display mode of the decorative symbol is not the reach mode and the display result is "losing". -2. The display result is "big hit", such as reach-loss variation patterns PA2-1 to PA2-6, PA3-1 to PA3-4, in which the variable display mode of the decorative pattern is the reach mode and the display result is "losing". Are prepared. PB2-1 to PB2-6, PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), in this embodiment, reach effects such as normal reach and super reach AE are executed. In this embodiment, the reach effect is also referred to as a suggestion effect that indicates that it is controlled to the big hit state. The reliability when each reach is executed (big hit reliability) is represented by the number of black stars in FIG. 10-1 (B), normal reach <super reach E <super reach D <super reach C <super reach Reach B <Super Reach A. In addition, you may provide the reach which determines a big hit.

  In this embodiment, the super reach is executed via the normal reach. In addition, during the super-reach reach effect, an advanced effect that evolves (promotes) to a more reliable reach may be executed. Variation patterns PA3-1 to PA3-4, etc., and variation patterns PB3-1 to PB3-4, etc., shown in FIG. 10A are variation patterns corresponding to the execution of the development effect. Note that FIG. 10A shows a variation pattern in which the reliability develops to a super-reach of one step higher, but a variation pattern in which the reliability develops in two or more steps is also provided. Further, a variation pattern in which the development effect is executed a plurality of times may be provided.

  In this embodiment, the title of the reach is notified at a predetermined timing after the reach is established, except for the normal reach having the lowest reliability. As shown in FIG. 10-1 (B), the notification mode of the title differs depending on the type of the reach. Specifically, the super reach E having the lowest reliability among the super reach is notified only by displaying the title of the reach, and the other super reach is notified of the title by display and sound. As described above, the notification of the title is executed by the effect device of the reach with the higher reliability than the reach with the lower reliability. As a result, the player's sense of expectation can be effectively instigated, and the production effect can be improved. The title notification mode may be arbitrarily changed depending on the reliability or irrespective of the reliability. Further, even in the same reach effect, the notification mode may be changed according to the actual display result or the like. Further, the font of the title character (Gothic, Mincho, etc.) or the typeface (line, square, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach.

  The notification of the title of the reach (title notification) is not limited to the title itself such as the name of the reach, but may be the name of the character appearing in the reach effect, the content of the effect of the reach effect, or the like.

(Example of the production operation of the characteristic part 31AK)
Next, an example of a rendering operation according to the present embodiment will be described. The following production operation is executed by the production control CPU 120 executing the production control process based on the production control command transmitted from the main board 11. FIG. 10-2 and FIG. 10-3 are diagrams showing an example of the super-reach effect operation in this embodiment. FIG. 10-2 (A) shows that the decorative display is variably displayed in the “left”, “middle”, and “right” decorative symbol display areas 5L, 5C, and 5R of the image display device 5. ing. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (B), the decorative symbol indicating the number 7 on the “left” and “right” stops and the reach mode is reached. After that, the production branches depending on the type of reach.

(Super Reach A)
In the case of Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 10C, the character 31AK001, which is a friendly character, is displayed on the image display device 5, and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses from the start of the super-reach production, such as the end of the introduction part of the super-reach production (also referred to as super-reach production), as shown in FIG. The title 31AK002 of Super Reach A (here, the character of “SP Reach A”) is displayed on the entire screen, and a sound (here, “Super Reach A”) corresponding to the title of Reach is output from the speaker 8. Thus, the title of Super Reach A is announced. Thereafter, the title 31AK002 of Super Reach A is deleted, the character 31AK003, which is an enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK003 are displayed as shown in FIG. Is performed, the subsequent part of the reach effect of Super Reach A is executed. An effect in which the characters confront each other is also referred to as a battle effect. In the battle effect, a victory occurs when an ally character wins, and a loss occurs when the ally character loses.

  In addition, when the words are displayed on the image display device 5 during the super reach effect, the sound corresponding to the words may be output from the speaker 8. Also, the dialogue is not limited to being displayed in a balloon as shown in FIG. 10E, and may be displayed in subtitles on the lower part of the image display device 5 or the like.

(Super Reach B)
In the case of Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 10C, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5 and the reach effect is started. Here, for example, an animation using the character 31AK001 is displayed. When a predetermined period elapses after the super-reach effect is started, such as when the introduction part of the super-reach effect ends, the title 31AK005 of the super-reach B is displayed on the entire screen of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. (Here, the character of “SP Reach B”) is displayed, and the sound (here, “Super Reach B”) corresponding to the title name of Reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of Super Reach B is changed. Be informed. Thereafter, the title 31AK005 of Super Reach B is erased, the character 31AK006 as the enemy character is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the characters 31AK001 and 31AK006 are displayed as shown in FIG. Is executed, the succeeding part of the reach effect of Super Reach B is executed.

  As described above, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title of the reach is notified when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the super reach effect. By doing so, the title can be notified after the introduction part of the super reach effect is shown to the player, so that the effect of the title notification can be enhanced.

  Super reach A (FIG. 10-2 (C) → (D) → (E)...) And super reach B (FIG. 10-2 (C) → (F) → (G)...) In the introductory part until the title is announced, the super reach effect is executed in a common effect mode (FIG. 10-2 (C)). In this way, the player can be noticed which super-reach has been started since the super-reach production started, and which title is to be notified. The super-reach A and the super-reach B are not limited to completely making the production mode until the title is announced. At least one super-reach can be determined if the production is watched. The sections may have a common effect mode. For example, in the introductory part of Super Reach A and Super Reach B, a super reach effect (for example, an effect that displays an enemy character or suggests an enemy character) may be performed in a manner related to a title to be notified thereafter. It may be. By doing so, the effect of the effect is improved, and the player pays attention to the effect. As described above, the title notification may be executed after the super reach can be specified.

(Super Reach D)
In the case of Super Reach D, the title 31AK007 of Super Reach D (the character of "SP Reach D" here) is displayed at a part of the center of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. At the same time, a sound (here, “defeat the enemy”) corresponding to the title of the reach is output from the speaker 8 to notify the title of the super reach D. As described above, in the super reach D, the title is notified at the start of the super reach effect. Under the title 31AK007, an expectation degree suggestion indication 31AK008 indicating the degree of expectation of the reach is displayed. The degree of expectation is represented by the number of black stars, as shown in FIG. Here, the degree of expectation is the degree of expectation to be a big hit, but does not have to completely match the big hit reliability of the reach.

  The notification by the voice of Super Reach D does not report the title as it is, but reports the content of the reach. As described above, in this embodiment, the mode of notification of the title notification by voice differs depending on the type of the reach. Thereby, the notification mode of the title notification is diversified, and the interest is improved.

  After the title is announced in the super reach D, the character 31AK001 is displayed on the image display device 5, as shown in FIG. At this time, the title 31AK007 and the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 continue to be displayed in a reduced size in the upper right portion of the image display device 5 or the like. By doing so, the player can grasp the degree of expectation of the reach even during the reach effect. In FIG. 10-2 (I), the effect contents common to FIG. 10-2 (C) (super reach A, super reach B) are shown, but a super reach effect dedicated to super reach D is executed. May be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (J), the character 31AK009, which is the enemy character, is displayed, the dialogue 31AK004 of the character 31AK001 is displayed, or the reach reach of the super reach D in which the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK009 confront each other is performed. Be executed.

(Super Reach E)
In the case of Super Reach E, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (A), the title 31AK010 of Super Reach E (here, the character of “SP Reach E”) is displayed in a part of the upper left of the image display device 5. Then, the title of Super Reach E is notified. In the super reach E, the notification of the title by voice is not performed. In addition to the display of the title 31AK010, the character 31AK001 and the character 31AK011, which is an enemy character, are displayed. Be executed. As described above, in Super Reach E, the title is notified in accordance with the progress of the reach effect. In the super reach E, the title 31AK010 is continuously displayed during the reach effect.

  In the reach production of the super reach E having a low jackpot reliability, by giving the title information without stopping the progress of the reach production, it is possible to prevent the player from giving an excessive sense of expectation. On the other hand, in the reach effects of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach D, the progress of the reach effect is stopped and the title is notified (FIG. 10-2 (D), (F)). , (H)). By doing so, the title notification according to the super reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved. It should be noted that in super reach effects such as super reach A, super reach B, and super reach D, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach. Also, in contrast to this embodiment, in the super-reach reach production with high jackpot reliability, the title may be notified without stopping the progress of the reach production. In the reach effect of the super reach having a low jackpot reliability, the progress of the reach effect may be stopped to notify the title.

(Timing notification timing)
As described above, in this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of Super Reach production, and in Super Reach D and Super Reach E, Super Reach production The title is announced at the start. By doing in this way, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B having high jackpot reliability, the title is notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the start of the superreach production, and Super Reach D and Super Reach have low jackpot reliability. In E, the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production, but the title was announced at the start of the super-reach production in the case of the reach with a high jackpot reliability, and the super The title may be notified after a predetermined period has elapsed after the reach effect.

(Title display area)
Further, in this embodiment, in the super reach A and the super reach B, the title is announced on the entire screen (first area) of the image display device 5, and in the super reach D and the super reach E, the image display device 5 is displayed. Is notified in a part of the screen (second area). By doing in this way, it is possible to execute the title notification according to the reach effect, and the effect of the effect is improved. In particular, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title notification is executed in a wider display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability, so that effective title notification is possible. Note that the title notification on the entire screen of the image display device 5 may be such that the title is displayed in a size that fits the entire screen, or the entire background is displayed as a title notification background. (Title notification using the entire screen) or the like. Further, the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach A and the super reach B, or the display area for performing the title notification may be different between the super reach D and the super reach E.

  The method of changing the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect is not limited to the example of this embodiment, and the display area for performing the title notification according to the reach effect may be arbitrarily changed. For example, in the case of a reach with a high jackpot reliability, the title notification may be executed in a narrower display area than in a case of a reach with a low reliability. Further, when the display area for performing the title notification is made different according to the reach effect, the display area may be made different as in this embodiment, or the display place may be made different.

(Expected indication)
In this embodiment, in the title notification in the super reach A and the super reach B having the high jackpot reliability, the super reach D having the lower jackpot reliability than the super reach A and the super reach B is displayed without displaying the indication of the expectation degree. In the title notification in, an indication of the degree of expectation was displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the effect from becoming dull. In addition, in the title notification in Super Reach E, which has a lower jackpot reliability than Super Reach D, an indication of the degree of expectation is not displayed. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from losing the expectation by displaying the expectation indicator indicating that the reliability is low in the reach with low reliability. Note that an expectation degree suggestion display may be displayed on at least a part of the super reach A, the super reach B, and the super reach E.

  Note that the indication of the degree of expectation is not limited to the one indicated by the number of black stars as shown in FIG. 10-2 (H) and the like, and the degree of expectation may be indicated by a meter or a gauge. May be displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 10-2 (H) and the like, in the case where the number of black stars is indicated, half (or half) black stars can be displayed, and the number of levels of expectation may be increased. .

(Title display end timing)
In this embodiment, in Super Reach A and Super Reach B, after the title is displayed, the title is erased and a super reach effect is executed. Thereby, in the super reach A and the super reach B, it is possible to pay attention to the reach effect. Further, in the super reach D and the super reach E, after the title is displayed, the title is continuously displayed until a determined effect described later is executed. Thereby, in the super reach D and the super reach E, the type of the reach can be grasped even during the super reach effect. In addition, by performing the above, the title notification according to the reach effect can be executed, and the effect of the effect can be improved. Note that the display end timing of the title may be arbitrarily changed in order to improve the effect of presentation regardless of the timing.

  Note that, here, the production operation of the reach production of the super reach C is omitted, however, for example, a title notification and an expectation suggestion display according to the jackpot reliability may be executed.

(Decision production)
When it is time to derive the display result (the end of the variable display) after each reach effect has been executed, a fixed effect for notifying whether or not the display result will be a "big hit" is executed. The fixed effects include a fixed effect indicating that the display result is "big hit" and a fixed effect indicating that the display result is "losing". In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 10-3 (B), a determined effect of displaying the image 31AK012 on the image display device 5 is executed. Thereafter, if the display result is "big hit", an image 31AK013 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. 10C, and as shown in FIG. A definitive decorative symbol to be a big hit combination is derived. If the display result is "losing", an image indicating that the ally character has been defeated is displayed, and a fixed decorative symbol that is a reach-losing combination is derived.

  In the present embodiment, even when the title is continuously notified during the reach effect, the notification of the title is ended before the fixed effect is executed. As a result, attention can be paid to the determined effect, and a sharp title notification can be executed.

  In the effect operation example shown in FIGS. 10-2 and 10-3, during the reach effect of the super reach, the decorative design is reduced at the lower right portion of the image display device 5 and the variable display is executed. The way of displaying the decorative pattern during the reach effect may be arbitrary. For example, the decorative design may not be displayed during the reach effect, or the display mode (size, position, shading, number, etc.) may be changed depending on the type of the reach effect.

  In addition, when the character resident in the hold display, the active display, and the variable display, and the display related to the mobile phone are displayed on the image display device 5, the display is appropriately not displayed during the reach effect of the super reach in order to focus on the reach effect. It may be. At this time, these displays may be kept displayed during a low-reliability reach effect such as super reach E. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively expecting a low-reliability reach effect, and to pay attention to the reach effect in the high-reliability reach effect.

(Development stage)
Next, an example of an effect operation when the extended effect is executed will be described. As shown in FIG. 10-4 (A), when the advanced effect is executed when the reach effect of super reach D is executed (the title notification of super reach D is executed), FIG. As shown in (B), an effect is executed in which the reach effect is interrupted and the screen is torn. Thereafter, in the case of developing into Super Reach A, as shown in FIG. 10C, the title of Super Reach A is announced, and Reach production of Super Reach A is performed. In the case of developing into Super Reach B, as shown in FIG. 10D, the title of Super Reach B is announced, and the reach effect of Super Reach is executed. As described above, when the development effect is performed, the notification of the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the notification of the title of the reach of the development destination. As shown in FIG. 10-4, when the reach of the development destination is a reach that performs title notification by display and voice, title notification by display and voice is executed again.

  The development effect is not limited to the example shown in FIG. 10-4 (B), but may be an effect in which the screen is gradually cracked and cracked, or a sand storm (indicated as a failure). It may be displayed. With such an effect, an unexpected effect can be performed. It should be noted that there may be a development effect of gasses, such as an effect in which the screen gradually cracks but the reach does not develop.

(Expectation suggestion effect)
In the effect operation example shown in FIG. 10-2 (H), the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK008 is configured such that black stars indicating the expectation degree are displayed from the beginning. It is also possible to execute an expectation suggestion effect that suggests an expectation by becoming a black star.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (A), when notifying the title of Super Reach D, first, the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021 of five white stars is displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (B), a black star 31AK022 larger than the star of the expectation degree indication display 31AK021 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 10-5 (C), the black star 31AK022 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white stars of the degree suggestion display 31AK021 is executed. At this time, a sound of “pin” indicating that the number of black stars indicating the degree of expectation has increased is output from the speaker 8. As shown in FIGS. 10-5 (D) and (E), the same effect is repeated a number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. At this time, the sound (volume, scale, sound quality, etc.) output from the speaker 8 may be changed step by step each time it is repeated (for each number of stars). When the number of black stars corresponding to the degree of expectation falls in the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK021, the black star is highlighted, as shown in FIG. By doing so, it becomes easy to understand that the expectation degree suggestion effect has ended.

  In the examples shown in FIGS. 10-5 (A) to (F), the black stars are displayed one by one, and the expectation indicated by the expectation suggestion display is increased by one step. One or more items may be displayed and the degree of expectation may be increased by two or more levels. Alternatively, half the black stars may be displayed, and the degree of expectation may be increased by half a step. In this case, different sounds may be output or the same sound may be output according to the number of displayed stars (the number of stages of the expected degree of rising). For example, the same sound may be output when half a black star is displayed and when one black star is displayed. The same sound may be output when two and a half black stars are displayed and when three black stars are displayed. Further, there may be a case where no sound is output. By doing so, the effect indicating the degree of expectation is diversified, and the effect of the effect is improved. Regardless of the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases at one time, the same black star image is displayed and fits in the white star of the indication of expectation, and the number of black stars according to the number of steps of the degree of expectation that increases increases Such an effect may be performed.

(Direction mode)
There may be a plurality of effect modes in the effect device such as the image display device 5, the speaker 8, and the game effect lamp 9. In different effect modes, even if the same command (for example, a command specifying a variation pattern) is transmitted from the main board 11, effects based on the command are executed in different effect modes. In each effect mode, the background, the character, the motif displayed on the image display device 5, the sound output from the speaker 8, and the like need only be different. The effect mode may be automatically changed according to the number of times of variable display or a game state, or may be changeable by a player's operation.

  FIGS. 10-5 (G) to (L) are examples of the production operation of the title notification and the expectation degree suggestion production when the special mode is set when the normal mode and the special mode are provided as the production mode. In the normal mode, as shown in FIGS. 10-5 (A) to (F), title notification and expectation degree suggestion effect are executed. In the special mode, the reach effect based on the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is a reach effect of the super reach D2 having a different effect form from the reach effect of the super reach D. Therefore, when the fluctuation pattern of the super reach D is designated, the title 31AK023 of the super reach D2 is displayed as shown in FIG. At this time, a sound corresponding to the title name of the reach is output from the speaker 8, but a sound different from the normal mode (for example, a sound having a different voice color) is output. The expectation degree indication 31AK024 in the super reach D2 is not a star but a diamond.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (H), a black diamond 31AK025 larger than the star of the expectation degree indication display 31AK024 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 10-5 (I), the black diamond 31AK025 moves and is expected. An effect that fits into one of the white diamonds of the degree suggestion display 31AK024 is executed. At this time, a sound “pong” is output from the speaker 8 indicating that the black diamond indicating the degree of expectation has increased. As shown in FIGS. 10-5 (J) and (K), the same effect is repeated the number of times corresponding to the degree of expectation of the reach. When the number of black rhombuses corresponding to the degree of expectation falls within the expectation degree suggestion display 31AK024, as shown in FIG. 10-5 (L), the black rhombus is highlighted so as to shine. As described above, by making the notification mode of the title different depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed) determined according to the selection of the player, the game state, and the like, the effect is diversified, and the effect of the effect is enhanced. improves.

  FIG. 10-5 shows an example of the production operation when the fluctuation pattern of Super Reach D is designated. However, depending on the production mode (the state when the reach production is executed), other reach productions (title notification, expectation degree) (Including a suggested effect) may be made different. Depending on the effect mode (the state when the reach effect is executed), whether to notify the title of the reach or the execution ratio of the title notification may be different. For example, when a predetermined effect mode is selected, the reach title may not be notified. By doing in this way, it is possible to execute the effect according to the preference of the player, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the degree of expectation is suggested by the number of black stars in the degree of expectation suggestion display, and an expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is performed. May be executed to gradually reduce the number of displays that indicate the degree of expectation. Such an expectation suggestion effect may be executed in addition to or in place of the expectation effect effect of this embodiment.

(Other examples of development effects)
In the case of executing the expectation suggestion effect of gradually increasing the display indicating the expectation of the expectation suggestion display, the development effect may be executed after increasing the display indicating the expectation. In this case, when the display indicating the degree of expectation is increased after the development effect, the display to be increased may be displayed at a time instead of in a stepwise manner. For example, as shown in FIG. 10-6 (A), the title of Super Reach D is announced, and after the effect of gradually increasing the number of black stars is completed, the image is displayed as shown in FIG. 10-6 (B). An extended effect in which the button image 31AK031 is displayed on the device 5 is executed. Here, when the operation on the push button 31B is detected, as shown in FIG. 10C, the title 31AK032 of Super Reach C (here, the character of “SP Reach C”) is displayed. , Super Reach C is notified. As described above, when the development effect is performed, the notification of the title of the reach of the development source is switched to the notification of the title of the reach of the development destination. Under the title 31AK032, the expectation degree suggestion indication 31AK033 having three black stars is highlighted. Even if the number of black stars increases by two or more, they are displayed at once. Note that, after the movable body 32 operates, a development effect in which the title and the expected degree suggestion display change may be executed.

(Preliminary production)
In this embodiment, a title announcement for announcing the jackpot reliability is executed as an announcement effect according to the title notification mode (for example, the display color of the title). For example, as shown in FIG. 10A, the title 31AK036 of Super Reach A is displayed in black, and the sound corresponding to the title of Reach is output from the speaker 8, so that the title of Super Reach A is displayed. Is notified, a title notice in which the display color of the title 31AK036 changes to red is executed as shown in FIG. 10-7 (B). As described above, when the title notice is not executed, the title is displayed in black, and when the title notice is executed, the title is displayed in a color other than black. In the title notice shown in FIG. 10-7, the display mode (display color) of the title may change after the reach title is notified by voice. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The timing at which the title is displayed in a color other than black is not limited to this, and the title may be displayed in a color other than black from the start of the display of the title.

  When a title notice in which the title display mode (display color) changes is executed, a sound corresponding to the changed display mode may be output after the title display mode has changed. By doing so, the effect of the notice effect can be enhanced. The title notification by voice may be executed after the title display mode (display color) changes. In this case, a sound corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the title after the change may be output.

(Timing notification execution timing)
It is preferable that the notification of the title during the reach is executed at a timing other than the execution timing of an effect (specific effect) such as a notice effect or an advanced effect that increases the degree of expectation controlled in the jackpot advantageous state. By doing in this way, once the title is announced, an effect of improving the degree of expectation can be executed, so that the player's expectation can be maintained.

  FIG. 10-8 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a notice effect determination process for determining whether or not to execute a notice effect and an effect mode. The announcement effect determination process is executed by the effect control CPU 120 in the variable display start setting process of step S171 in FIG. In the announcement effect determination process, the effect control CPU 120 first determines whether or not the fluctuation pattern specified from the command transmitted from the main board 11 is a super-reach fluctuation pattern (step 31AKS001).

  If it is a super-reach variation pattern (step 31AKS001; Yes), the display color of the title of the super-reach (whether or not to execute the title notice) is determined (step 31AKS002).

  In step 31AKS002, the display color of the title of the super reach is determined in accordance with the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-9A, for example, according to whether the display result is "big hit" or "losing". The display color of the Super Reach title changes from "black", "red", "black" to "red", and "black" to "fruit pattern", as shown in FIG. 10-9 (A). The ones that change and those that change from “red” to “fruit pattern” are provided, and the big hit reliability increases in this order (ascending order). That is, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing of change of the title display color. By doing so, the player pays attention to the timing of the change of the display color of the title, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  Note that the “fruit pattern” may be such that the title character is displayed in bold and the character itself is a “fruit pattern”, or the background portion of the title display area may be a “fruit pattern” . There may be a pattern displayed as a “fruit pattern” from the beginning. As for the display color changing, as shown in FIG. 10-7, the display color may be changed after the title notification is executed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes. Further, since the title display period varies depending on the type of super reach, the timing at which the display color changes depending on the type of super reach may be different. In the case of a super reach having a long title display period (for example, super reach D or super reach E), a plurality of changing timings may be provided, and the changing timing may be determined to any one. In the case of a super reach having a short title display period (for example, super reach A or super reach B), the number of changing timings may be one or a smaller number than a super reach having a long title display period.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the title is determined at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-9 (A) in the normal mode, and as shown in FIG. 10-9 (B) in the special mode. The display color of the title is determined at a different rate from the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode. As described above, by making the execution mode (display color and display color change timing) of the title notice different depending on the effect mode, the effect is diversified and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, as a notice effect, a line notice for notifying the jackpot reliability is executed according to the character display mode (for example, the display color of the line) in the super reach reach effect.

  After the display color of the title of the super reach is determined, the display color of the words of the character in the reach attainment of the super reach (whether or not to execute a speech notice) is determined (step 31AKS003).

  In step 31AKS003, the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, for example, at the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-9 (C) according to whether the display result is “big hit” or “losing”. As shown in FIG. 10-9 (C), the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect includes “white”, “red”, and “white” that changes from “white” to “red”. ) Has increased the jackpot reliability. In other words, the jackpot reliability differs depending on the timing at which the display color of the dialogue changes. By doing so, the player pays attention to the change timing of the display color of the dialogue, and the effect of the effect is improved. In the case where the display color changes, the display color may be changed after the words are displayed. As for the display color changing, there may be a plurality of timings at which the display color changes. Then, the jackpot reliability may be changed according to the timing at which the display color changes.

  The big hit reliability may be different depending on the combination of the presentation modes of the title notice and the speech notice. For example, in the case where the same announcement mode (display color) is included in the title announcement and the dialogue announcement, the big hit reliability may be increased when the same announcement mode is achieved. In addition, the big hit reliability may be made different by a combination of the timing of change of the presentation mode between the title notice and the speech notice. For example, when the change timing is the same, the jackpot reliability may be higher than when the change timings are different, or the jackpot reliability may be different depending on which change occurs first. By doing so, it is possible to pay attention to the respective change timings of the title notice and the dialogue notice.

  When there are a normal mode and a special mode as the effect mode, the display color of the dialogue may be determined at a different rate in the special mode from that in the normal mode. In the special mode, the display color pattern and the order of reliability may be different from those in the normal mode.

  Note that, in place of the dialogue announcement, an announcement effect for notifying the jackpot reliability based on a change in the effect mode of the reach effect may be executed. In this case, in the notice effect, a plurality of change timings of the effect mode may be provided so that the big hit reliability differs according to the change timing.

  After the display color of the dialogue in the reach effect is determined, or when it is determined that the pattern is not a variation pattern of the super reach (step AK31S001; No), the presence or absence of other notice effects and the effect form are determined (step AK31S004). After that, the determination results in the 31AKS002 to 31AKS004 are stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 122 (Step AK31S005), and the announcement effect determination processing ends.

  Note that in this embodiment, a title advance notice and a dialogue advance notice can be executed in the case of super reach. And at least one of the line announcement may be made executable. Also, the title announcement and the dialogue of the dialogue have been described as being determined by the determination ratio shown in FIG. 10-9, but the determination ratio is arbitrary, and for example, even if the determination ratio is changed according to the type of super reach, Good. By doing so, a notice effect can be executed according to the type of the reach, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  In this embodiment, the number of executable effect modes (the number of display colors that can be displayed) differs between a title notice and a dialogue notice. By doing in this way, the effects can be varied and the effect of the effects can be enhanced. In the title notice and the dialogue notice, the number of executable effect modes may be arbitrarily changed, and the number and types of executable effect modes may be the same. By doing so, a notice effect with a sense of unity can be executed, and the player can easily grasp the jackpot reliability.

(Action effect)
When the presentation mode of the title notice and the dialogue of the dialogue change, an effect indicating that the presentation mode changes may be executed. For example, an action effect image may be displayed on the image display device 5 and the effect effect may be performed such that the image acts on at least one of a title and a line. Then, after the action effect is executed, the effect mode (display color) of the title or the line may be changed. The effect mode of the action effect (action effect image or the like) may be common to both the title and the line. It should be noted that there may be a case where the effect mode of the title or the dialogue does not change despite the execution of the action effect. In the case of executing the action effect, the presence / absence of execution of the effect effect, the execution timing, and the effect mode may be determined based on the determination result of the title notice and the dialogue notice. Such a determination may be performed in the process of step AK31S004. For example, the ratio at which at least one of the title announcement and the speech announcement changes in the effect mode (the rate at which the effect mode changes due to the action effect) may be different depending on the effect mode of the action effect. The ratio of the effect of the speech notice and that of which effect mode changes (the ratio of acting on which effect) may be different, or the ratio of the color (how many steps) it changes may be different. . By executing such an action effect, when the action effect image is displayed, the player pays attention to which of the title and the line is to be applied, and the effect is improved. When there are a plurality of effect modes, the presence or absence of the effect effect and the effect mode may be determined at different rates depending on the effect mode. By doing in this way, an action effect corresponding to the effect mode can be executed, and the effect of the effect is improved.

  As another example of such an action effect, at least one effect mode (display color) of any of the title and the dialogue according to the effect content of the reach effect (for example, the effect content of the character motion or the battle effect). May be changed. In this way, the player pays attention to the content of the reach effect.

  The present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine 1 described in the feature section 31AK, and various modifications and applications are possible without departing from the gist of the present invention. For example, all of the features described in the above embodiments are not essential components, and can be omitted as appropriate.

(Sub LCD)
As a sub display device different from the image display device 5, a sub liquid crystal may be provided on the game board 2 or the game machine frame 3. Here, it is referred to as a sub liquid crystal, but the sub display device may be configured by an organic EL or a dot matrix LED. The sub liquid crystal device may be fixed, for example, in the vicinity of the image display device 5, or may be movable or housed. In the sub liquid crystal, various effects such as a notice effect and a display of a hold display are executed. For example, title notification may be executed in the sub liquid crystal. As in the case of the super reach D and the super reach E of the above-described embodiment, when the title is displayed continuously after the notification of the title, the display of the title and the degree of expectation may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal. In this case, the title and the degree of expectation suggestion display may be displayed on the sub liquid crystal after the image display device 5 notifies the title. This makes it possible to display the title and the expected degree suggestion display without obstructing the super reach effect on the image display device 5, and the title and the expected degree suggestion display can be easily understood.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the present invention is applied to notification of a title of a reach effect as a suggestive effect has been described. However, the present invention is applied to title information (notice of mainly displaying characters) relating to other effects. You may. For example, as a notice effect (for example, a look-ahead notice effect), when performing a look-ahead zone effect of shifting to a plurality of zones (stage, effect mode, and the like) in which the background image and the effect mode on the image display device 5 are respectively different, the shifted zone The present invention may be applied to the title notification. When a mission (“Let's reach at 7”, “Use a stick controller to annihilate the enemy”, etc.) is presented, and a mission effect that is in a state advantageous to the player when the mission is completed is executed, The present invention may be applied to notification of a title of a mission.

(Modification 1 of characteristic portion 31AK)
In the above-described embodiment, when it is time to derive the display result, a determined effect for notifying whether the display result is a “big hit” is executed, and thereafter, the display result is displayed ( (FIG. 10-3 (B)-(D)). Instead of such a determined effect, at a predetermined timing before deriving the display result, an operation effect prompting the operation of the stick controller 31A or the push button 31B is executed, and when a predetermined operation is detected during the operation valid period. The display result may be displayed by displaying the winning or losing of the battle effect or temporarily stopping the display result. By doing so, the display result is shown according to the operation of the player, so that the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased, and the interest can be improved.

  FIGS. 10-10 and 10-11 are diagrams illustrating an example of a super reach effect operation in a modification in which an operation effect is executed and a display result is displayed according to the operation. After reaching the reach mode in the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. 10-10 (A), for example, as shown in FIG. 10-10 (B), the character 31AK041 which is a friend character and the character which is an enemy character 31AK042 is displayed, and a reach effect in which the character 31AK041 and the character 31AK042 confront each other is executed as shown in FIGS. 10-10 (C) to (F) and FIGS. 10-11 (G) to (I).

  With the reach effect, a small button image 31AK043 and a regulation line 31AK044 superimposed on the small button image 31AK043 are displayed at the lower right of the image display device 5 as shown in FIG. Thereby, an operation effect using the push button 31B is executed, but it is suggested that the reception of the operation is currently restricted.

  In this modification, a plurality of operation effect images indicating that an operation effect is to be executed are prepared. Then, the jackpot reliability differs depending on which operation effect image is displayed and the operation effect is executed. In addition, an image indicating that the operation effect is executed during the reach effect may change to a mode having higher reliability.

  For example, as shown in FIG. 10D, a praying character 31AK045 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 10E, the praying character 31AK045 changes to a happy character 31AK046, and the small button image 31AK043 is displayed. It changes to the large button image 31AK047.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 10-11 (H), the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 10-11 (I), an effect 31AK049 in which a bullet is fired from the cannon 31AK048 is displayed, and the large button image 31AK047. The effect 31AK050 that the bullet hits is displayed. Then, the large button image 31AK047 changes to the stick image 31AK051.

  As described above, in this modification, when the operation effect image changes, the effect effect indicating that the operation effect image changes is executed. The operation effect image may change without accompanying the effect effect. Further, there may be a case where the operation effect image does not change even though the effect effect is executed. The rate at which the operation effect image changes may vary depending on the type of the effect effect.

  Then, a predetermined time before the display result is derived, the regulation line 31AK044 is erased as shown in FIG. 10-11 (J), and the stick image 31AK051 is moved to the center part as shown in FIG. 10-11 (K). Is displayed, and a display urging the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is displayed. At this time, the operation on the stick controller 31A is an effective operation valid period.

  Here, when the operation of pulling the stick controller 31A is detected, an image 31AK052 indicating that the ally character has won is displayed as shown in FIG. Then, at the timing when the fluctuation time ends, as shown in FIG. If an operation is not detected within a predetermined operation validity period, an image shown in FIG. 10-11 (L) is automatically displayed.

  In this modification, there are a small button image, a large button image, and a stick image as operation effect images, and an operation effect using these images in the order of small button image <large button image <stick image is performed. The jackpot reliability is high. Even when an operation effect image with low reliability is displayed, the operation effect image may change to a reliable operation effect image during the reach effect, so that the effect of the effect is improved and the player's sense of expectation is improved. Can be maintained.

  In addition, in the effecting operation example shown in FIGS. 10-10 and 10-11, the notification of the title of the reach and the indication of the degree of expectation are omitted, but the reach effect shown in FIGS. 10-10 and 10-11 is omitted. Or may be appropriately executed in parallel with the operation effect. The determination regarding the operation effect and the operation effect image (whether or not there is an operation effect, the operation effect image to be displayed, whether or not there is an effect effect) may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 10-8.

(Modification 2 of characteristic portion 31AK)
A suggestion indicating the expectation of control to an advantageous state such as a big hit game state may be displayed. For example, a shutter effect for performing the first suggestion display and a reach title effect for performing the second suggestion display may be executed. In the shutter effect, an effect of covering the screen with a shutter display after the start of the variable display is executed. In the reach title effect, after the reach, an effect of displaying a reach title indicating a development destination of the reach effect is executed. When displaying either the shutter display or the reach title display, a specific image may be included and displayed. The reach title effect may be the same as the title announcement in the above embodiment, or may be another effect determined by another process.

  The specific image is an image with a high jackpot reliability displayed including a plurality of types of elements in the image. The plural types of elements include a banana image of the element E1, a melon image of the element E2, an apple image of the element E3, a watermelon image of the element E4, and a strawberry image of the element E5. The fruit pattern image including these elements E1 to E5 is a specific image. In both the shutter display and the reach title display, all of the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to be visible. The display sizes of the elements E1 to E5 constituting the specific image are changed and displayed according to the difference in display size between the shutter display and the reach title display. In addition, all the elements E1 to E5 are displayed so as to fit in the shutter display and the reach title display, respectively.

  When the shutter effect is executed after the start of the variable display, when the fruit pattern image is displayed, the big hit reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. In addition, when a reach title is displayed during execution of the reach effect, when a fruit pattern image is displayed, the jackpot reliability is higher than when the fruit pattern image is not displayed. When the fruit pattern is not displayed, for example, a plain image that does not include the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. Note that an image pattern other than the fruit pattern image may be prepared as an image indicating the jackpot reliability when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. For example, a white image <a blue image <a red image <a fruit pattern image may be prepared in the order of the jackpot reliability (for example, a red shutter or a red title reach title). Then, one of the image patterns may be selected by a predetermined random number lottery depending on whether or not the display result of the variable display is a big hit.

  When performing the shutter display and the reach title display, even when a fruit pattern is displayed, the speaker 8 outputs a notification of outputting a common sound (melody) and also notifies the game effect lamp 9 of light emission. The common sound and the emission control of the game effect lamp 9 indicate to the player that the fruit pattern is a special image. When such a shutter display and a reach title display are performed, common notification for the fruit pattern is executed. In the reach title display, a specific sound (voice) is further output after the common notification. Note that the output period of the common sound and the specific sound may partially overlap.

  FIG. 10-12 is a display screen diagram when the shutter effect and the reach title effect are executed. As shown in FIG. 10A, when the shutter effect is executed, the shutter image 31AK061 is displayed on the image display device 5 at the start of the variable display. On the shutter image 31AK061, an image of a fruit pattern including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In addition, when the shutter effect is performed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is performed and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is performed. When the shutter that has been closed is opened, the variable display of the decorative symbol is started as shown in FIG. Downward arrows indicate variable display of left, middle, and right symbols. When the variable display of the left symbol and the right symbol is temporarily stopped, as shown in FIG.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10-12 (d), the super reach effect is started. The variable display is, for example, displayed small in the upper right of the screen, and a character is displayed on the left side of the screen. At the lower right of the screen, a reach title image 31AK062 is displayed, and the contents of the super reach to be executed are shown as reach title display. In the reach title image 31AK062, a fruit pattern image including all the elements E1 to E5 is displayed. In the reach title image 31AK062, the characters "Battle Reach" indicating that a reach effect accompanied by a battle effect is executed are displayed.

  In addition, when the reach title effect is executed, the notification that the common sound (melody) is output by the speaker 8 is executed and the notification by the emission of the game effect lamp 9 is executed. Further, after outputting the common sound, an effect is executed in which the character emits a specific sound (voice) indicating that the hit reliability is high, such as "hot hot". Here, in the reach title effect, the size of the suggestion display to be displayed is smaller than in the shutter effect. However, in this way, in the reach title effect, by outputting the specific sound, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the fruit pattern image is displayed. Although the case where the common sound and the specific sound have completely separated output periods has been described, the output periods may partially overlap.

  Thereafter, a battle reach effect as shown in FIG. 10-12 (e) is executed. An enemy character is displayed on the left side of the screen, and an ally character is displayed on the right side of the screen. When the ally character wins the battle with the enemy character, the character “BATTLE WIN!” Is displayed at the upper left of the screen. It is announced that the jackpot has been confirmed by winning the battle. When the battle effect ends, the display returns to the variable display screen using the original numeric symbols. As shown in FIG. 10F, all the symbols are stopped and the big hit symbol of “777” is displayed.

  As shown in FIGS. 10-12 (a) and (d), both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 are displayed including all the elements E1 to E5 constituting the fruit pattern image. In this way, the fruit pattern image can be suitably displayed in both the shutter image 31AK061 and the reach title image 31AK062 having different display sizes. Thereby, it is possible to accurately convey that the fruit pattern image with a high jackpot reliability is displayed.

  The display size of the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 10-12 (a) is displayed larger than the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 10-12 (d). Therefore, the difference between the display size of the shutter image 31AK061 and the display size of the reach title image 31AK062 can be noticed.

  Also, the shutter image 31AK061 shown in FIG. 10A and the reach title image 31AK062 shown in FIG. 10D are displayed at different timings. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the fruit pattern image, which is the specific image, from being difficult to see due to the overlapping of the execution timings.

  The determination relating to the shutter effect (the presence or absence of the shutter effect and the effect mode) may be performed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 10-8. In that case, the determination regarding the shutter effect may be performed based on the determination result of the display color of the title in step 31AKS002 in FIG. 10-8. For example, when it is determined that the display color of the title is a fruit pattern, the shutter effect of the fruit pattern may be easily executed. Also, the determination regarding the reach title effect may be executed in step 31AKS004 in FIG. 10-8 together with the determination regarding the shutter effect.

[Explanation about the characteristic part 21TM]
Next, the characteristic portion 21TM will be described. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is mounted with various control boards such as a main board 11, an effect control board 12, and a terminal board (information output board) 21TM016 as shown in FIG. 11A. The pachinko gaming machine 1 is also provided with a relay board 15 for relaying various control signals transmitted between the main board 11 and the effect control board 12. In addition, various boards such as a payout control board, a launch control board, and an interface board are arranged on the back surface of the game board 2 and the like in the pachinko gaming machine 1.

  As shown in FIG. 2 described above, the main board 11 includes a first starting port switch 22A and a second starting port switch 22B, and a first special symbol display device 4A and a second special symbol display device 4B. Various components are connected, and various effect devices such as speakers 8L and 8R, game effect lamps 9 and the like are connected to the effect control board 12, but these devices are omitted in FIG. 11A.

  The main board 11 is a control board on the main side. As shown in FIG. 11C, the main board 11 is mounted on the back of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in a state of being housed in the board case 21TM201, and progresses the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1. Various circuits for control are mounted. The main board 11 is mainly addressed to a sub-side control board composed of a random number setting function used in a special game, a function of inputting a signal from a switch or the like disposed at a predetermined position, and an effect control board 12. A function of outputting and transmitting a control command as an example of command information as a control signal, a function of outputting various information to a hall management computer, and the like are provided. In addition, the main board 11 controls the lighting / extinguishing of each LED (for example, a segment LED) constituting the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display device 4B to perform the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Of the predetermined display symbol, such as controlling the variation display of the normal symbol, and controlling the variation display of the ordinary symbol by the ordinary symbol display 20 by performing lighting / off / coloring control of the ordinary symbol display 20. It also has a control function.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 11-3 and 11-5 (A), the main board 11 is provided with a display monitor 21TM029 which is visible from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and is provided on the display monitor 21TM029. It also has a function of displaying various winning information related to winning. A display changeover switch 21TM030 is provided on the left side of the display monitor 21TM029, and information displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 can be switched by operating the display changeover switch 21TM030.

  The main board 11 receives various signals such as a power-off signal, a clear signal, and a reset signal in addition to detection signals from, for example, the game control microcomputer 100 and various switches for detecting game balls, and the game control microcomputer. An information output circuit 112 for outputting various signals such as a security signal from the switch circuit 110 for transmission to the terminal 100 and the terminal board 21TM016 is mounted.

  The main board 11 shown in FIG. 11A is sealed in a board case 21TM201 made of a transparent synthetic resin material as shown in FIGS. 11-3 and 11-5 (A). A display monitor 21TM029 (for example, 7 segments) is arranged at the center of 11, and a display changeover switch 21TM030 is arranged on the right side of the display monitor 21TM029. The display monitor 21TM029 and the display changeover switch 21TM030 are arranged on the front when the main board 11 is viewed. A lock switch 21TM051 (see FIG. 11A) for switching to a setting change mode or a setting confirmation mode, which will be described later, is provided in the lower center of the rear surface of the main board 11. Since the main board 11 cannot be visually recognized in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 is not opened, the front face when viewing the main board 11 refers to the back side of the game board 2 in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 is opened. This is the front when viewing, and is different from the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the front when viewing the main board 11 and the front of the pachinko gaming machine 1 may be common.

  The main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100) has a winning opening (large winning opening, second starting winning opening, first starting winning opening, first to fourth general winning opening, hereinafter referred to as "entry area"). ), And the various kinds of winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning combination based on the counting are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and the winning information is displayed. Thereby, various winning information such as the connection ratio and the winning combination after the installation in the game hall can be confirmed. That is, on the maker side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, it is usual that the game board surface is designed so that the game ball enters the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency (so as to pass the test). When the test is performed, it is checked whether or not the game ball has entered the general winning opening at a predetermined frequency. Further, even after the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, it is confirmed what kind of adjustment has been made, and as a result of the adjustment, whether the game ball has entered the general winning opening as designed. Therefore, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment, it is possible to recognize what kind of adjustment has been made after the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been installed.

  The power supply board is enclosed in a board case made of a synthetic resin material having transparency. On the lower right side of the back of the power supply board, set values such as a jackpot winning probability (a payout rate) described later are changed. A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 functioning as a setting switch for power supply and a power switch 21TM055 are provided. By operating the power switch 21TM055 in a state where the power supply voltage is not supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a store clerk or the like at the amusement arcade operates the main control board 11, the game control board 12, the payout control board 21TM037, and so on. A predetermined operating voltage is supplied. Furthermore, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated at the timing when the power switch 21TM055 is operated, a clear signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100, and an initialization process (RAM clear) described later is performed. Be executed. By arranging the power switch 21TM055 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 close to each other on the same power supply board, the power-on operation and the initialization operation are facilitated.

  The lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and cannot be operated unless the gaming machine frame 3 which can be opened by a predetermined key operation is opened. Thus, only a clerk having a predetermined key can operate. In addition, since the lock switch 21TM051 requires key operation, among the store clerks of the amusement shop, only the store clerk having the key for operating the lock switch 21TM051 can be operated. The lock switch 21TM051 is a switch that can execute an ON / OFF switching operation by a predetermined key. The lock switch 21TM051 can execute the switching operation and execute an operation different from the switching operation (for example, a pressing operation). A possible switch may be used.

  The lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state. That is, the lock switch 21TM051 can maintain the ON state or the OFF state even if no force is applied by a store clerk or the like at the game arcade. The lock switch 21TM051 has a configuration in which a key can be inserted and removed only in the OFF state. According to such a configuration, the clerk at the game hall or the like must turn off the lock switch 21TM051 in order to collect the key. Can be prevented.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-3, the lower part of the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is provided for discharging the gaming balls that have won each winning opening and the gaming balls that have entered the out opening to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1. A nozzle (discharge port) is provided, and a discharge port switch 21TM070 for detecting a game ball discharged from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (detecting a shot game ball) is provided in the nozzle. ing. The outlet switch 21TM070 is connected to the above-described switch circuit 110 as shown in FIG.

  A control signal transmitted from the main board 11 toward the effect control board 12 is relayed by the relay board 15. The control command transmitted from the main board 11 to the effect control board 12 via the relay board 15 is, for example, an effect control command transmitted and received as an electric signal. The effect control commands include, for example, a display control command used to control an image display operation in the image display device 5, an audio control command used to control audio output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and a game effect lamp 9. And an LED control command used to control the lighting operation of the decoration LED and the like.

  FIG. 11B is a block diagram illustrating components related to payout, such as the payout control board 21TM037 and the ball payout device 21TM097. As shown in FIG. 11B, on the payout control board 21TM037, a payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including a payout control CPU 21TM371 is mounted. In this embodiment, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is a one-chip microcomputer and has at least a built-in RAM. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, a RAM (not shown), a ROM (not shown) storing a payout control program, an I / O port, and the like constitute a payout control board 21TM037. That is, the payout control board 21TM037 is realized by the payout control CPU 21TM371, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 having RAM and ROM, and the I / O port. Further, the I / O port may be built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The detection signals from the ball out switch 21TM187, the full tank switch 21TM048, and the payout number count switch 21TM301 are input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the payout number count switch 21TM301 is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and then is output to the main board 11 via the I / O port 21TM372a and the output circuit 21TM373B. .

  As shown in FIG. 11B, the payout control board 21TM037 has a game machine frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the game machine frame 3 for supporting and fixing the game board 2, and the front face of the game board 2 can be opened and closed. And a door frame opening sensor 21TM300 having a door frame opening sensor for detecting the opening of the glass door frame 3a to be covered by the sensor, and various abnormalities are detected based on detection signals output from these sensors. It also has a function to determine the occurrence of (error). The detection signal when the opening of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected and the detection signal when the opening of the glass door frame 3a is detected are input to different terminals, so that the payout control microcomputer is input. 21TM370 is capable of recognizing the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 and the open state of the glass door frame 3a separately.

  The detection signal from the payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is input to the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. The payout motor position sensor 21TM295 is a sensor including a light emitting element (LED) and a light receiving element for detecting the rotational position of the payout motor 21TM289, and is used to detect that a game ball is clogged, that is, to detect a so-called ball bite. . The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 indicates that the detection signal from the ball-out switch 21TM187 indicates the ball-out state, or the detection signal from the full-state switch 21TM048 indicates the full-state. Then, the ball payout process is stopped.

  Further, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 21TM048 indicates the full tank state, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the low level to the firing board 21TM090 in order to stop the ball firing from the hit ball firing device. Outputs a full signal. The firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 output from the AND circuit 21TM091 of the firing board 21TM090 is transmitted from the firing board 21TM090 to the firing motor 21TM094. A full signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is input to one of the input sides of an AND circuit 21TM091 mounted on the launch board 21TM090, and a drive signal from the drive signal generation circuit 21TM092 (for driving the launch motor 21TM094). Signal, which serves to supply power from the power supply board.) Is input to the other of the input sides of the AND circuit 21TM091. Then, the firing motor signal of the AND circuit 21TM091 is input to the firing motor 21TM094. That is, while the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is outputting the full signal, the output of the firing motor signal to the firing motor 21TM094 is stopped.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for inputting / outputting (transmitting / receiving) signals through serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is established between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuits 21TM505 and 21TM380. In order to perform confirmation, signals (prize ball request signals and received ACK signals) are exchanged (transmitted and received) at regular intervals (for example, one second). That is, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a signal (prize ball request signal in this embodiment) for confirming the connection at regular intervals via the serial communication circuit 21TM505, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 When the prize ball request signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, the signal transmits a signal (received ACK signal) notifying the reception to the game control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, specific data is added to the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal, so that the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can transmit and receive the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal. And specific data is exchanged between them. For example, when a prize is generated, the game control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out by changing predetermined bits of a prize ball request signal, and sets the prize for which the setting has been made. The ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 completes the prize ball payout operation, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the data indicating the end of the prize ball by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal, and transmits the set received ACK signal to the game. It is transmitted to the control microcomputer 100. When a predetermined error (error such as lending, filling up, or running out of ball) occurs, data indicating the content of the error is set by changing a predetermined bit of the received ACK signal. The received reception ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. It should be noted that a specific signal exchange by serial communication between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 11-22 and FIGS.

   The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits, via the output port 21TM372b, a prize ball information signal indicating the number of prize balls to be paid out and a ball lending number signal indicating the number of lending balls to a terminal board (an external terminal board for a frame and an external terminal board for a board). Is output to 21TM160. Note that a driver circuit is provided outside the output port 21TM372b, but is not shown in FIG. 11B.

  Further, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 outputs an error signal to the error display LED 21TM374 using a 7-segment LED via the output port 21TM372c. Further, a signal for instructing turning on / off is output to prize ball LED21TM053 and ball out LED21TM054 via output port 21TM372b. The detection signal from the error release switch 21TM375 for releasing the error state is input to the input port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037. The error release switch 21TM375 is used to release an error state by software reset.

  Further, the drive signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 to the payout motor 21TM289 is transmitted to the payout motor 21TM289 in the payout mechanism of the ball payout device 21TM097 via the output port 21TM372a and the relay board 21TM072. Although a driver circuit (motor drive circuit) is provided outside the output port 21TM372a, it is omitted in FIG. 11-3.

  A card unit control microcomputer is mounted on the card unit 21TM050 installed adjacent to the gaming machine. Further, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a usable indicator lamp, a connecting stand direction indicator, a card insertion indicator lamp, and a card insertion slot. A frequency display LED 21TM060, a ball lending enable LED 21TM061, a ball lending switch 21TM062, and a return switch 21TM063 are connected to the interface board (relay board) 21TM066.

  From the interface board 21TM066, the card unit 21TM050 is provided with a ball rental switch signal indicating that the ball rental switch 21TM062 has been operated and a return switch signal indicating that the return switch 21TM063 has been operated in response to the operation of the player. . In addition, a card balance display signal indicating the balance of the prepaid card and a ball lending permission display signal are given from the card unit 21TM050 to the interface board 21TM066. Between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037, a connection signal (VL signal), a unit operation signal (BRDY signal), a ball lending request signal (BRQ signal), a ball lending completion signal (EXS signal), and a pachinko machine operation signal ( PRDY signal) is transmitted and received via the input port 21TM372f and the output port 21TM372d. An interface board 21TM066 is interposed between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037. Therefore, a signal such as a connection signal (VL signal) is transmitted and received between the card unit 21TM050 and the payout control board 21TM037 via the interface board 21TM066, as shown in FIG. 11B.

  When the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 mounted on the payout control board 21TM037 outputs a PRDY signal to the card unit 21TM050. When the power is turned on, the card unit control microcomputer outputs a VL signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 determines the connection state / non-connection state of the card unit 21TM050 based on the input state of the VL signal. When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the microcomputer for controlling the card unit outputs a BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037. When a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the microcomputer for controlling the card unit outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 raises the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050, and when detecting the fall of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to send a predetermined number of loaned balls to the player. Pay out. When the payout is completed, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. Thereafter, under the condition that the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 is not in the ON state, when a payout command signal is received from the game control microcomputer 100, award ball payout control is executed.

  The power supply voltage AC24V used in the card unit 21TM050 is supplied from the payout control board 21TM037. That is, power supply from the power supply board to the card unit 21TM050 is performed via the payout control board 21TM037 and the interface board 21TM066. In this example, a fuse for protecting the card unit 21TM050 is provided in a power supply line of 24V AC to the card unit 21TM050 provided in the interface board 21TM066, and a voltage higher than a predetermined voltage is supplied to the card unit 21TM050. Is prevented.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 of this embodiment has a configuration in which a jackpot winning probability (payout rate) changes according to a set value. More specifically, in a special symbol normal process of a special symbol process process to be described later, a jackpot winning probability (a payout ratio) is changed by using a display result determination table (winning probability) corresponding to a set value. . The set value is made up of six steps of 1 to 6, where 6 is the highest payout rate, and the lower the value in the order of 6, 5, 4, 3, 2, 1 the lower the payout rate. That is, when 6 is set as the set value, the advantage is highest for the player, and as the value decreases in the order of 5, 4, 3, 2, 1, the advantage gradually decreases.

  FIGS. 11A to 11F are explanatory diagrams illustrating display result determination tables corresponding to the respective set values. The display result determination table is a set of data stored in the ROM 101, and is a table in which a hit determination value to be compared with MR1 is set. In each of the display result determination tables, the variable special figure designating buffer is 1 (first), that is, the first special symbol is a target of the variable display, and the variable special figure designating buffer is 2 (second). That is, for each of the cases where the second special symbol is subjected to the variable display, the determination value for the big hit is set.

  As shown in FIG. 11-4 (A), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 1, the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, that is, the first special symbol is the target of the variable display. , The jackpot is won with a lower probability (1/300) than when the set values are “2”, “3”, “4”, “5”, and “6”. ing. Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also subject to variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/300) as when the first special symbol is targeted for variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (B), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 2 and the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in a certain case. Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the target of variable display.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (C), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 3, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/280) than in the case of "2". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/280) as when the first special symbol is the target of variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11D, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 4 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/250) than in the case of "2" or "3". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/250) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-4 (E), when using the display result determination table corresponding to the setting value 5, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the setting value is “1”, The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/235) than in the case of "2", "3", and "4". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/235) as the case where the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11F, when the display result determination table corresponding to the set value 5 is used, if the variable special figure designation buffer is the first, the set value is “1”. The jackpot is won with a higher probability (1/220) than in the case of "2", "3", "4", and "5". Further, when the variable special figure designating buffer is the second, the same judgment value as when the variable special figure designating buffer is the first is set as the judgment value corresponding to the big hit, and the second special symbol is set. Is also the subject of the variable display, the big hit is won with the same probability (1/220) as when the first special symbol is the target of the variable display.

  That is, the CPU 103 refers to the display result determination table corresponding to the set value set at that time, and determines whether the value of MR1 corresponds to one of the big hits shown in FIGS. If it matches the hit determination value, the special symbol is determined to be a big hit (big hit A to big hit F). That is, the winning of the jackpot is determined with a probability according to the set value. The “probability” shown in FIGS. 11-4 (A) to (F) indicates the probability (ratio) of a big hit. To determine whether or not to make a big hit means to determine whether or not to control to a big hit game state, but to determine whether to stop the symbols in the first special symbol display device 4A or the second special symbol display device 4B. It is also to decide whether to make a big hit symbol.

  Further, in this embodiment, the CPU 103 determines whether or not to make a big hit using the display result determination tables shown in FIGS. 11A to 11F. Separately provided, the jackpot determination is performed using a common table in the case of the variable display of the first special symbol and the case of the variable display of the second special symbol regardless of the variable special figure designation buffer. Is also good.

  In this embodiment, a total of six setting values 1 to 6 are provided as setting values that can be set in the pachinko gaming machine 1. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, or 7 or more.

  Here, a description will be given of the display of the total of the game balls and the ratio of the accessory, etc. on the main board 11 of this embodiment.

  The main board 11 has information on winning of a game, for example, the number of prize balls by winning the first starting winning opening (navel), the number of winning balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the large winning opening. The number of prize balls and the total number of prize balls due to winning in the (Attacker) are input, and the number of firing balls are totaled. Percentage (%), which is the percentage of the total prize balls, and the percentage of the total number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (Den Chu) and the number of prize balls by winning in the large winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of prize balls A base ratio (%), which is a ratio of a certain combination (%) and a ratio of the total number of award balls to the number of game balls launched, is displayed. The repetition ratio is a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls (the number of continuous character-acquired balls described below) due to a prize in a large winning opening (attacker). The winning combination is the number of winning balls in the second starting winning opening (denchu) and the number of winning balls in the winning opening (attacker) out of the total number of winning balls (the following number of winning balls). Is the percentage that is accounted for. The base is the ratio of the number of game balls launched to the total number of prize balls. The total number of prize balls (the total number of balls obtained as described below) includes the number of prize balls by winning in the big winning opening (attacker), the number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (denchu), and the large winning opening. (Attacker) and the total number of prize balls by winning a prize port (first start prize port, general prize port) other than the second start prize port (electric chute). The special winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are variable characters, and the passing ratio of the game balls varies, so that the expected winning ratio of the game balls varies. is there. In addition, the winning openings (first starting winning opening, general winning opening) other than the large winning opening (attacker) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are fixed auditors, and the passable width of the game ball is fixed. As a result, the expected winning percentage of the game balls is a fixed character.

  As a method of totaling and calculating information on winning of the game, the connection ratio and the winning ratio are determined by winning the first starting winning opening (navel) and the general winning opening (sode) in the number of winning balls of 6000 pieces. The number of balls (general prize balls), the number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (Den Chu), the number of ordinary electric prize balls (den Chu balls), and winning in the big winning opening (attacker) The number of special electric prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls), which is the number of prize balls, is counted. The total is taken as one set, and the connection ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) for 10 sets, that is, 60000 pieces are calculated. The number of prize balls (general prize balls), the number of ordinary electric prize prize balls (the number of prize balls), and the special telephone The number of role prize balls (the number of attacker prize balls) is recorded in a ring buffer provided for each set value, has a recording capacity of at least 11 sets, and is updated for each set. ing. In other words, the storage of 11 sets of 6000 pieces is stored in a considerable amount (for example, several bytes), and the cumulative ratio (%) and the winning combination (%) of the totals can be calculated. As for the base, the number of launched game balls with respect to the number of 60000 awarded balls is totaled. The total is taken as one set, and the ratio (base (%)) of 60,000 prize balls to the number of launched game balls is calculated.

  The display monitor 21TM029 displays the base ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), the total connection ratio (%), the combination ratio (%), and the last calculated 6000 prize balls (6000). The base 1 (%)) and the base (base 2 (%)) calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls can be switched and displayed every predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). That is, six displays are switched and displayed by one display means. In this case, it takes 30 seconds to complete the display, but the number of prize balls due to winning in the first starting winning opening (navel) and the second starting winning opening (electric chew) are counted as the game progresses. The number of prize balls due to winning, and the number of prize balls due to winning a large winning opening (attacker) will change. If, for example, the prize balls won after displaying the repetition ratio (%) for 6000 are reflected in the winning ratio (%) for 60,000 displayed thereafter, for example, There is a possibility that a discrepancy may occur between the connection ratio (%) and the combination ratio (%) of 60000 pieces. Therefore, the number of award balls by winning the first starting winning opening (navel), the number of award balls by winning the second starting winning opening (electric chew), the number of award balls by winning a large winning opening (attacker), the award ball Such a discrepancy can be prevented by inputting and summing the total number at a predetermined timing in the switching display (for example, a display timing of a connection ratio (%) of 6000 pieces).

  In this embodiment, a storage area for storing information related to a game winning is provided for each set value, and includes a general winning prize ball, a first starting winning prize ball, a normal electric winning prize ball, and a special electric winning. The prize balls, the total prize balls, and the total hits are stored in a storage area (ring buffer) corresponding to the set value. For this reason, the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base in this embodiment can be individually calculated for each set value.

  In the following, as an example of the calculation method, the total number of prize balls is 60,000, and the number of prize balls by winning in the second starting winning opening (denchu) and the number of winning balls by winning in the large winning opening (attacker) are described below. A method of calculating the ratio of the bonuses (ratio (%)) when the total number of the bonuses acquired balls is 42,000 will be described. In the following description, the total number of acquired balls refers to the total cumulative number of game media (prize balls) paid out from the pachinko gaming machine 1. In addition, the number of obtained ball is the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins the attacker and the electric chew. In addition, the number of continuous role-acquiring balls refers to the cumulative number of game media paid out when the game media wins the attacker. The total hits refers to the cumulative number of game media hit into the pachinko gaming machine 1 until the number of prize balls reaches 60000. For this reason, the connection ratio can be obtained by the following equation (1). Further, the winning combination can be obtained by the following equation (2). The base can be obtained by the following equation (3).

  Connection ratio = [Number of consecutive bonus balls acquired / Total number of acquisitions] × 100 (1)

  Role ratio = [(number of consecutive role-acquired balls + number of role-acquired balls) / total number of acquired] × 100 (2)

  Base = [60000 (total number of prize balls) / total hits] x 100 ... (3)

  In the case where the total number of prize balls is 60000 and the number of obtained bonus balls is 42,000, the bonus ratio is obtained as 0.70 (three digits after the decimal point are cut off) by dividing 42,000 by 60000. However, since the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 cannot perform calculations below the decimal point, calculations using the following method are required.

  First, the first calculation method will be described. In the first calculation method, first, the number of the accessory acquisition balls is multiplied by 100 to be 4200000. Then, this 4200000 is divided by 60000. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by multiplying the dividend by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be multiplied by 1000.

  Next, a second calculation method will be described. In the second calculation method, first, the total number of prize balls is divided by 100 to be 600. Then, 42000 is divided by 600. As a result, 70 is obtained as a quotient. From the 70 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 70%. That is, by dividing the divisor by 100, the calculation result up to two decimal places can be obtained. Here, when calculating the calculation result up to three digits after the decimal point, the calculation result may be divided by 1000.

  In the above example, the total number of prize balls is 60000, but a three-byte area is provided as an area for storing the total number of prize balls in order to calculate a long-lived bonus ratio. That is, in this example, 00EA60h is stored in the 3-byte storage area. Similarly, 00A410h is also stored in the storage area of 3 bytes for the number of the accessory acquisition balls.

  Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform an operation between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method that is performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower one byte 60h is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, so that the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, so that the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can easily calculate. 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower one byte 10h is rounded down to 00A410h of the number of the accessory acquisition balls, and the number of the accessory acquisition balls is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In the third calculation method, while the calculation by the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 is facilitated, an error of + 12% occurs. However, the error when the total number of prize balls and the number of obtained ball are 10 times is + 1%. In other words, the error is reduced as the period for calculating the accessory ratio becomes longer, and the error approximates to the original value.

The board case 21TM201 is formed of a material having a light-transmitting property so that the main board 11 and the display monitor 21TM029 are visible. The board case 21TM201 has a hole (not shown) through which a wiring connector connected to the main board 11 is inserted, and a heat radiating hole for releasing heat of electric components of the main board 11. The display monitor 21TM029 provided on the main board 11 is arranged at a position where the heat radiation hole is not directly in front. For this reason, the visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is not blocked by the heat radiating holes. Here, “directly in front” means directly in front of the main board 11 as a viewpoint, and means between an employee or the like who wants to view the main board 11 and the main board 11.
Here, the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can only perform an operation between values of a maximum of 2 bytes. Therefore, the lower one byte may be truncated to facilitate the operation.

  Here, a third calculation method that is performed by simplifying the second calculation method will be described. In the third calculation method, the lower one byte 60h is rounded down to 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, so that the total number of prize balls is 00EAh, that is, 00EA60h of the total number of prize balls, so that the microcomputer used in the pachinko gaming machine 1 can easily calculate. 234 is calculated in decimal notation. Similarly, the lower one byte 10h is rounded down to 00A410h of the number of the accessory acquisition balls, and the number of the accessory acquisition balls is calculated as 00A4h, that is, 164 in decimal notation.

  Then, similarly to the second calculation method, 2 is calculated by dividing the total number of winning balls by 100 (273/100). Then, 156 is divided by 2 to obtain 78 as a quotient. From the 78 obtained here, the accessory ratio is obtained as 78%.

  In addition, a storage area in which information on game winning is stored (ring buffer, 10 sets total buffer (sum of information on game winning stored in a ring buffer provided with 10 counters of up to 2 bytes), award ball The total number buffer) may not be initialized when the reset button is operated, and may be stored continuously. The ring buffer will be further described later. It should be noted that the checksum of the stored value is calculated, and initialization is performed when an abnormality is detected. Initialization of the storage area for storing information related to the winning of the game when an event that cannot occur as a situation is detected, such as when the value of the number of consecutive bonus balls obtained is larger than the value of the number of balls obtained. Processing may be performed. Further, an error display, a warning display, or the like may be performed without performing the initialization process, or the error display or the warning display may be performed, or the initialization process may be performed after the display. The error display and the warning display will be further described later.

  The calculation of the winning combination (%) is, for example, assuming that the total number of acquired balls is 34321 and the number of acquired items is 19876, the divisor is divided by 19321 to 34321 to calculate the ratio. 19876/34321 = 0.57912... It is calculated that the winning combination (%) is about 57.9%. When performing calculations in the game control microcomputer 100, calculations with decimal points must be avoided, and therefore, the following formulas are used. In the division of 19876/34321, the denominator 34321 is divided by 100, and the decimal point is truncated to be 19876/343 = 57.9475. Since the fractional part is rounded down, it is calculated to be 57% of the duty ratio (%) and is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. In this example, the value calculated by the accurate calculation is different from the value calculated by the accurate calculation on the display. There will be no.

  The minimum value in 16 bits is 32768 (the value other than the value of the most significant bit is 0), and the value with the largest error is when the total number of acquired balls and the number of accessory acquired balls are 32799. If this is calculated by the above method, 32799/32799 = 100%, and if it is replaced with the calculation by the game control microcomputer 100, 32799/327 = 100.3%, an error of + 0.3% is obtained. When the calculation is performed with the decimal point truncated, for example, the accurate value is 69.9%, and when the value calculated by the game control microcomputer is 70.1%, the display is changed from 69% to 70% by 1%. Although it is conceivable that an error of% is displayed, the combination ratio (%) (or the connection ratio (%)) can be displayed with a very small error on the display of the error of 1%.

  When the above calculation method is used, since the total number of obtained balls is divided by 100, the calculation cannot be performed if the total number of obtained balls is less than 100. Further, the error gradually increases even when the value is less than 32768. If it is less than 10,000, the error may exceed 1% and may be even larger. In other words, the smaller the total number of acquired balls, the larger the error. Therefore, until the total number of acquired balls equal to or more than a specific number (for example, 32768 which is the minimum value of 16 bits) is counted by the counter, the display ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are not displayed on the display monitor. Even if the display is performed, the fact that there is a possibility that the error is large may be notified by emitting a dedicated LED, outputting a notification sound, or blinking the displayed value.

  Further, the display monitor 21TM029 displays the combination ratio (%), the connection ratio (%), and the base (%) on seven segments, and switches each value every predetermined period (for example, every 5 seconds). To display. In this case, for example, while the position ratio (%) is displayed for 5 seconds, an event occurs in which a game medium newly wins in the electric chute or the attacker, and the value calculated accordingly changes the ratio ( %), The value of the winning combination (%) may be different from the value of the consecutive winning (%). For this reason, it is preferable that the combination ratio (%) and the connection ratio (%) are calculated within the same interrupt and the calculated values are sequentially displayed.

  Also, when the numerical value that can be displayed in seven segments is two digits (for example, when two seven segments are provided), 100% cannot be displayed as 100. In this case, 99 may be displayed instead of 100. In the display monitor 21TM029 shown in FIG. 11-5 (A), a numerical value can be displayed in the lower two digits, but in this case, the numerical value may be displayed without using the upper two digits. Alternatively, a numerical value may be displayed in a part of the upper two digits under a specific condition.

  In this embodiment, an example has been described in which a sensor provided in each of the attacker and the electric chew detects that a game medium has won, and the number of award balls is individually counted based on the detection result. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and uses a sensor provided after a discharge passage for discharging a game medium that has won the attacker and a game medium that has won the electric chew has been used, and the detection result is used as the detection result. On the basis of this, the number of the acquired accessory balls and the number of the consecutive accessory acquired balls may be totaled.

  Hereinafter, the display of the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base will be described more specifically. In this embodiment, the main board 11 is provided on the back side of the game board 2 (see FIG. 11-3). On the back side of the gaming board 2, in addition to the main board 11, peripheral boards such as an effect control board 12 are also provided.

  The RAM 102 on the main board 11 includes a gate passing number counter, a first starting winning number counter, a second starting winning number counter, a first general winning number counter, a second general winning number counter, a third general winning number counter, and a fourth general winning number counter. A general winning number counter and a large winning number counter are provided. In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the number of winnings of a special winning opening (attacker) is counted by a special winning number counter. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and these first special winnings are not limited to this. A first grand prize counter for counting the number of prizes to the mouth and a second grand prize counter for counting the number of prizes to the second grand prize are separately provided, and the number of prizes to the first grand prize is determined. And the number of winnings in the second big winning opening may be separately totalized, and the respective winning numbers may be summed up to be the number of winnings in the attacker.

  The gate passage number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the gate switch 21. The first start winning number counter is a counter that counts the number of game balls detected by the first start port switch 22A. The second start winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the second start port switch 22B. The first general winning number counter to the fourth general winning number counter are counters for counting the number of game balls detected by the first general winning opening switch to the fourth general winning opening switch. The large winning number counter is a counter for counting the number of game balls detected by the count switch 23.

  A clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is connected to the power supply board shown in FIG. 11-3. The clear switch 21TM052 is arranged on the rear side surface of the game board 2 at a position where an employee or the like cannot easily operate it. By operating the clear switch 21TM052, the data used for the connection ratio and the combination stored in the RAM 102 described later is cleared. The clear switch is a switch which is operated when a situation arises in which the calculation of the ratio or the combination of the ratios has to be performed again, for example, when a failure occurs in the calculation of the ratio or the ratio of the ratios in 21TM052. For this reason, this switch does not need to be operated when collecting data for calculating a normal connection ratio or a winning combination. When the clear switch 21TM052 is operated, a clear switch operation signal is transmitted to the main board 11 in addition to clearing the data.

  As described above, the main board 11 is provided with the RTC 106, and the RTC 106 can detect the current time. The RTC 106 can measure a predetermined time, elapsed time, and the like by performing the initial setting. In this embodiment, the RTC 106 can measure the business hours of the game hall.

  The main board 11 is housed in a board case 21TM201 as shown in FIG. The caulking pin 21TM011B is attached to the board case 21TM201. With the provision of the caulking pins 21TM011B, the main board 11 is completely sealed in the board case 21TM201, thereby preventing improper acts on the main board 11. The board case 21TM201 is a swaged board case (hereinafter also referred to as a "swage board case").

  The display monitor 21TM029 is provided on the main board 11. Further, a sealing seal 21TM011S for proving that the main substrate 11 is sealed is attached to the substrate case 21TM201. The sealing seal 21TM011S is affixed, for example, across the removed portion of the board case 21TM201. The seal 21TM011S is arranged at a position distant from the main substrate 11, and is arranged at a position different from a position where visibility of the display monitor 21TM029 is blocked, such as directly in front of the display monitor 21TM029. As described above, the display monitor 21TM029 is arranged at a position which is not hidden by the seal 21TM011S.

  The display monitor 21TM029 includes a first display unit 21TM029A, a second display unit 21TM029B, a third display unit 21TM029C, a fourth display unit 21TM029D, and a fifth display unit 21TM029E. Each of the first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E is composed of seven segments composed of seven segments that draw the character “8” and dots arranged at the lower right side of the seven segments. The first display unit 21TM029A to the fifth display unit 21TM029E can be lit and blinked in various colors, for example, red, blue, green, yellow, white, and the like. In addition, these colors can be displayed in different colors or so-called rainbows while being changed in a very short cycle.

  On the display monitor 21TM029, items of display Nos. 1 to 6 shown in FIG. 11-5 (B) are displayed. The first display unit 21TM029A in the first digit displays the totaled set values (1 to 6) and a RAM clear notification (“C”) indicating that the RAM clear executed by the CPU 103 after the processing of the setting change mode has been completed. ) Is displayed, the totaling period is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B of the second digit and the third display unit 21TM029C of the third digit, the fourth display unit 21TM029D of the fourth digit, and the fifth display unit of the fifth digit 21TM029E displays a numerical value as a percentage. In display No. 1, a short-term connection ratio is displayed, and in display No. 2, a short-term winning ratio is displayed. In the display No. 3, the total ratio is displayed, and in the display No. 4, the total winning combination is displayed. Also, in display No. 5, a base (base 1) calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed, and in display No. 6, a base (base 2) calculated based on 60000 previous prize balls is displayed. Is done.

  Here, the short term refers to a period in which the number of awarded balls (acquired balls) is 6000. The period for obtaining the total sum means the total period after starting the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio, or the total period after resetting the calculation of the ratio and the winning ratio once.

  In the above example, the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base are calculated without depending on the game state, but may be calculated in consideration of the game state. For example, the connection ratio may be a percentage of the total number of prize balls occupied by the number of prize balls due to winning in the special winning opening in the jackpot game state. The winning combination is defined as a ratio of the total number of prize balls to the number of prize balls due to winning in the second starting winning opening during the high base state and the number of prize balls due to winning to the large winning opening during the jackpot game state. Is also good. Further, the base may be calculated separately for the low base state and the high base state.

  When the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, “y6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the short-term duty ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed, the second display unit 21TM029B is displayed. “Y7.” Is displayed on the display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed, the short-term connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the short-term combination ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. In this case, the short-term winning combination is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the total cumulative ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed, “A6.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed, “A7.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the total cumulative combination of the display No. 4 is displayed. When the ratio is displayed, the total cumulative winning combination ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, “bL.” Is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C, and when the base 2 of the display No. 4 is displayed, the second display unit is displayed. “B6.” Is displayed on the 21TM029B and the third display unit 21TM029C. When the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed, the total cumulative connection ratio is displayed as a percentage (% display) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E, and the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed. In this case, the total cumulative winning combination is displayed as a percentage (in%) on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  In calculating the connection ratio, the winning ratio, and the base, the main board 11 enters the large winning opening (attacker), the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, and the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening. The number of entered game balls and the number of game balls discharged from the outlet are counted. In the main process, the CPU 103 controls the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the first to fourth general winning opening switches to the fourth general winning opening switch and the outlet switch 21TM070. A switch process for checking the state of each switch (the presence or absence of a detection signal) is performed.

  In this switch process, it is specified which entry area the game ball has entered based on the detection signal output from each switch. Then, when the detection signal is output from the gate switch 21, the value of the gate passage number counter is added, and when the detection signal is output from the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, The values of the first start winning number counter and the second start winning number counter are added, and when the detection signal is output from the count switch 23, the value of the large winning number counter is added, and the first general winning opening switch, When the detection signals are output from the second general winning opening switch, the third general winning opening switch, and the fourth general winning opening switch, the first general winning number counter, the second general winning number counter, and the third general winning number are output. The values of the counter and the fourth general winning number counter are added, and when a detection signal is output from the outlet switch 21TM070, the value of the driving number counter is added, whereby each entry area is added. Aggregate of entering the number of game balls (the winning number of game balls to each of the winning openings). The value of each counter is stored in the RAM 102.

  As described above, the step of counting the number of game balls entering each entry area is also executed in a series of processing for confirming the state of the switch corresponding to each entry area (switch state confirmation processing. (Included in the switch processing), it is possible to count the number of game balls entering each entry area without having to execute a separate counting program, that is, without causing a problem of insufficient capacity due to an increase in the number of execution programs. It has become.

  The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the number of prize balls by winning in each winning opening based on the total number of game balls winning in each winning opening, and stores the calculated number of winning balls in the RAM 102 for each winning opening. Let it. The number of prize balls obtained by winning a game ball is calculated by multiplying the number of game balls paid out by one prize to the prize port by the number of wins to the prize port. The number of prize balls obtained by winning game balls is predetermined for each winning port.

  As shown in FIG. 11-6, the number of prize balls for each prize port divided here is a prize ball for a prize ball for a general prize port prize ball (first general prize port to fourth general prize port (sode)). ), 1st starting winning opening prize ball (winning prize ball in the 1st starting winning opening (navel)), ordinary electric prize prize ball (winning prize ball in electric chu), special electric prize winning ball (to attacker Prize balls). The RAM 102 also stores the total number of prize balls and the number of hit game balls. Note that the CPU 103 separately counts the number of game balls won to the general winning opening and the number of game balls won to the first starting winning opening. The number of game ball winnings to the winning opening may be summed up. In addition, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize ball and the number of prize balls of the first starting winning prize ball are separately calculated. The number of award balls may be calculated together.

  The RAM 102 includes a ring buffer and an active buffer for storing the number of hit balls and the number of hits. The ring buffer includes ten first to tenth storage areas each having a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of winning balls in each winning opening for each of the 6,000 winning balls. As described above, the ring buffer has a storage area of a predetermined unit (up to 2 bytes). The active buffer has a 0-th storage area composed of a maximum 2-byte counter for storing the number of prize balls by winning in each winning port for every 6000 prize balls. In the 0th storage area, the number of prize balls for each winning opening that increases as the game progresses is added. The eleven storage areas from the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area can store 256 × 256 = 65536 data, and up to 6000 data can be stored with a margin.

  Further, the RAM 102 is provided with a storage area for each of the winning ports, the sum of the prize balls (for 10 sets) and the number of hits stored in the first storage area to the tenth storage area, and the total sum. I have. The storage area for the total of 10 sets and the total total is composed of a counter of a maximum of 3 bytes. Therefore, 256 × 256 × 256 = 16777216 data can be stored, and up to 60000 data can be stored with a margin. I can remember.

  Further, the RAM 102 has an association ratio storage area for storing the combination ratio and the connection ratio of the 10 sets and the total total, the base of the 10 sets (base 2) and the base of the previous 10 sets (base 1). And a base storage area for storing The CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the winning combination and the total ratio of the 10 sets and the total total based on the winning number based on the winning number of the game balls to each winning port of the 10 sets and the total total, and calculates the 10 sets and the total ratio. And a total winning combination storage area for storing the total winning combination and the connection ratio. The connection ratio storage area for storing the combination ratios and the connection ratios of the 10 sets and the total total is configured by a counter of a maximum of 1 byte. When the combination ratio and the connection ratio of the 10 sets and the total total are stored in, for example, integers, they can be stored with a margin by a maximum 1-byte counter.

  Further, the CPU 103 of the main board 11 calculates the base of 10 sets based on the number of hits of the game balls into the respective winning openings of 10 sets, and calculates the base of the 10 sets (base 2) and the last time. The base (base 1) calculated from the number of hits of the game balls into the respective winning openings for each of the ten sets is stored in the base storage area. When the bases 1 and 2 are to be stored, for example, as integers, they can be stored with a margin with a maximum 1-byte counter.

  Here, the memory space of the CPU 103 on the main board 11 will be described. FIG. 11-7 is a diagram showing a memory map of the CPU on the main board. The CPU 103 has a memory space for accessing the above-described internal registers, the ROM 101, the RAM 102, and the like. More specifically, as shown in the memory map of FIG. 11-7, the address / data signal lines of the ROM 101 correspond to the ROM area of the memory space (in this embodiment, 0000H to 2FFFH (H indicates a hexadecimal number. 0000H to 2FBFH, 2FC0H to 2FFFH are assigned to a program management area), and the CPU 103 reads out data from the ROM 101 by designating the ROM area. In this embodiment, the ROM area is managed by dividing it into eight areas of a first area to an eighth area, and the first area is an area starting from 0000H.

  The address / data signal line of the built-in register is allocated to a register area (FE00H to FEBFH in this embodiment) of the memory space, and the CPU 103 reads out data from the built-in register and transfers data to the register via this register area. Is written.

  The address / data signal lines of the RAM 102 are allocated to RWM areas (F000H to F3FFH in this embodiment) of the memory space. Write data. Note that the other areas of the memory space (in this embodiment, 3000H to EFFFH, F400H to FDFFH, FEC0H to FFFFH) are unused areas.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-8, a RAM area corresponding to a storage area of the RAM 102 (a 16 Kbyte area of 0000H to 2FFFH) corresponds to a RAM control area, a non-use area, a RAM data area, and other areas. It is composed of In a storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM control area, instruction data (opcode) corresponding to each of a plurality of types of instructions executed by the CPU 103 and supplementary data (operand) necessary for the CPU 103 to execute each instruction are stored. The data for the configured control program (which may be simply referred to as control program data) is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the RAM data area, and the reference data referred to by the control program is stored in the storage area. (For example, the various lottery data described above) are temporarily stored.

  Further, data used for displaying the connection ratio and the winning combination is temporarily stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the unused area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas. For example, the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area is provided with a storage area for storing the total sum of the number of winning balls for each winning opening and a storage area for the total combination of the winning combinations. The storage areas of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas include an active buffer having a zero storage area for each winning opening, a ring buffer having first to tenth storage areas, and the number of prize balls (10 sets) for each winning opening. ), And a storage area for 10 sets. In the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the non-use area and the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to the other areas, data having different subroutine start addresses are stored.

  In this embodiment, 1-byte (8-bit) data can be stored in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to each address of the RAM area, and the above-mentioned data (instruction data, supplementary data, reference data) can be stored. , Management data) is data having a number of bytes exceeding 1 byte (for example, 2 bytes), the data is divided and stored for each byte in the storage area of the RAM 102 corresponding to a plurality of consecutive addresses in the RAM control area. are doing.

  The main board 11 controls the display monitor 21TM029 to display the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base. Here, the main board 11 performs control for sequentially displaying a plurality of items. FIG. 11-9 (A) is a time chart showing the display time of items displayed on the accessory ratio display device. As shown in FIG. 11A, when the display on the display monitor 21TM029 is started, first, the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is displayed in green. In the display of the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-1), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. Further, the short-term connection ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the short-term connection ratio is 41%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “1.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 1 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term role ratio of the display No. 2 is displayed. The display of the short-term connection ratio of display No. 2 is displayed in red. In the display of the short-term duty ratio of the display No. 2, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-2), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “y” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E display the short-term role ratio. For example, when the short-term role ratio is 63%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “3.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 2 is continued for 5 seconds, the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3 is displayed in red. In the display of the total cumulative connection ratio of the display No. 3, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-3), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "6." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E display the total cumulative connection ratio. For example, when the total cumulative connection ratio is 58%, the character “5.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 3 continues for 5 seconds, the total total winning combination of the display No. 4 is displayed. The display of the total cumulative combination ratio of the display No. 4 is displayed in red. In the display of the total total winning combination of the display No. 4, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-4), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “A” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. Is displayed, and the character "7." is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The total display ratio is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the total cumulative combination ratio is 68%, the character “6.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “8.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  When the display of the display No. 4 continues for 5 seconds, the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-5). The display of the base 1 of the display No. 5 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 1 of the display No. 5, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-5), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The character is displayed, and the character “L.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. The base 1 calculated based on the previous 60000 prize balls is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. For example, when the base 1 is 40%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “0.” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

When the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-6). The display of the base 2 of the display No. 6 is displayed in red. In the display of the base 2 of the display No. 6, as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-6), the set value “1” is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A, and “b” is displayed on the second display unit 21TM029B. The character is displayed, and the character “6.” is displayed on the third display unit 21TM029C. In addition, the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E include:
The base 2 calculated based on the immediately preceding 60000 prize balls is displayed. For example, when the base 2 is 42%, the character “4.” is displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D, and the character “2” is displayed on the fifth display unit 21TM029E.

  Then, when the display of the display No. 5 continues for 5 seconds, the short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 11-9 (B-1). The short-term connection ratio of the display No. 1 is displayed. Thereafter, the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 to the display of base 2 of display No. 6 are sequentially displayed every 5 seconds. In the display color, only the short-term connection ratio of display No. 1 is green, and the short-term role ratio of display No. 2 to base 2 of display No. 5 are red. As described above, the display monitor 21TM029 switches and displays the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 every 5 seconds.

  Further, the display of the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, base 1 and base 2 is indicated by a display changeover switch 21TM030 as shown in FIGS. Based on the operation, the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the display of the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “1”, and the display when the set value is “2” Short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative ratio, display of base 1 and base 2, short-term ratio when the set value is "3", short-term role ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative It is possible to sequentially change the display of the winning combination, the base 1 and the base 2. When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short term ratio, the short term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “1”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to "2", and the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1, and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “2”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “2”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “3”, and the short-term connection ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “3”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term ratio, the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “3”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “4”, and the short-term connection ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “4”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total total combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “4”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “5”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “5”.

  When the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term connection ratio, short-term combination ratio, total cumulative connection ratio, total cumulative combination ratio, base 1 and base 2 when the set value is “5”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “6”, and the short-term ratio, short-term position ratio, total cumulative ratio, and total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the set value “6”.

  If the display changeover switch 21TM030 is operated during the display of the short-term connection ratio, the short-term combination ratio, the total cumulative connection ratio, the total cumulative combination ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 when the set value is “6”, The numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is updated to “1”, and the short-term ratio, the short-term position ratio, the total cumulative ratio, and the total cumulative position displayed on the fourth display unit 21TM029D and the fifth display unit 21TM029E are displayed. The numerical values of the ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are switched to the value of the set value “1”.

  In the display monitor 21TM029 of this embodiment, the form in which the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base at each set value can be displayed is exemplified. However, the present invention is not limited to this. May be able to display only one numerical value or any two numerical values among these connection ratio, combination ratio, and base.

  Further, in this embodiment, an example is shown in which the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base, which are information based on the number of awarded balls, are calculated, and the connection ratio, the combination ratio, and the base are displayed on the display monitor 21TM029. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history of the awarded number of awarded balls may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 without calculating the connection ratio, the winning ratio, and the base. .

  Also, in this embodiment, only the short-term ratio is displayed in red on the display monitor 21TM029, and the short-term ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the total cumulative ratio, the base 1 and the base 2 are displayed in green. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The short-term ratio and short-term duty ratio, the total cumulative ratio and the total cumulative role ratio are displayed in the same color. It may be displayed in the same color different from the winning combination, the total cumulative connecting ratio, and the total cumulative winning ratio.

  When the total prize balls in the 0th storage area in the active buffer reach the predetermined capacity of 6000, the main board 11 updates the storage in the 0th to 10th storage areas in the ring buffer. Further, the storage area of the sum and total accumulation for 10 sets and the storage of the combination ratio storage area for storing the combination and the combination of 10 sets and total are respectively updated.

  In updating in the active buffer and the ring buffer, the numerical value stored in the 0th storage area of the active buffer is moved to the first storage area of the ring buffer. Further, the numerical values stored in the first to ninth storage areas of the ring buffer are moved to the second to tenth storage areas, respectively. For example, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 10, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 0th storage area to the ninth storage area are “27”, “81”, “120”, “36”, “225”, and “87”, respectively. It is assumed that they are "66", "117", "45", and "21". At this time, when the total prize balls in the 0th storage area of the active buffer reach 6000, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening prize balls in the 1st storage area to the 10th storage area are respectively “27”, “81” and “81”. 120, "36", "225", "87", "66", "117", "45", and "21". Also, the number of award balls in the 0th storage area is set to “0”, and the number of award balls in the 10th storage area is deleted.

  When updating the number of prize balls stored in the 0th storage area to the 10th storage area, the stored number of prize balls may be temporarily deleted and then a new number of prize balls may be stored. Alternatively, a new prize ball number may be stored by overwriting the stored prize ball number.

  Next, an operation (operation) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 in this embodiment will be described. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. As shown in FIG. 11-11, when the game control main process is started, the CPU 103 executes a security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not the contents of the program are valid, and thereafter executes the game control main process from step S21TM1010. Start processing. In the game control main process, the CPU 103 first performs necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 103 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1010). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1020), and the stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1030). Next, a wait is performed until the effect control board 12 starts operating (step S21TM1040).

  Then, the CPU 103 initializes the built-in device (eg, initializes a CTC (counter / timer) and a PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S21TM1050), and then stores the RAM 102 in the RAM 102. The access state is set (step S21TM1060). In the interrupt mode 2, an address synthesized from a value (1 byte) of a specific register (I register) built in the CPU 103 and an interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is: This is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-12, the CPU 103 determines whether or not the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM1110; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1310. When the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM1110; YES), the CPU 103 outputs the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch mounted on the power supply board) 21TM052 input through the input port. ) Is confirmed (step S21TM1120).

  When the ON state is detected in checking the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 shifts to a setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. . That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode based on the status.

  Upon transition to the setting change mode, CPU 103 outputs a setting change corresponding signal from information output circuit 112 and outputs a security signal (step S21TM1130). Thus, in an external device such as a hall computer that manages game information of each gaming machine, based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal, the gaming machine that is the output source of these signals changes the setting. It is possible to specify that the mode is controlled to the mode or the setting confirmation mode described later. Therefore, in the display device provided in the external device, it is possible to notify a gaming machine (for example, a machine number or the like) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in a identifiable manner.

  In addition, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command designating the control to the setting change mode as an effect control command for the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1140). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting change mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 can notify that the gaming machine is being controlled to the setting change mode.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1150). Then, the operation waits for the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 (step S21TM1160) and the operation for turning off the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1180).

  In the operation standby state of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052, the CPU 103 changes the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 every time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated (YES in step S21TM1160). (Step S21TM1170). For example, as will be described later, each time a setting change operation is received, a display control is executed in which the displayed set value is increased by one and returned to one after reaching six.

  When the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in a state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1180), the CPU 103 changes the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 to The set value is changed to the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190). That is, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is overwritten with the displayed set value, thereby fixing the set value. Then, the determined set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1190).

  In step S21TM1160, when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated (without determining YES in step S21TM1160), and the lock switch 21TM051 is turned OFF (YES in step S21TM1180). If it is determined), the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 matches the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029, and as a result, the set value stored in the RAM 102 The setting value stored in the area is not changed.

  When the process of step S21TM1200 is executed, the setting change mode ends, and the CPU 103 shifts to the initialization process of step S21TM1410 shown in FIGS.

  In the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in the above-described step S21TM1120, if the OFF state is detected (NO in step S21TM1120), the CPU 103 performs the setting for confirming the set value. Move to confirmation mode. That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  The CPU 103 outputs a setting change corresponding signal from the information output circuit 112 and outputs a security signal with the transition to the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1210). Thus, in an external device such as a hall computer that manages game information of each gaming machine, based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal, the gaming machine that is the output source of these signals changes the setting. It is possible to specify that the mode is controlled to the mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in the display device provided in the external device, it is possible to notify a gaming machine (for example, a machine number or the like) controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in a identifiable manner.

  In addition, the CPU 103 transmits, as an effect control command for the effect control board 12, a setting confirmation mode command designating control to the setting confirmation mode (step S21TM1220). The effect control CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command. Therefore, the image display device 5 can notify that the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  Then, the CPU 103 reads out the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and displays it on the display monitor 21TM029 (step S21TM1230). Then, it waits for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (step S21TM1240).

  When the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 in the state of waiting for the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 (YES in step S21TM1240), the setting confirmation mode ends, and the CPU 103 executes the operation shown in FIG. The process proceeds to a determination process of whether or not the power-off detection process has been performed in step S21TM1320 shown in FIG.

  If it is determined in step S21TM1110 that the lock switch is in the OFF state (NO in step S21TM1110), the CPU 103 executes the clear switch input via the input port as shown in FIG. (Setting switch mounted on the power supply board) The state of the output signal (clear signal) of 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM1310).

  When the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not ON (NO in step S21TM1310), the CPU 103 executes power-off detection processing (see FIG. 11-14). It is determined whether or not check data is stored in a predetermined backup area (step S21TM1320).

  In this example, as a case where the process of step S21TM1320 is executed, (1) the setting change is performed based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also OFF. When the process of step S21TM1320 is immediately executed without shifting to any of the mode and the setting confirmation mode, (2) when the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF. There is a case where the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode based on the fact that the processing has been executed, and the processing of step S21TM1320 is executed after the setting confirmation mode ends.

  When the backup data is stored, the CPU 103 checks the data in the backup RAM area (Step S21TM1330). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S21TM1330, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same processing in the power-off detection processing. When the power supply is stopped after an unexpected power failure or the like, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) is normal (matched). That the check result is not normal means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply is stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state at the time of stopping the power supply, an initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on and not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed (NO in step S21TM1330). It is determined and the process proceeds to step S21TM1410).

  If the check result is normal (YES in step S21TM1330), CPU 103 performs a game state restoring process (steps S21TM1340 and step S21TM1350) for returning game control microcomputer 100 to the state at the time of stopping power supply. Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1340), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in a work area (an area in the RAM 102), and step S21TM1360 is set. (Step S21TM1350). The work area is backed up by a backup power source. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. As a result of the processing of steps S21TM1340 and S21TM1350, the saved contents of the work area that must not be initialized remain. The parts that must not be initialized include, for example, data indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probable change flag, time saving flag, restriction member state designation flag, initialized flag, etc.), output of output port This is an area in which the state is stored (output port buffer), a part in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set, and the like. The set value storage area (the area where the determined set value is stored) is also included in the part that must not be initialized. Further, for each set value, an area in which each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base is stored is also included in the part that must not be initialized.

  Next, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (Step S21TM1360). In a later-described game control timer interrupt process, a big hit determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits a backup command (command at the time of restoration) as a command at the time of restoration of power supply (step S21TM1370). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that restoration from the power interruption has been performed based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply based on the reception of the backup command (command at the time of restoration). When the effect control CPU 120 receives the backup command, the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp 9 and the like are restored from the power-off based on the data at the time of stopping the power supply. It is possible to notify that. Next, CPU 103 executes a setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

  In step S21TM1310, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is on (step S21TM1310; YES) or if no backup data is stored in step S21TM1320 (step S21TM1320; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM1330. If the result of the parity check is not normal (step S21TM1330; NO), an initialization process is executed (step S21TM1410).

  In this example, the initialization processing of step S21TM1410 is executed as follows: (1) The setting is performed based on the fact that the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The case where the initialization processing of step S21TM1410 is immediately executed without shifting to either the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, or (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is OFF when the power is turned on, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052. Is also OFF, based on the determination of NO in either step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330, immediately after step S21TM1410 without shifting to either the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the initialization process is executed and (3) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also ON, the mode shifts to the setting change mode, and The case where the initialization process of step S21TM1410 is executed after the end of the setting change mode, and the case where (4) the lock switch 21TM051 is ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF when the power is turned on. There is a case where the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and the initialization processing of the step S21TM1410 is executed on condition that it is determined as NO in either the step S21TM1320 or the step S21TM1330 after the setting confirmation mode ends. .

  In the initialization process, the CPU 103 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, the data (the special symbol process flag, the probable change flag, the time reduction flag, etc.) indicating the game state before the power supply is stopped, which is stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102, is cleared and the initial value is set. However, the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 are not cleared and are not changed before the RAM clear processing. In addition, the area in which each total value (game information that can be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) such as the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base is stored for each set value is not cleared. The value is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Then, by notifying the character "C" on the display monitor 21TM029, it is notified that the gaming state has been initialized (step S21TM1420). The RAM clear processing initializes predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value. May be initialized. Alternatively, predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a random number for determining a normal symbol hit) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 102. The start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 101 is set as a pointer (step S21TM1430), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S21TM1440).

  In addition, by performing the processing of step S21TM1430 and step S21TM1440, for example, it is possible to selectively perform processing according to a control state such as a random number counter for determining a normal symbol hit, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, and the like. An initial value is set in the flag.

  In this embodiment, the mode is changed to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON. However, the present invention is not limited to this. Further, the setting change mode is provided on condition that the gaming machine frame 3 is opened (it is detected that the gaming machine frame 3 is open by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300). A transition to the setting confirmation mode may be made possible.

  After executing Step S21TM1430 and Step S21TM1440, the CPU 103 reads the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (Step S21TM1450). In a later-described game control timer interrupt process, a big hit determination in the special symbol process process (step S21TM1690) is executed based on the set value read here. Next, the CPU 103 transmits an initialization command designating that the initialization process has been performed when the power is turned on (or when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends) (step S21TM1460). The effect control CPU 120 recognizes that the initialization processing has been performed based on the reception of the initialization command. When the effect control CPU 120 receives the initialization command, the effect control device 120 may notify that the effect such as the game state has been initialized in the effect devices such as the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9. It is possible. Next, CPU 103 executes a setting command transmission process of step S21TM1470.

  The CPU 103 transmits the setting command specifying the setting value read in step S21TM1360 or step S21TM1450 to the effect control CPU 120 (step S21TM1470). The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends according to the specified set value.

  Then, CPU 103 executes a setting process of serial communication circuit 21TM505 (step S21TM1480). In this setting process, a connection confirmation signal is output from the output circuit 21TM067 of the main board 11 to the input circuit 21TM373A of the payout control board 21TM037 (see FIGS. 11-19 and 11-21). The communication between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to be executable.

  Next, the CPU 103 executes a random number circuit setting process for initial setting the random number circuit 104 (step S21TM1490). The CPU 103 performs setting for causing the random number circuit 104 to update the value of the random number value MR1 for determining a special figure display result by executing a process according to a random number circuit setting program, for example.

  Then, in step S21TM1500, the CPU 103 sets the register of the CTC built in the game control microcomputer 100 so that the timer interrupt is periodically performed every predetermined time (for example, 2 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 2 ms.

  Next, CPU 103 repeatedly executes a display random number update process (step S21TM1520) and an initial value random number update process (step S21TM1530). When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt is prohibited (step S21TM1510), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt is enabled. It is set (step S21TM1540). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining a stop symbol of a special symbol when a big hit is not made or a random number for determining whether or not to reach when a big hit is not made. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating a display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of a counter for generating an initial value random number. In this embodiment, the initial value random number is an initial value of a count value of a counter (normal symbol hit determination random number generation counter) for generating a random number for determining whether or not a symbol is a hit. It is a random number to perform. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game described later (the game control microcomputer 100 controls a game device such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, and a ball payout device provided in the game machine by itself. In this process, the count value of the random number for the normal symbol hit determination is one cycle (the normal value for the random number for the symbol hit determination) in the process of transmitting the command signal for controlling the other microcomputer, or the gaming machine control process. When the number of possible values has increased by the number between the minimum value and the maximum value), an initial value is set in the counter.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, when the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting change mode command (step S21TM1140) and then transmits a power-on initialization command. (Step S21TM1460), and transmits a setting command (Step S21TM1470). When the CPU 103 is set to the setting check mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting check mode command (step S21TM1220), and then transmits a backup command at the time of power-off recovery or an initialization command at power-on (step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). S21TM1460), and transmits a setting command (step S21TM1470). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the initialization command after the reception of the setting change mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect, and the like. It is possible to notify the end of the setting change mode by the effect device such as the lamp 9. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the backup command or the initialization command after the reception of the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R. It is possible to notify the end of the setting confirmation mode by the effect device such as the game effect lamp 9 or the like.

  Upon receiving the interrupt request signal from the CTC and receiving the interrupt request, the CPU 103 that has executed the game control main process executes the game control timer interrupt process shown in the flowchart of FIG. 11-14. When the game control timer interrupt process shown in FIGS. 11 to 14 is started, the CPU 103 first executes a power-off detection process (step S21TM1610). Then, it is determined whether or not a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615). On the condition that the game stop error has not occurred (NO in step S21TM1615), a predetermined switch process is executed to execute a switch. The state of the detection signal input from various switches such as the gate switch 21, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, and the discharge port switch 21TM070 via the circuit 110 is determined (step S21TM1620). On the other hand, if a game stop error has occurred (YES in step S21TM1615), the switch processing in step S21TM1620 is not executed, and as a result, the game is stopped.

  For example, the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the opening state of the glass door frame 3a is detected, and an abnormality is detected by a magnetic sensor (not shown). The level of magnetism that is determined is detected, the level of vibration determined to be abnormal by a vibration sensor (not shown) is detected, and the level and frequency Based on the detection of the radio wave, it is determined that a game stop error has occurred.

  Subsequently, when the game ball wins any of the first start winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the big winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, that is, the first starting opening switch 22A. When the detection signals are input from the second starting port switch 22B, the count switch 23, the first general winning port switch to the fourth general winning port switch, the number of winning balls corresponding to the winning by each detection signal is determined. A prize ball process (step S21TM1630) for performing settings and the like is executed.

  Next, the CPU 103 displays the winning information such as the winning ratio such as the winning ratio, the connecting ratio, and the base (step S21TM1640), and displays the winning information such as the winning ratio, the connecting ratio, and the base calculated by the winning information. A winning information display control process to be displayed on the 21TM029 (step S21TM1650) is performed. Thereafter, by executing a predetermined main-side error process (step S21TM1660), an abnormality diagnosis of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is performed, and a warning can be executed if necessary according to the diagnosis result. In step S21TM1660, an abnormality (game stop error) is detected by the various sensors described in the description of step S1615, and if an abnormality is detected, an abnormality detection flag is set and a step in the next timer interrupt is performed. In S21TM1615, the game may be stopped (the switch process is not executed). Thereafter, by executing a predetermined information output process, for example, data such as big hit information, start information, probability variation information, and payout information which are supplied to a hall management computer installed outside the pachinko gaming machine 1 are output. (Step S21TM1670).

  Subsequent to the information output process, a game random number update process for updating at least a part of the game random number such as the random number value MR1 or the random number values MR1 to MR4 used on the main board 11 side by software is executed (step S21TM1680). ). Thereafter, the CPU 103 executes special symbol process processing (step S21TM1690). In the special symbol process processing, the value of the special figure process flag provided in the game control flag setting unit is updated according to the progress of the game in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol display are displayed. Various processes are selected and executed in order to control the display operation in the device 4B and set the opening / closing operation of the special winning opening in the special variable winning ball device 7 in a predetermined procedure.

  Subsequent to the special symbol processing, the ordinary symbol processing is executed (step S21TM1700). The CPU 103 controls the display operation (for example, turning on / off the segment LED) on the normal symbol display 20 by executing the normal symbol process process, and displays the fluctuation of the normal symbol and the movable wings on the variable winning ball device 6B. Enables setting of one-sided tilting operation.

  After executing the normal symbol process processing, the CPU 103 executes the command control processing to transmit a control command from the main board 11 to a sub-side control board such as the effect control board 12 (step S21TM1710). As an example of these, in the command control process, the output port included in the I / O 105 corresponds to the setting in the command transmission table specified by the value of the transmission command buffer provided in the game control buffer setting unit. After setting the control data in the output port for transmitting the effect control command to the control board 12, the predetermined control data is set in the output port of the effect control INT signal and the effect control INT signal is turned on for a predetermined time. Then, the production control command can be transmitted based on the setting in the command transmission table. After executing the command control process, after setting the interrupt enabled state, the game control timer interrupt process ends.

  In the command control process of step S21TM1710, a command for notifying the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or a command for notifying that the variation pattern or the variation display has been completed is provided. By transmitting the information of the set value set in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to an existing command such as the above, the set value may be periodically notified to the effect control board 12. Further, by receiving these commands from the main board 11, the effect control board 12 (effect control CPU 120) executes an effect indicating the set value at various timings, such as during variable display or during a big hit game. You may.

  Next, the display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing related to the setting change mode (steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 of the main processing) and RAM clear (steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1420 of the main processing) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (A), when the power is turned off (the power is turned off) by the operation of the clerk of the game arcade or the like, the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, and the display monitor is stopped. The display on 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (B), on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main processing), a clerk of the game arcade or the like switches the clear switch (setting changeover switch). When the power is turned on while operating the 21TM052 (in the case of Y in step S21TM1120 of the main processing), the processing of steps S21TM1130 and S21TM1140 is executed by the CPU 103, and the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (this In the example, the setting value "1") is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more precisely, the first display unit 21TM029A). (In this example, the setting value "1") is displayed. (Step S21TM1150).

  In the state where the set value is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A in this way, as shown in FIG. 11-15 (C), the CPU 103 sets the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 by a store clerk or the like at the game arcade. Each time an operation is detected, the numerical value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is sequentially updated and displayed (step S21TM1170). For example, every time the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value (setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area) displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is changed from 1 → 2 → 3 → Update display such as 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 →. Here, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the setting value (the setting value “1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed by the operation. When the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 described later is executed, the set value (the set value “1” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A. Is changed (in this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) (overwritten).

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11D, the CPU 103 detects the OFF operation of the lock switch 21TM051 by a store clerk of the game arcade or the like (YES in step S21TM1180), and stores it in the set value storage area of the RAM 102. The stored setting value (in this example, the setting value “1”) is changed to the numerical value displayed in the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting value “2” stored in the setting information temporary storage area). ), And the set value (set value “2” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is determined (step S21TM1190). At this time, the CPU 103 blinks the first display unit 21TM029A to notify a store clerk or the like of the game arcade that the new set value is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 and that the control of the setting change mode has been completed. (Setting completion notification) is performed (step S21TM1200).

  Note that once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information temporary storage area Neither the stored set value “2”) nor the set value (set value “2” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed. If the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A can be changed even after the set value is determined, there is a possibility that the user may misunderstand that the set value can be changed even when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state. Therefore, in this embodiment, once the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A is not changed.

  Then, the setting change mode (from step S21TM1130 to step S21TM1200) ends, and the CPU 103 executes a RAM clear process (step S21TM1410). In the RAM clearing process, data (a special symbol process flag, a probable change flag, a time saving flag, etc.) stored in the game state information storage area of the RAM 102 and indicating the game state at the time of power failure is cleared, and an initial value is set. Thereby, the game state is initialized, but the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not cleared and is not changed before the RAM clear processing. Further, when the reserved storage is stored in the backup area of the RAM 102, the reserved storage is cleared. After the RAM clearing process is completed, the CPU 103 displays “C” on the first display unit 21TM029A, thereby notifying a clerk at the game hall or the like that the RAM clearing process has been performed (RAM clear notification). (Step S21TM1420). Thereby, the store clerk of the game hall or the like grasps that the setting change mode has ended (the set value has been determined) and the initialization process has been executed. Then, by executing the processing after step S21TM1430, a state in which a game is possible, that is, a state in which a variable display result, a jackpot type, a variable pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be performed.

  In the setting change mode of this embodiment, a mode in which the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is displayed as an initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 is exemplified. The initial display to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in the setting change mode is not limited to the setting value most advantageous to the player ("6" in this embodiment), or the most disadvantageous value to the player. A set value (“1” in this embodiment) may be displayed.

  Further, with the end of the setting change mode, the CPU 103 notifies the display monitor 21TM029 of the connection ratio and the combination corresponding to the determined set value (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) after the RAM clear notification. You may make it display each total value, such as a ratio and a base. In addition, for each set value, the total value such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (in ascending or descending order of the set value).

  If the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 while the lock switch 21TM051 is being set to the setting change mode, the lock value of the RAM 102 is not set. The setting values stored in the storage area have not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting values stored in the setting information temporary storage area are deleted.

  Next, a display mode of the display monitor 21TM029 in the processing of the setting confirmation mode (steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240) will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 11-16 (A), when the power is turned off (power is turned off) by the operation of a game clerk or the like, the supply of power to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is stopped, and the display monitor is stopped. The display on 21TM029 ends.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 11-16 (B), on condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON (Y in step S21TM1110 of the main process), the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is OFF. (In the case of N in step S21TM1120 of the main processing), the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S21TM1210 and step S21TM1220, and the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 (in this example, the setting value "1") is copied to the setting information temporary storage area of the RAM 102, and the setting value (in this example, the setting value) stored in the setting information temporary storage area on the display monitor 21TM029 (more precisely, the first display unit 21TM029A). Set value "1") is displayed (step 21TM1230).

  Unlike the case where the setting change mode is controlled, the first display unit is operated when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a game room clerk or the like when the setting confirmation mode is controlled. The numerical value displayed in 21TM029A (in this example, the set value “1” stored in the setting information temporary storage area) is not updated and displayed. If the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated by a store clerk or the like in the game arcade while being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example). In such a case, if the setting value “1” stored in the setting information temporary storage area is updated and displayed, it may be misunderstood that the setting value can be changed in the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the setting check mode is being controlled, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting The setting value “1” stored in the information temporary storage area is not updated and displayed.

  Then, the CPU 103 ends the setting confirmation mode based on detecting that the lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off by the store clerk at the game arcade (YES in step S21TM1240). By executing the processing after step S21TM1320, a state in which a game is possible, that is, a state in which a variable display result, a jackpot type, a variable pattern determination lottery, a prize ball payout, and the like can be performed. That is, when the processing in the setting confirmation mode is executed, the CPU 103 does not execute the processing related to the RAM clear, except when the result of the determination in step S21TM1320 or S21TM1330 is NO.

  After the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off, as described above, even if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, the numerical value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A (in this example, the setting information Neither the set value “1” stored in the temporary storage area nor the set value (set value “1” in this example) stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed.

  As described above, when power supply to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is started, (1) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is also in the ON state. When the condition for controlling to the setting change mode is satisfied, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode, (2) the lock switch 21TM051 is in the ON state, and the clear switch (setting change switch) If the condition for controlling the setting confirmation mode, that is, 21TM052 is in the OFF state, is established, the gaming machine is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  In order to change or display the set value (to shift to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), the store clerk of the game arcade turns on the lock switch 21TM051 when the power is turned on. In order to shift to, the operation for further executing the initialization processing (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is performed, and in order to shift to the setting confirmation mode, the initialization processing is executed. Do not perform the operation. In this way, the store clerk at the game arcade can select whether to control the gaming machine in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (or not to control any of them) when the power is turned on, and to perform the initialization process. Whether or not to execute can be selected.

  Further, in this embodiment, initialization processing is not required to shift the gaming machine to the setting confirmation mode (RAM clear is not executed except for the case where NO is determined in step S21TM1320 or step S21TM1330). Therefore, even if a clerk at the game hall wants to check the set value while the player is playing a game, the power is temporarily turned off, and when the power is turned on thereafter, the game state is changed to the setting check mode. It is not initialized and does not disadvantage the player. On the amusement arcade side, the setting value can be confirmed without any trouble by the setting confirmation mode.

  In addition, with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 displays the setting values displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102), such as the connection ratio, the role ratio, and the base. May be displayed. In addition, for each set value, the total value such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base corresponding to each set value may be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 in order (in ascending or descending order of the set value).

  FIG. 11-17 shows the setting change mode by the effect devices (image display device 5, speakers 8L and 8R, and game effect lamp 9) of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when controlled in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. An example is shown in which notification that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode is performed. FIG. 11-17 (1) shows an example of an image displayed on the image display device 5 when controlled in the setting change mode, and FIG. 11-17 (2) shows an image displayed when controlled in the setting confirmation mode. An example of an image displayed on the device 5 is shown.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 11-17 (1), when the power is turned on (in particular, before the wait for the effect control board operation in step S21TM1040 is completed), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed. Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the gaming effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 11-17 (1), based on the reception of the setting change mode command transmitted to the effect control board 12 from the CPU 103 in step S21TM1140 in the main process, the effect control The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting change mode, and can notify that fact. For example, on the image display device 5, the character "Setting is being changed" is displayed, and a sound (for example, "Setting is being changed") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode. By making the effect lamp 9 emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, white blinking mode), it is notified that the mode has shifted to the setting change mode. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the mode is shifted to the setting change mode in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the setting change is performed. It is possible to clearly understand that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 11-17 (1), other display information (for example, effect symbols, small symbols, fourth symbols, right-handed display, etc.) on the image display device 5 is not displayed.

  It should be noted that when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting change mode command, the video signal is not supplied to the image display device 5 by the VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). Until the control of the image display device 5 is not possible (until the image display device 5 can be supplied to the image display device 5) (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, and the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, a sound (for example, a sound saying "Setting is being changed") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has shifted to the setting change mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a predetermined light emitting manner (for example, a white blinking manner). By emitting light, it is notified that the mode has shifted to the setting change mode. After that, when the image signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the sound notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the character “Setting is being changed” is displayed on the image display device 5.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 11-17 (1), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from CPU 103 to effect control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main processing (or, in step S21TM1460, CPU 103). The CPU 120 for effect control specifies that the microcomputer 100 for game control has ended the setting change mode, based on the reception of the power-on initialization command transmitted to the effect control board 12 from That fact can be reported. For example, on the image display device 5, a character “Setting change completed” is displayed, and a sound (for example, a sound “Setting is being changed”) for notifying that the mode has been changed to the setting change mode output from the speakers 8L and 8R is output. By stopping the output and stopping the light emission by the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white blinking mode), the end of the setting change mode is notified. According to such a configuration, it is possible to notify that the setting change mode has ended in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1, so that the setting change mode is set to It is possible to clearly understand that the process has been completed.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 11-17 (1), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and is in a state where the game can be played (the game control timer interrupt processing is performed). Along with the execution, the effect control command for displaying the demonstration screen on the image display device 5 is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 having received the command displays the demonstration screen on the image display device 5.

  As shown in (A) of FIG. 11-17 (2), the activation of the effect control board 12 is not completed when the power is turned on (in particular, before the wait for the effect control board operation in step S21TM1040 is completed). Therefore, no image is displayed on the image display device 5, no sound is output from the speakers 8L and 8R, and the gaming effect lamp 9 is not emitting light.

  Next, as shown in (B) of FIG. 11-17 (2), based on the reception of the setting confirmation mode command transmitted to the effect control board 12 from the CPU 103 in step S21TM1220 in the main processing, the effect control The CPU 120 can specify that the game control microcomputer 100 has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and can notify that fact. For example, the image display device 5 displays the characters “Setting is being confirmed”, and outputs a sound (for example, a sound of “Setting is being confirmed”) from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode. By making the effect lamp 9 emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white blinking mode), it is notified that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like, it is possible to notify that the mode has been shifted to the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to clearly understand that the mode is controlled. Here, in the state shown in (B) of FIG. 11-17 (2), other display information on the image display device 5 (for example, effect design, small design, fourth design, right-handed display, etc.) is not displayed.

  It should be noted that when the effect control CPU 120 receives the setting confirmation mode command, it is not in a state in which a video signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 by a VDP (Video Display Processor) (that is, by the display control unit 123). Until the control of the image display device 5 is not possible (until the image display device 5 can be supplied to the image display device 5) (that is, until the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5). In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is not performed, and the voice notification and the light emission notification are executed in advance. That is, a sound (for example, a sound of "Setting is being changed") is output from the speakers 8L and 8R to notify that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode, and the game effect lamp 9 is turned on in a predetermined light emitting mode (for example, a white blinking mode). By emitting light, it is notified that the mode has shifted to the setting confirmation mode. After that, when the image signal can be supplied to the image display device 5 (that is, when the display control unit 123 can control the image display device 5), the sound notification and the light emission notification are performed. In addition, the notification by the image display device 5 is started. That is, the image display device 5 displays the text “setting is being confirmed”.

  Then, as shown in (C) of FIG. 11-17 (2), based on the reception of the setting command transmitted from CPU 103 to effect control board 12 in step S21TM1470 in the main processing (or in step S21TM1370 or step S21TM1370). In step S21TM1460, based on the reception of the power-off restoration command or the power-on initialization command transmitted from the CPU 103 to the effect control board 12 from the CPU 103, the effect control CPU 120 is set by the game control microcomputer 100. It is possible to specify that the confirmation mode has ended and to notify that fact. For example, on the image display device 5, a character "Setting confirmation completed" is displayed, and a sound (for example, a sound saying "Setting is being confirmed") for notifying that the mode has been shifted to the setting confirmation mode output from the speakers 8L and 8R. By stopping the output and stopping the light emission of the game effect lamp 9 in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white blinking mode), the end of the setting confirmation mode is notified. According to such a configuration, in the image display device 5 or the like having the largest display area in the pachinko gaming machine 1 or the like, it is possible to notify that the setting check mode has ended. It is possible to clearly understand that the process has been completed.

  Then, as shown in (D) of FIG. 11-17 (2), the CPU 103 executes the processing after step S21TM1480 of the main processing, and is in a state where the game can be played (the timer interrupt processing for game control is executed). Along with the execution, the effect control command for displaying the demonstration screen on the image display device 5 is transmitted, and the effect control CPU 120 having received the command displays the demonstration screen on the image display device 5.

  The effect control CPU 120 that has received the setting command can suggest a setting value by executing an effect according to the setting value specified by the setting command. For example, it is possible to suggest the set value to the player by making the mode of the ending effect executed when the big hit gaming state ends according to the specified set value. FIGS. 11-18 (1), (2), and (3) show examples of setting suggestion effects. FIG. 11-18 (1) shows an example in which the “sunny” mode ending image is selected on the big hit end screen, and FIG. 11-18 (2) shows an example in which the “cloudy” mode ending image is selected on the big hit end screen. FIG. 11-18 (3) shows an example in which the ending image in the “rain” mode is selected on the big hit end screen. FIG. 11-18 (4) is an explanatory view showing a specific example of a table for determining the mode of the setting suggestion effect based on the setting value specified by the setting command.

  In step S21TM1470 of the main process, the CPU 103 transmits a setting command for designating a setting value to the effect control CPU 120. Further, when the big hitting game state ends, the CPU 103 transmits to the effect control CPU 120 an effect control command for executing an ending effect on the image display device 5. The effect control CPU 120 stores the setting value specified by the received setting command in the RAM 102, so that the ending effect mode can be determined based on the stored setting value. For example, based on an effect control command transmitted when the big hit game state ends, the image display device 5 stores the character together with a character (“BONUS end” character) indicating that the big hit game state has ended. It is possible to display an ending image of a mode (fine mode, cloudy mode, rainy mode) determined based on the set value that is set.

  The table shown in FIG. 11-18 (4) indicates that the setting value specified by the setting command is “1, 2”, “3, 4”, and “5, 6”. 11-18 (1), the "cloudy" mode shown in FIG. 11-18 (2), and the setting suggestive mode shown in FIG. 11-18 (2). In the case of deciding on the “rain” mode shown in FIG. 18 (3), the determination value of is assigned.

  When the set value specified by the received setting command is “1” or “2”, effect control CPU 120 suggests a setting of the “sunny” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is decided to perform the effect (ending effect), and to execute the setting suggestive effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) at a moderate ratio (for example, 40%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 40%). When the setting value specified by the received setting command is “3” or “4”, the effect control CPU 120 performs the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a low rate (for example, 20%). It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) is to be executed, and that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) is to be executed at a high rate (for example, 50%), and It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 30%). When the setting value specified by the received setting command is “5” or “6”, effect control CPU 120 performs the “clear” mode shown in (1) at a high rate (for example, 50%). It is determined that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) is to be executed, and that the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “cloudy” mode shown in (2) is to be executed at a low ratio (for example, 20%). It is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect (ending effect) of the “rain” mode shown in (3) at the ratio (for example, 30%).

  In this way, by making the determination ratio of each mode of the setting suggestion effect different according to the setting value, the player becomes interested in what mode the setting suggestion effect is executed, and the setting suggestion effect is performed. The entertainment of the production can be improved. In this example, the player is interested in the manner in which the ending effect performed when the big hit gaming state ends is performed, and in particular, the ending effect is performed in the “sunny” mode. You expect to be done.

  Next, the prize ball processing (step S21TM1630) in the main processing will be described. First, a payout control signal (connection confirmation signal) and a prize ball request signal (payout control command) transmitted and received between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 will be described.

  FIG. 11-19 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a control signal output from the game control microcomputer 100 to the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, a connection confirmation signal is transmitted and received as a control signal between the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like. As shown in FIGS. 11-19, the connection confirmation signal is output when the main board 11 starts up (when the game control microcomputer 100 starts the game control process), and the main board 11 is output to the payout control board 21TM037. Is a signal (connection confirmation signal of the main board 11) for notifying that has started. The connection confirmation signal indicates that a prize ball can be paid out. The connection confirmation signal is output through the I / O port 21TM057 of the game control microcomputer 100 and the output circuit 21TM067, and is controlled through the input circuit 21TM373A and the I / O port 21TM372e of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Input to the microcomputer 21TM370. Each of the connection confirmation signals is 1-bit data, and is transmitted by one signal line. It should be noted that the connection confirmation signal is set in an output enabled state by setting an initial value to a bit corresponding to the connection confirmation signal of the output port 0 by the processing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440 executed when the power is turned on (specifically, Is output by the processing of step S21TM2080, but may be output at the timing of steps S21TM1350 and S21TM1440.)

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, like the game control microcomputer 100, has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380. Various payout control commands are transmitted and received between the serial communication circuit 21TM505 built in the game control microcomputer 100 and the serial communication circuit 21TM380 built in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 are the same as the configuration and function of the serial communication circuit 21TM505 included in the game control microcomputer 100.

  FIG. 11-20 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of a control command transmitted and received between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control board 21TM037. In this embodiment, various control commands (prize ball request signals) are transmitted and received between the microcomputers of the main board 11 and the payout control board 21TM037 in order to perform various controls related to payout control and the like.

  As described above, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are composed of 8-bit data (binary 8-digit data), and are output as control commands indicating predetermined contents according to the set contents of the 8-bit data. Is done.

  The connection confirmation command is sent from the game control microcomputer 100 at regular intervals (1 s) to check whether the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal. This is a control command to be transmitted. The data content of the connection confirmation command is “A0 (H)”, that is, “1010000”.

  The connection OK command is a control command for notifying that the connection state between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is normal, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the connection confirmation command. Is a control command to be transmitted as a response signal in response to the reception of the command. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x (H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. Here, if an award ball error (an abnormal state in which the award ball payout operation based on the winning or the ball lending operation based on the ball lending request cannot be performed normally) occurs, the first bit “x” is set. Is set to "1". When a full tank error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the second bit. In addition, when an out-of-ball error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the third bit. When a door opening error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the fourth bit. In this way, while the connection between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is being checked, the occurrence of a predetermined error in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is determined by the game control microcomputer. 100 can be notified.

  The prize ball number command is a control command for notifying the number (0 to 14) of game balls for which a payout request is made, and is a control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 100 based on the occurrence of a winning. . The content of the data of the winning ball number command is “5x (H)”, that is, “0101xxxx”. In this embodiment, when a game ball is detected by the first start port switch 22A and the second start port switch 22B, three prize balls are paid out, and the game ball is set by the prize port switch corresponding to the general prize port 10. When detected, ten prize balls are paid out, and when game balls are detected by the count switch 23, 14 prize balls are paid out. Therefore, when a game ball is detected by the first starting port switch 22A and the second starting port switch 22B, a prize ball number command “01010111” for notifying three prize balls is transmitted to the general winning port 10. When a game ball is detected by the corresponding winning opening switch, a prize ball number command “01011010” for notifying the number of prize balls is transmitted, and when a game ball is detected by the count switch 23, the prize ball number is determined. The award ball number command “0101110” for notifying the 14 balls is transmitted. It should be noted that any one of the connection confirmation command and the winning ball number command is transmitted as a winning ball request signal. The prize ball number command is transmitted in place of the connection confirmation command at the timing when the connection confirmation command is transmitted, based on the fulfillment of the prize ball payout condition (the occurrence of a prize or the like). In this embodiment, as described above, data corresponding to the number of winning balls is set in the upper 4 bits, but data corresponding to the number of winning balls is set in the lower 4 bits while sharing the upper 4 bits. You may do so.

  The prize ball end command is a control command indicating that the prize ball operation (prize ball payout operation) has ended, and is a control command transmitted by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 based on the end of the prize ball operation. The content of the data of the award ball end command is “50 (H)”, that is, “01010000”. The prize ball end command is transmitted instead of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the completion of the prize ball operation. In this embodiment, it is not configured to set data indicating error information in the prize ball end command. This is because the prize ball end command is transmitted only once when the prize ball operation ends, so that the data indicating the error information is set and transmitted in the next connection OK command without transmitting the error information at that timing. This is because it is possible to do so. Note that data indicating error information may be set in the lower 4 bits of the award ball end command.

  The prize ball preparation command is a control command for notifying that a predetermined error has occurred and the prize ball operation has not been completed. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 generates a predetermined error during execution of the prize ball operation. This is a control command to be transmitted based on what has been done. The data content of the connection OK command is “8x (H)”, that is, “10000xxx”. Here, when an award ball error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the first bit. When a full tank error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the second bit. In addition, when an out-of-ball error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the third bit. When a door opening error occurs, “1” is set to “x” of the fourth bit. In this way, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 notifies the game control microcomputer 100 that a predetermined error has occurred during the execution of the prize ball operation and the prize ball operation has not been completed. In addition, the content of the error can be notified to the game control microcomputer 100. As with the connection OK command, the prize ball preparation command notifies that a predetermined error has occurred by changing the contents of the lower 4 bits in accordance with the error state (by changing the predetermined bit). The connection OK command, the prize ball preparation command, and the prize ball end command are configured so that any one of the commands is transmitted as a received ACK signal. The prize ball preparation command is a command (signal) output not only in a state where an error has occurred but the prize ball operation cannot be executed, but also in a state where the prize ball operation is being executed.

  The prize ball preparation command is transmitted in place of the connection OK command at the timing when the connection OK command is transmitted based on the fact that an error has occurred and the prize ball operation cannot be performed. is there.

  FIG. 11-21 is a block diagram illustrating signal lines and the like used for transmitting and receiving the control signal shown in FIG. 11-19 and the control command shown in FIG. 11-20. As shown in FIG. 11-21, the connection confirmation signal is output by the game control microcomputer 100 via the output circuit 21TM067, and is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the input circuit 21TM373A. The connection confirmation command and the number of prize balls command among the control commands are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM505 incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100 and input to the serial communication circuit 21TM380 incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. You. Among the control commands, the connection OK command, the prize ball end command and the prize ball preparation command are output from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 incorporated in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the serial communication circuit incorporated in the game control microcomputer 100. 21TM505. In FIG. 11-21, two signal lines (a signal line for transmitting a prize ball request signal and a signal line for transmitting a received ACK signal) are shown as signal lines for performing serial communication. However, actually, the prize ball request signal and the received ACK signal are transmitted and received through one signal line.

  Next, transmission and reception of signals (prize ball request signal, received ACK signal; control command) between the game control microcomputer and the payout control microcomputer during normal operation will be described. The winning ball request signal includes a connection confirmation command and a winning ball number command, and the received ACK signal includes a connection OK command, a winning ball end command, and a winning ball preparation command.

  FIG. 11-22 is a sequence diagram showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 11-22, the game control microcomputer 100 checks whether the connection of the signal line with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 has been cut. A connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal is transmitted to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. When the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal via the serial communication circuit 21TM380, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits a connection OK command as the reception ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Upon receiving the connection OK command as a received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the point of reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  Next, the operation of the payout control board 21TM037 will be described. FIG. 11-23 is a flowchart showing a main process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the main process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 first performs necessary initialization. That is, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S21TM1810). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S21TM1820), and the stack pointer designation address is set to the stack pointer (step S21TM1830). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets the built-in device register (step S21TM1840), sets the CTC and PIO (step S21TM1850), and then sets the RAM to an accessible state (step S21TM1860). Also, 0000 (H) is set as an initial value of the award ball unpaid number counter (step S21TM1870).

  In this embodiment, one channel of the built-in CTC is used in the timer mode. Therefore, in the setting process of the internal device register of step S21TM1840 and the process of step S21TM1850, the register setting for setting the channel to be used to the timer mode, the register setting for permitting the interrupt generation, and the interrupt vector are set. Is set. Then, the interruption by the channel is used as a timer interruption. When it is desired to generate a timer interrupt every 2 ms, for example, a value corresponding to 2 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value.

  The interrupt vector set for the channel set in the timer mode (channel 3 in this embodiment) corresponds to the start address of the timer interrupt processing. Specifically, the start address of the timer interrupt processing is specified by the value set in the I register and the interrupt vector. In the timer interruption process, a payout control process for controlling the payout means (including a process of driving at least the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a command signal relating to winning ball payout from the main board, and driving the payout motor 21TM289 in response to a ball lending request) May be included).

  In this embodiment, the interruption mode 2 is also set in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Therefore, it is possible to use the interrupt processing based on the count-up of the built-in CTC. Further, it is possible to set an interrupt processing start address according to the interrupt vector transmitted by the CTC. The interrupt based on the count-up of the channel 3 (CH3) of the CTC is an interrupt generated when the internal clock (system clock) of the CPU is counted down and the register value becomes “0”, and is used as a timer interrupt. .

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 first performs a RAM clear process (step S21TM1880). Further, an initial value is set to a flag, a counter, and the like in the RAM area (step S21TM1890). The process of step S21TM1890 includes a process of setting the prize ball unpaid number counter initial value to the prize ball unpaid number counter.

  Also, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a serial communication circuit setting process for initializing the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1900). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 causes the serial communication circuit 21TM380 to perform serial communication with the game control microcomputer 100 according to the same process as the serial communication circuit setting process (see step S21TM2560) performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100. Make the settings for

  When the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is initialized, the payout control CPU 21TM371 initializes the priority of the interrupt processing executed in response to the interrupt request of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 (step S21TM1910). In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM 371 initializes the priority of the interrupt processing in accordance with the same processing as the processing of initializing the priority performed by the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100.

  Then, the register of the CTC provided in the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout control is set so that the timer interrupt is periodically performed (step S21TM1920). That is, a value corresponding to the timer interrupt occurrence interval is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. Since the interrupt is prohibited in step S21TM1810 of the initial setting process, the interrupt is permitted before the initialization process is completed (step S21TM1930). Thereafter, the process enters a loop process for monitoring occurrence of a timer interrupt.

  As described above, in this embodiment, the built-in CTC of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is set to repeatedly generate a timer interrupt. Then, when a timer interrupt occurs, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes a timer interrupt process.

  FIG. 11-24 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a timer interrupt process executed by the payout control board 21TM037. In the timer interrupt processing, the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 executes the following processing as payout control processing. First, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs an input determination process (step S21TM2010). The input determination process is a process of detecting the states of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and bits 3 to 6 of input port 1 and reflecting the detection result to a predetermined byte (called an input state flag) of the RAM. is there. In the payout control process, when the control is performed based on the state of bits 4 to 6 of input port 0 and the states of bits 3 to 6 of input port 1, the state of the input port is not directly checked but the input state is checked. Check the state of the flag.

  Next, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a payout motor control process (step S21TM2020). In the payout motor control process, when the payout motor 21TM289 is to be driven, a process for outputting the pattern of the payout motors φ1 to φ4 to the output port 0 is performed.

  The payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a prepaid card unit control process for communicating with the card unit 21TM050 (step S21TM2030). Further, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes a main control communication process described later (step S21TM2035). Furthermore, a prize ball lending control process for controlling to pay out a lending ball in response to a ball lending request from the card unit 21TM050 and for controlling to pay out a number of prize balls indicated by a prize ball number command from the main board. Is executed (step S21TM2040).

  Then, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes error processing for detecting various errors (step S21TM2050). Further, an information output process for outputting prize ball information and ball lending information output to the outside of the gaming machine is executed (step S21TM2060). In addition, a predetermined display is performed on the error display LED 21TM374 according to the result of the error processing, and a display control process for turning on the prize ball LED 21TM053 and the ball cut LED21TM054 is executed (step S21TM2070).

  In this embodiment, when various errors (for example, a full error, an out-of-ball error, a prepaid card unit unconnection error) are detected in an error process described later, an error bit corresponding to the detected error is set. Then, in the display control process of step S21TM2070, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs a predetermined display on the error display LED 21TM374 based on the error bit being set. In the display control process, the payout control CPU 21TM371 performs control for turning on the prize ball LED21TM053 when the prize ball is being paid out. When the prize ball payout is completed, control for turning off the prize ball LED 21TM053 is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the RAM area (output port 0 buffer, output port 1 buffer, output port 2 buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided. The contents of the port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer are output to the output port (step S760: output processing). The output port 0 buffer, the output port 1 buffer, and the output port 2 buffer perform payout motor control processing (step S21TM2020), prepaid card control processing (step S21TM2030), main control communication processing (step S21TM2035), and information output processing (step S21TM2060). And is updated in the display control process (step S21TM2070).

  Next, in the main control communication processing of step S21TM2035, an operation in which the payout control CPU 21TM371 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits and receives various commands will be described. As shown in FIG. 11-21, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 has a built-in serial communication circuit 21TM380 for serially communicating various commands with the game control microcomputer 100. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the prize ball number command shown in FIGS. 11-20 from the game control microcomputer 100 by using the serial communication circuit 21TM380. When receiving the award ball number command, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 transmits the award ball ACK command "D2" as a reception confirmation signal using the serial communication circuit 21TM380.

  Similarly to the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100, when there is an interrupt request from the serial communication circuit 21TM380 while the interrupt is enabled, the payout control CPU 21TM 371 performs the interrupt requested by the serial communication circuit 21TM 380. Execute the interrupt processing according to the cause. In this embodiment, when the payout control CPU 21TM371 specifies that the interrupt cause is that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 has received the received data, the payout control CPU 21TM371 executes the reception interruption process. In this case, the payout control CPU 21TM371 sets a reception interrupt flag indicating that the serial communication circuit 21TM380 is receiving the received data. Note that the payout control CPU 21TM371 may read data from the reception data register of the serial communication circuit 21TM380 instead of setting the reception interrupt flag in the reception interrupt processing. In this case, for example, the payout control CPU 21TM371 determines whether or not the read reception data is a winning ball number command in the reception interruption process. When the received data is the winning ball number command, the payout control CPU 21TM371 may add the winning ball number indicated by the winning ball number command to the winning ball unpaid number counter. By doing so, in a main control communication process described later, it is determined whether or not the received data is a prize ball number command based on the reception interrupt flag being set, and the prize ball number is determined. It is not necessary to execute the process of adding the number to the unpaid number counter.

  FIG. 11-25 is a diagram illustrating the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100), the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370), the payout motor 21TM289, and the ball lending executed between the card unit 21TM050. It is a block diagram for explaining communication processing of. Here, as described later, there are a first ball lending restriction method to a fourth ball lending restriction method described below as methods for restricting ball lending by the payout motor 21TM289.

  First, (1) in the first ball lending restriction method, during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcontroller) is used from the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100). This is a method of stopping the output of the connection confirmation signal to the computer 21TM370). (2) In the second ball lending restriction method, during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, PRDY from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 is used. This is a method of stopping signal output. (3) In the third ball lending restriction method, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 including the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. During this period, output of a signal for driving the payout motor 21TM289 from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped. (4) In the fourth ball lending restriction method, the EXS from the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) to the card unit 21TM050 is controlled during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. This is a method of stopping signal output.

  Since the transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on, the state of the gaming machine is unstable. If the payout control corresponding to the ball lending process is executed in such an unstable state, there is a possibility that an appropriate amount of game media corresponding to the lending request cannot be paid out. In order to prevent the disadvantage of the player in such a situation, in the following embodiment, ball lending in a gaming machine controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is limited. Hereinafter, these first to fourth ball lending restriction methods will be specifically described.

  FIG. 11-26 is a timing chart for explaining communication among the main board 11, the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050 of the gaming machine. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started and the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is ON, the payout control board 21TM037 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible. The connection confirmation signal is turned on in the serial communication circuit setting process in step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. 11-13 (see FIG. 11-19). When power supply is started, the card unit 21TM050 turns on a VL signal as a connection signal.

  When the card is accepted by the card unit 21TM050, the ball lending switch is operated, and the ball lending switch signal is input, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being ON. Output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control board 21TM037 turns on the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the ON state and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state. When the falling (OFF) of the BRQ signal is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of loaned balls to the player. Then, the payout control board 21TM037 lowers the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050. That is, the EXS signal is turned off.

(First ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
As a method of restricting ball lending during the period in which the setting is changed to the setting change mode, there are the first ball lending restriction method to the fourth ball lending restriction method described above. First, the first ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 11-27 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 11-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  While the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection control signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the state to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, even if the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without turning the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the process is being executed, ball lending (payout of game media) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  As described above, during the period in which the game control microcomputer 100 is in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not set the connection confirmation signal to the ON state. It can be prevented from running. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 can notify that ball lending is not executed (that a ball lending error has occurred) based on the PRDY signal not being turned on.

  When the CPU 103 completes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the first ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-27 can be applied. That is, the game control microcomputer 100 stops outputting the connection confirmation signal (switches from the ON state to the OFF state) based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Thereby, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns off the PRDY signal or does not turn on the EXS signal, thereby executing ball lending. Not to be.

(Second ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the second ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example shown in FIGS. 11 to 28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state also during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. Shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Also, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 11-28 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 11-28, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops transmitting the connection confirmation command based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 as described above.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state based on the fact that the connection control command has not been received from the game control microcomputer 100. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state in which it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). Even when the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (while not receiving the connection confirmation command), the PRDY signal is turned on even when the CPU 103 is in the state of being electrically connected. It is not in the state but in the OFF state.

  As a result, even if the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without turning the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, even when the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball lending (payout of the game medium) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has not received the connection confirmation command. Thus, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from performing the payout control of the game medium. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 can notify that ball lending is not executed (that a ball lending error has occurred) based on the PRDY signal not being turned on.

  When the CPU 103 ends the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. Based on restarting the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-28 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even when such a configuration is adopted, the second ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-28 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 receives the PRDY signal which is in the ON state based on not receiving the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Is switched to the OFF state. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Third ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the third ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and do not open the gaming machine frame 3 which can be opened by a predetermined key operation. In order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened. That is, it is normal that the gaming machine frame 3 is open during the period in which the control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. That is, during the period in which the control is performed in the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 has been opened. Become. In this manner, the period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected includes a period in which the gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode and a period in which the gaming machine frame 3 is controlled to the setting confirmation mode.

  FIG. 11-29 shows the main board when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the payout control board 21TM037 (the payout control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050.

  In the example of FIGS. 11-29, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a) is open. Therefore, the PRDY signal is not turned on. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is switched from the ON state to the OFF state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). Even when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a period in which the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state), The PRDY signal is not turned on, but is turned off.

  As a result, even if the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without turning the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. That is, when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a), the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ Both the signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. Therefore, while the CPU 103 is executing the process of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the ball is not operated even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. Lending (payout of game media) is not executed.

  As described above, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the gaming machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a) to move. Is detected, the PRDY signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from performing the payout control of the game medium. In addition, the card unit 21TM050 can notify that ball lending is not executed (that a ball lending error has occurred) based on the PRDY signal not being turned on.

  Then, when a store clerk at the game hall or the like performs an operation of turning off the lock switch 21TM051, the CPU 103 ends the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Further, a clerk of a game arcade or the like closes the game machine frame 3 in order to bring the pachinko game machine 1 into a playable state. 21TM300 does not detect the open state of gaming machine frame 3. With the closing of the gaming machine frame 3, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 to the ON state based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, and executes the subsequent ball lending payout control.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-29 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even when such a configuration is adopted, the third ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-29 can be applied. That is, during the period in which the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 uses the gaming machine frame 3 ( Alternatively, the PRDY signal is not turned on based on the detection of the open state of the glass door frame 3a). Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In this embodiment, an example is shown in which the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is provided on the payout control board 21TM037 (an open state detection signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370). The game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 is not limited to such a form, and may be provided on the main board 11 (an open state detection signal is input to the game control microcomputer 100). In the case of such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 determines that the game machine frame / door frame open sensor 21TM300 detects the open state of the game machine frame 3 (or the glass door frame 3a). Then, the output of the connection confirmation signal is stopped (switching from the ON state to the OFF state). Thereby, based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is no longer input, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns off the PRDY signal or does not turn on the EXS signal, thereby executing ball lending. Not to be.

(Fourth ball lending restriction method in setting change mode)
Next, the fourth ball lending restriction method will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example illustrated in FIGS. 11 to 30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode, and is also in the ON state during the period of being controlled to be in the setting confirmation mode. Shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Also, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 11-30 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIGS. 11 to 30, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 stops transmitting the connection confirmation command based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 as described above.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns the PRDY signal ON based on the connection confirmation signal being ON. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, the state in which it is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, the game control microcomputer). When the CPU 103 is in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the PRDY signal is set to the ON state.

  When the card is received in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 The PRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Here, in the payout control board 21TM037, the PRDY signal is in the ON state, and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are both in the ON state, but the connection control command is not received from the game control microcomputer 100. Based on this, the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 is not turned on. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (ie, the state in which the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (ie, the game control microcomputer). 100), the PRDY signal is in the ON state (ie, the payout operation is possible by the payout control board 21TM037), and the BRDY signal is in the ON state (ie, the ball rental switch 21TM062). Is operated, and the ball lending switch signal is input), and the CPU 103 sets even if the BRQ signal is in the ON state (ie, a state in which a predetermined delay time has elapsed since the BRDY signal was turned ON). While processing in change mode or setting confirmation mode (while connection confirmation command is not received) It is without EXS signal ON state to the OFF state. As described above, even when the connection confirmation signal, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, when the connection confirmation command is not transmitted, the EXS signal is in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, ball lending (payout of game media) is not executed even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated.

  In this way, during the period in which the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 does not transmit the connection confirmation command, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has not received the connection confirmation command. Therefore, the EXS signal is not turned on. In this way, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from performing the payout control of the game medium. Further, the card unit 21TM050 can notify that ball lending is not executed (occurrence of ball lending error) based on the fact that the EXS signal is not turned on.

  Then, when a predetermined time elapses while the EXS signal is in the OFF state after the BRQ signal is turned on (when the timer set to a predetermined value times out), the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRQ signal. I do. That is, the BRQ signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the BRQ signal being turned off. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off.

  When the CPU 103 ends the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the transmission of the connection confirmation command is restarted. At this time, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the PRDY signal in the ON state.

  When the card is accepted in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated to input the ball lending switch signal, the card unit 21TM050 sends the BRDY signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. Is output. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, and based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the ON state, The EXS signal to the unit 21TM050 is turned on, and the subsequent ball lending payout control is executed.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-30 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even if such a configuration is adopted, the fourth ball lending restriction method shown in FIGS. 11-30 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the EXS signal to the ON state based on not receiving a connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the ball lending from being executed during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Also, in FIG. 11-30, if a predetermined time elapses after the BRQ signal is turned on and the EXS signal is turned off (when a timer set to a predetermined value times out), the card unit 21TM050 Shows an example in which the BRQ signal is returned to the OFF state, and the BRDY signal is also returned to the OFF state. Even when a predetermined time has elapsed, the BRQ signal may be maintained in the ON state, and the BRDY signal may be maintained in the ON state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 resumes the reception of the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100 (the completion of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode), and the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal. May be turned on based on the fact that both are on. Here, when the EXS signal is turned on, (1) the BRQ signal is turned off and the ball lending is automatically executed without operating the ball lending switch 21TM062 again (that is, the setting change mode or When the setting confirmation mode ends, a ball lending process according to the ball lending operation received during the setting change mode or the period of the setting confirmation mode may be executed.) (2) Ball lending When the switch 21TM062 is operated again, the BRQ signal may be turned off and ball lending may be executed.

(How to not execute the ball lending restriction during the setting change mode)
Next, a method of not executing the ball lending restriction during the setting change mode will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. In the example illustrated in FIG. 11-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state during the period in which the setting change mode is being controlled, and the connection confirmation signal is also in the ON state during the period in which the setting confirmation mode is being controlled. Shall be. That is, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting change mode, and is kept on during the setting change mode. Shall be. Also, unlike the examples shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the connection confirmation signal is turned on at a timing before being controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and is kept on during the setting confirmation mode. Shall be.

  FIG. 11-31 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout) when the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the control microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process. Then, after the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is turned on, the mode shifts to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the example of FIG. 11-31, the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state even while the CPU 103 is executing the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Here, the game control microcomputer 100 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. The connection confirmation command is a command for confirming the communication state with the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 via the serial communication circuit 21TM505 as described above.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the PRDY signal to the ON state based on the fact that the connection confirmation signal is ON and that the connection confirmation command has been received. If the PRDY signal is already in the ON state, the PRDY signal is maintained in the ON state. That is, in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the VL signal is in the ON state (that is, in a state of being electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050), and the connection confirmation signal is in the ON state (that is, in the game control microcomputer 100). When the CPU 103 is in the state of being electrically connected) and receiving the connection confirmation command, regardless of whether the CPU 103 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the PRDY signal is output. Is turned on.

  When the card is received in the card unit 21TM050 and the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated and the ball lending switch signal is input while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 The PRDY signal is output to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the ON state of the PRDY signal. That is, the BRDY signal is turned on. After a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 outputs a BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the ON state. That is, the BRQ signal is turned on.

  The payout control board 21TM037 outputs an EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, and the BRQ signal are all in the ON state and the connection confirmation command is being received. Is turned on, and when the fall (OFF) of the BRQ signal from the card unit 21TM050 is detected, the payout motor 21TM289 is driven to pay out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of game media to the player.

  As described above, even during the period in which the setting control mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the game control microcomputer 100 continuously transmits the connection confirmation command, thereby continuously receiving the connection confirmation command. On the control microcomputer 21TM370 side, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned on. In this way, even during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the payout control of the game medium by the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 can be executed, and the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is set. The control load for preventing the payout control from being executed during the controlled period can be reduced. In addition, during the period in which the setting is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the communication function between the card unit 21TM050 and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be checked at the same time, and workability can be improved. it can.

  The CPU 103 continues to transmit the connection confirmation command even after ending the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Based on continuing to receive the connection confirmation command from the game control microcomputer 100, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the ON state of the PRDY signal when the payout operation is possible.

  Note that when the payout of a predetermined number of game media is completed and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped in the period in which the control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control board 21TM037 stops outputting the EXS signal. . That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state. That is, the BRDY signal is turned off. As described above, during the period in which the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the EXS signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state, and accordingly, the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state. When the payout of a predetermined number of game media ends and the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 stops after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the payout control board 21TM037 stops outputting the EXS signal. That is, the EXS signal is turned off. Then, the card unit 21TM050 stops outputting the BRDY signal based on the fact that the EXS signal is in the OFF state. As described above, after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the EXS signal changes from the ON state to the OFF state, and accordingly, the BRDY signal may change from the ON state to the OFF state.

(How to restart ball lending after the end of setting change mode)
Next, FIG. 11-32 shows the processing in the case where the payout is interrupted due to the power cutoff during the ball lending is executed, and the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on thereafter. This will be described specifically. In the example shown in FIG. 11-32, the payout of the game medium is interrupted based on the occurrence of the power supply interruption while the payout of the game medium is executed, the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the power is turned on, and the setting is performed. The suspended payout is resumed after the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  FIG. 11-32 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes the payout of the game medium. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are turned off. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped, and the payout of the game medium is interrupted. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370.

  The unpaid number is updated based on a detection signal from the number-of-payouts count switch 21TM301 input to the I / O port 21TM372f of the payout control board 21TM037 via the relay board 21TM072. More specifically, the number of unpaid items is calculated from a predetermined number of game media to be paid out by the payout motor 21TM289 (that is, a payout number designated by the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), and It is calculated by subtracting the number counted by the 21TM301 (that is, the number of game media actually paid out by the payout motor 21TM289).

  Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process serving as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 11-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  While the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection control signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state, so that the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the state to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 performs the payout control based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without turning the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 completes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal.

  Then, the power supply is restarted, and the payout control is performed based on the fact that the setting change mode or the setting check mode controlled at the time of turning on the power is ended (the connection check signal is turned on and the PRDY signal is turned on). The microcomputer 21TM370 drives the payout motor 21TM289 based on the content of the unpaid number storage buffer stored in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and drives the payout motor 21TM289 one by one until the data of the unpaid number becomes zero. Perform payout operation. As a result, the payout of the game medium that has been interrupted due to the power-off and the subsequent transition to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed. As described above, when the supply of the game medium is interrupted due to the power outage during the execution of the ball lending, even if the setting is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode at the time of power restoration, the setting is not performed. After the end of the change mode or the setting confirmation mode, it is possible to resume the interrupted payout of the game medium and complete the ball lending.

  Here, in the example shown in FIG. 11-32, the payout process is interrupted due to the occurrence of power interruption during the payout process, and is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is restored. After the end of the above, an example in which the interrupted payout process is restarted is shown. However, this power-off is caused by the clerk of the game hall turning off the power switch 21TM055 in order to change or confirm the set value. It may be a power-off that has occurred or a power-off that has occurred due to turning off the power switch 21TM055 with the closing of the game arcade. Not only when the power is cut off, but also during the payout processing, the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, or the opening of the glass door frame 3a. In response to the state being detected, the payout process being executed is interrupted, and thereafter, the control is switched to the setting change mode or the setting check mode.After the end of the setting change mode or the setting check mode, the interrupted payout process is performed. You may make it restart.

(Forced termination of ball rental due to power outage)
Next, with reference to FIGS. 11-33, the processing when the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped) when the power is cut off while the ball rental is being performed and the payout is not restarted after the power is restored will be specifically described. explain. In the example shown in FIG. 11-33, when the power supply is interrupted during the payout of the game medium, the payout being executed is stopped, and when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled after the power is restored, The payout is not restarted and the payout is not restarted even after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  FIG. 11-33 shows the main board 11 (game control microcomputer 100) and the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control) when the payout control board 21TM037 (payout control microcomputer 21TM370) executes the payout of the game medium. FIG. 11 is a timing chart for explaining communication processing performed between the microcomputer 21TM370) and the card unit 21TM050. While the payout control board 21TM037 is executing the payout of the game medium, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the ON state, the PRDY signal and the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037, and the card unit 21TM050. Is in the ON state.

  When the power is cut off during the period in which the payout control board 21TM037 is performing the payout of the game medium, the output of the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is stopped, and the output of the PRDY signal from the payout control board 21TM037 is stopped. You. That is, the PRDY signal is turned off. Then, based on the PRDY signal being in the OFF state, the output of the BRDY signal from the card unit 21TM050 and the output of the EXS signal from the payout control board 21TM037 are stopped. That is, both the BRDY signal and the EXS signal are in the OFF state. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 stops driving the payout motor 21TM289 based on the EXS signal being turned off, and forcibly ends (stops) the payout of the game medium. At this time, the data of the unpaid number is not stored in the unpaid number storage buffer formed in the backup area in the RAM of the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (or the unpaid number storage buffer itself is not provided). Therefore, as shown below, after the power is restored, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is not executed.

  Thereafter, in the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is started, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process serving as a game control main process. Until the CPU 103 executes the serial communication circuit setting process (step S21TM1480) shown in FIG. 11-13, the connection confirmation signal output from the main board 11 to the payout control board 21TM037 is in the OFF state. While the processing in the mode or the setting confirmation mode is being executed, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state.

  Thereafter, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the connection confirmation signal from the main board 11 is in the OFF state. Therefore, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not turn on the PRDY signal. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state but changes the state to the OFF state even when the VL signal is in the ON state, that is, even when the VL signal is electrically connected to the card unit 21TM050. maintain.

  As a result, during the period when the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the card unit 21TM050 performs the payout control based on the fact that the PRDY signal is in the OFF state even if the ball lending switch 21TM062 is operated. The BRDY signal is not output to the substrate 21TM037. That is, the BRDY signal remains OFF. Even if a predetermined delay time has elapsed from this point, the card unit 21TM050 does not output the BRQ signal to the payout control board 21TM037 based on the BRDY signal being in the OFF state. That is, the BRQ signal remains OFF.

  The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 maintains the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 in the OFF state without turning the EXS signal to the card unit 21TM050 based on the fact that both the BRDY signal and the BRQ signal are in the OFF state. Then, based on the EXS signal being in the OFF state, the state in which the driving of the payout motor 21TM289 is stopped is maintained. That is, when the connection confirmation signal is in the OFF state, the PRDY signal, the BRDY signal, the BRQ signal, and the EXS signal are all in the OFF state, and the payout motor 21TM289 is not driven. While the processing is being executed, the payout of the game medium is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 completes the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and executes the serial communication circuit setting processing of step S21TM1480 shown in FIG. When the payout operation is possible, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 turns on the PRDY signal. Since the data of the number of unpaid items is not backed up, a predetermined amount to be paid out in the ball lending process which was executed before the power failure occurred (before being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode upon power restoration). Of the number of game media (that is, the number of payouts specified from the game control microcomputer 100, for example, 25), the payout is not made for the unpaid number that has not been paid out due to the stoppage of the payout (forced termination). Not done. As described above, when the power is cut off during the ball lending, the payout is forcibly terminated (stopped), and thereafter, when the power is restored, the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, the setting change mode or the setting is changed. By not executing the payout of the unpaid number after the confirmation mode is completed, the control of backing up the data of the unpaid number and restarting the payout becomes unnecessary, and the ball lending process can be simplified.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11-33, when the power is cut off during the payout, the data of the unpaid number is not backed up, so that the payout being executed is forcibly terminated (stopped) in the middle. The present invention is not limited to this mode. When the power is cut off, the data of the number of unpaid items is backed up and the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are restored after the power is restored, as in the example shown in FIGS. Under the condition that neither is controlled, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is executed based on the data of the unpaid number that has been backed up (payout is restarted based on the backup data). When the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout of the game media corresponding to the unpaid number is not executed (the payout based on the backup data is not restarted), and the setting is not performed. Do not run the payout of unpaid coin number corresponding to the game medium even after the change mode or setting confirmation mode end may be so.

  In addition, during the game (the state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in such a case, the method of forcibly terminating the ball lending accompanying the shift to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 11-33 can be applied. Further, the PRDY signal can be output (turned on) regardless of whether the connection control signal is input to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 (whether the connection is on or off). Even when such a configuration is adopted, the method of forcibly terminating the ball lending accompanying the shift to the setting change mode shown in FIG. 11-33 can be applied. That is, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not set the PRDY signal to the ON state based on not receiving a connection confirmation signal from the game control microcomputer 100 controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Thereby, it is possible to prevent payout (ball lending) from being executed during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

(Award ball payout control)
FIG. 11-34 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during normal operation. As shown in FIG. 11-34, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK signal transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Is received as the connection OK command. Upon receiving the connection OK command as the received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits again the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal after a lapse of 1 s (1 second) from the reception. The game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 repeatedly execute the above-described connection confirmation communication processing as long as the connection state is normal.

  If there is a prize when the connection confirmation communication processing is not being executed (between the reception of the connection OK command as the received ACK signal and the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal), The control microcomputer 100 sets data indicating the number of winning balls in the winning ball request signal, and transmits the winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command, and pays out the winning ball (winning ball payout operation). Upon completion, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. Upon receiving the prize ball end command as a received ACK signal, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal 1 s (1 second) after the reception.

  Although not shown, a prize is awarded during execution of communication processing for connection confirmation (from transmission of a connection confirmation command as a prize ball request signal to reception of a connection OK command as a received ACK signal). In this case, the game control microcomputer 100 sets the data indicating the number of winning balls to the winning ball request signal, and sends the set winning ball number command as the set winning ball request signal from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. After receiving the connection OK command as a reception ACK signal, the connection control section 21 transmits the connection OK command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. Upon receiving the winning ball number command as the winning ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 pays out the number of winning balls specified by the winning ball number command, and pays out the winning ball (winning ball payout operation). Upon completion, a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. During the execution of the prize ball payout (prize ball payout operation), a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

(Winning is invalid during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode)
FIG. 11-35 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. In the main board 11, when power supply from a predetermined power supply board is started, the game control microcomputer 100 is activated, and the CPU 103 executes a predetermined process as a game control main process.

  As described above, until the CPU 103 executes the interrupt permission (step S21TM1540) shown in FIG. 11-13, the first starting port switch 22A, the second starting port switch 22B, the first general winning opening switch to the fourth winning port switch. A special symbol process including a jackpot determination process and the like, in which the switch process (step S21TM1620 shown in FIGS. 11 to 14) for confirming the state of each of the general winning opening switch and the count switch 23 (the presence or absence of a detection signal) is not executed. The processing (step S21TM1690 shown in FIGS. 11 to 14) and the like are not executed. Therefore, while the CPU 103 is executing the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 does not detect the detection signal output from each switch, and does not execute the big hit determination processing or the like. That is, during the period in which the game medium is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the winning is invalid even if the game medium passes through each winning opening. Further, since the switch process is not executed, the detection of the game ball by the outlet switch 21TM070 is not executed, and the totaling of the base is not executed. In other words, until the interruption permission is executed, the tabulation of each item such as the connection ratio, the winning combination, and the base is not required. , And the processing load on the CPU 103 can be reduced.

  During the period in which the game is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 does not execute the switch process and the special symbol process process, thereby invalidating the winning based on the game medium passing through each winning opening. And That is, it does not transmit the winning ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and does not execute the big hit determination processing or the like. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not drive the payout motor 21TM289 based on not receiving the winning ball number command from the game control microcomputer 100. That is, even if the game medium passes through each winning opening during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the payout control of the prize ball is not executed.

  When the CPU 103 finishes the processing in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the first start port switch 22A, the second start port switch 22B, the first to fourth general winning port switches to the fourth general winning port switch, and the count switch 23 A switch process for confirming the state of each switch (presence or absence of a detection signal) can be executed, it can be detected that the game medium has passed through each winning opening, and a prize ball number command (and a connection confirmation command) can be transmitted. Become. In addition, it becomes possible to execute a special symbol process including a jackpot determination process.

  The game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 which has received the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal receives the ACK. A connection OK command is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100 as a signal. At this time, when the game medium passes through any of the winning holes (when a winning is generated), the CPU 103 detects the winning by executing a switch process, and the microcomputer 100 for game control controls the gaming control microcomputer 100 as a winning ball request signal. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which has transmitted the prize ball number command to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 and received the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, drives the payout motor 21TM289 to drive a predetermined number (for example, three). Pay out game media. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out a predetermined number of game media transmits a winning ball end command as a received ACK signal.

  If the switch process is executed during the setting change mode period in which the setting value may be changed, the jackpot determination random number is extracted, and the jackpot determination is performed based on the jackpot determination random number. In the case where the big hit is determined based on the big hit determination random number which is a big hit with the set value before the change but is not a big hit with the set value after the change (the set value after the determination), Although the setting value of (1) does not result in a big hit, there may be a case where the big hit determination is executed based on the big hit determination random number which becomes the big hit with the changed set value (set value after determination). That is, in these cases, the relationship between the execution timing of the big hit determination and the set value becomes complicated, and the player or the playground may be disadvantaged.

  In this embodiment, when the game mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the payout of the prize ball based on the passing of the game ball through each winning port is not performed, and the big hit determination process is not performed. Is prevented from complicating the relationship between the execution timing and the set value, and disadvantages of the player or the playground are prevented.

  In this embodiment, in addition to the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed, in the setting check mode in which the set value is displayed but cannot be changed, similarly, the winning is invalidated, and the big hit determination process is not performed. I have to. Unlike the setting change mode, the setting check mode can be controlled when the game control timer interrupt process is executed instead of when the power is turned on, and the switch period is controlled during the setting check mode. If the special symbol process can be executed, a completely different control from the setting change mode is required, and a problem arises in that the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 increases.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, even in the setting confirmation mode, control can be performed only at the time of turning on the power, similarly to the setting change mode. By not executing the processing, the processing is made common and the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 is reduced.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11-12 and 11-13, the timer interrupt setting is performed after the processing of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed (step S21TM1500). . Therefore, since the game control timer interrupt process itself is not executed, the switch process and the special symbol process process in the game control timer interrupt process are not executed, and the game control timer interrupt process is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Winning in has been disabled. On the other hand, when the game is stopped due to a magnetic error, a radio wave error, a vibration error, or the like, whether a game stop error has occurred during the period in which the game control timer interrupt process is being executed, that is, during the game. If it is determined (step S21TM1615) that a game stop error has occurred (step S21TM1615), subsequent switch processing (step S21TM1620) and special symbol processing (step S21TM) in the same interrupt processing are performed. S21TM1690) is not executed, so that the winning is invalidated. As described above, the method of invalidating the winning (stopping the game) differs between the case where the control is performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode and the case where the game stop error occurs.

  Note that by stopping the transmission of the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the period in which the game control microcomputer 100 is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, The payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not transmit a connection OK command as a received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Therefore, the microcomputer 100 for game control controls the microcomputer 21TM370 for payout as a prize ball request signal based on the fact that the connection OK command has not been received during the period of being controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. By not transmitting the award ball number command, it is possible to prevent the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 from executing the payout control of the game medium. As described above, based on the fact that the game control microcomputer 100 does not output the connection confirmation command and the prize ball number command as the prize ball request signal, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 does not execute the payout control, Winning can be invalidated.

  Note that, during a game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 may be operated to control the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. . Even when such a configuration is adopted, the method shown in FIGS. 11-35 can be applied, and based on the control in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the game control microcomputer 100 , Switch processing and special symbol processing are preferably not executed.

  In addition, a configuration in which the game control microcomputer 100 can execute a switch process while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (a configuration in which it is possible to detect that the game medium has passed each winning opening). It is good. When such a configuration is adopted, as described above, the transmission of the prize ball number command and the connection confirmation command is stopped while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, so that the payout control is performed. The payout is invalidated without causing the microcomputer 21TM370 to execute the payout control, and the special symbol process is not executed. Then, when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the transmission of the winning ball number command and the connection confirmation command is resumed in a state where the switch processing can be executed, and the special symbol process processing is executed.

(Payout restriction method during detection of gaming machine frame / door frame opening)
FIG. 11-36 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception of signals between the game control microcomputer 100 and the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame / door frame. As described above, when the game control microcomputer 100 transmits the connection confirmation command as the prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370, the reception ACK transmitted from the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 during the normal operation. A connection OK command is received as a signal. At this time, when a clerk of the game hall opens the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 provided in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 causes the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door. An open state of the frame 3a is detected.

  In the state in which the gaming machine frame 3 is open (and in the case where the glass door frame 3a and the upper plate are integrated, the state in which the glass door frame 3a is open), award balls to be paid out Is not physically connected to the path where the flowing prize balls are stored.If the prize balls are paid out in this state, the game media reaches the upper plate. Without falling. Here, in a state where the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is open, the first starting winning opening, the second starting winning opening, the first general winning opening to the fourth general winning opening, and the large winning opening. When the passage of the game medium is detected at any one of the winning ports, the game control microcomputer 100 transmits a prize ball number command as a prize ball request signal to the payout control microcomputer 21TM370. The payout control microcomputer 21TM370, which detects the open state of the frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, does not execute the payout control of the game medium, and sends a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal to the game control microcomputer 100. Send to This prize ball preparation command is issued until the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 no longer detects the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, that is, the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a. Transmission to the game control microcomputer 100 is continued until the state is closed.

  In this manner, during the period in which the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is in the open state, even if the game medium passes through each winning opening and detects a winning, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 sets the payout motor 21TM289. Is not executed without driving the prize ball. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100.

  When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 activates the payout motor 21TM289. It is driven to execute a payout control of a predetermined number (a number specified by a prize ball number command) of prize balls according to a prize during a period in which the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected. . Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the predetermined number of game media transmits a winning ball end command as a received ACK signal.

  When detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a during the payout of the prize ball, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 suspends the payout of the prize ball, and The data of the unpaid number out of the number specified by the number command is stored in the backup area in the RAM. Then, a prize ball preparation command as a received ACK signal is transmitted to the game control microcomputer 100. When the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 included in the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 finishes detecting the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 activates the payout motor 21TM289. It drives and executes the payout control of the game media corresponding to the number of unpaid. Then, the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 that has paid out the game medium transmits a prize ball end command as a received ACK signal.

  It should be noted that, during the game (a state in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed), a configuration is adopted in which the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be controlled to the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. Even in this case, the payout restriction method during the detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame / door frame shown in FIG. 11-36 can be applied. In this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are provided on the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and operate as long as the gaming machine frame 3 that can be opened by a predetermined key operation is not opened. It is considered impossible. Therefore, in order to control the pachinko gaming machine 1 in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the gaming machine frame 3 must be opened, and during the period in which the pachinko gaming machine 1 is controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, Normally, the machine frame 3 is open. During the period in which the payout control microcomputer 21TM370 detects that the gaming machine frame 3 is in the open state, the drive of the payout motor 21TM289 is restricted so that the payout of the prize balls is not executed. As a result, the payout of the prize balls during the period when the setting change mode is being controlled and the period when the setting confirmation mode is being controlled are restricted.

  Next, control in the case where power is cut off during the setting change mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-37 (1) and (2).

  FIGS. 11-37 (1) and (2) show the patterns related to the power-off in different charts based on the difference in the situation at the time of the power-off. The power-off pattern shown in FIG. 11-37 (1) indicates control when power-off occurs in a state where “set value confirmation” is not performed during “setting value change”, and power-off recovery is performed. The set value at the time becomes the set value at the time of the previous power-on. Further, the power-off pattern shown in FIG. 11-37 (2) shows the control when the power-off occurs in the situation where “set value decision” has been performed during “the setting value is being changed”. The set value at the time of power recovery is the set value at the time of power failure.

  In other words, FIG. 11-37 (1) shows a setting in the case where the power is cut off in a state where there is no “set value confirmation” operation in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated to the OFF state (the lock switch 21TM051 remains in the ON state). FIG. 11-37 (2) shows the control related to the set value when the power is cut off after the operation of “set value determination” in which the lock switch 21TM051 is operated to the OFF state. Is shown.

  FIGS. 11-37 (1) and (2) show various situations in the setting change work from the top to the bottom in the order of occurrence (see the “Order” and “Status” columns). ). In addition, in FIGS. 11-37 (1) and (2), the ON / OFF state of the lock switch 21TM051 in each situation (orders 1 to 8) is shown in the column of “lock switch”. In the column of “set value”, set value data (set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) in each situation is shown. In the column of “set value display” in the figure, the display contents (set values stored in the setting information temporary storage area) of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) in each situation are shown. I have.

  When the setting is changed, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on (order 1), as shown at the top of the “status” column in FIG. 11-37 (1). As shown in the “lock switch” column, the lock switch 21TM051 at this time is in the ON state. In FIG. 11-37 (1), the “set value” at the time of “power-on” in order 1 is “1” because the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 at this time is “1”. , "1".

  Also, the display content of the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) shown in the column of "set value display" is blank (blank) just at the time of turning on the power at this stage. Since the process of reading and displaying the set value stored in the set value storage area (step S21TM1150) is not performed, it indicates that the display of the set value has not been started.

  After the “power-on” status, the “setting change mode starts” status (order 2). Then, in the “setting change mode start”, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), the “lock switch” column is “ON”, and the “setting value” column is the RAM 102. Is set to “1” based on the fact that the set value is not changed from the set value stored in the set value storage area of the set value storage area of the RAM 102 as described above. Is set to “1” based on the fact that the setting value read from the setting information and stored in the setting information temporary storage area is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A).

  Subsequently, when the setting value is being changed (order 3), the “lock switch” column remains “ON” and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated. As shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, so that the “setting value” column remains “1”, but the setting information is temporarily stored. By changing the set value stored in the area from “1” to “2”, the “set value display” column (set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) The selected value changes to “2”.

  Furthermore, when the status of “setting value is being changed” (order 4) is reached, the “lock switch” column remains “ON”, and when the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated, As shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), since the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed, the "set value" column remains "1". Is changed from “2” to “3”, the “set value display” column (set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is selected. To the new value "3".

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), when the power is turned off during “change of the set value” (order 5), the operation for finalizing the set value is not performed, and the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is set. Has not been executed (the process of step S21TM1190 for finalizing the set value), the column of “set value” remains “1”. That is, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 maintains the state of “1” when the power is turned on. Here, the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased due to the occurrence of the power interruption.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), when the lock switch 21TM051 remains ON and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON and power is turned on (order 6), then In the “setting change mode start” situation (order 7), the setting value (“1” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read out and stored in the setting information temporary storage area. Is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), the "set value" column remains "1", and the "set value display" column also becomes "1". Note that, in the order 7, the same applies to the case where the setting is changed to the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode.

  As described above, when the power is turned on, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and the setting change operation is not completed (the lock switch 21TM051 is not switched to the OFF state). Since the set value stored in the storage area has not been changed, the set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A) when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode after the restoration of the power is: The setting values stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 at the time of the previous power-on (before the power-off occurs) are used. As described above, it is possible to appropriately set a set value in the case where power is cut off while being controlled in the setting change mode.

  Next, control in a case where power is cut off after the set value is determined will be described with reference to FIG. 11-37 (2). The description of the processing part common to the case where the power supply is cut off before the set value is determined will be omitted. When the power is cut off after the set value is determined, it is assumed that the “set value change” shown in order 5 is performed after the “setting value is being changed” shown in order 4. Here, immediately before the operation for fixing the set value is performed, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is “1”, and the set value ( The display monitor 21TM029 (the set value displayed on the first display unit 21TM029A) is in the state of “3”. Then, during the setting change mode, the “lock switch” column is set to “OFF” based on turning off the lock switch 21TM051.

  That is, in the setting change mode, when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off (YES in step S21TM1180), the setting value “1” stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is stored in the setting information temporary storage area. The stored set value (set value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A)) is overwritten by "3", and the set value is determined (step S21TM1190). As a result, “3” is stored as the set value in the set value storage area of the RAM 102.

  Then, if a power failure occurs in this state (order 6), the process of overwriting the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 (the process of step S21TM1190 for fixing the set value) is executed. The column of “setting value” is “3”. That is, when the power is turned off, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is changed to “3” which is different from the value when the power is turned on. Here, the set value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is erased due to the occurrence of the power interruption.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 11-37 (2), when the lock switch 21TM051 is switched from the OFF state to the ON state and the power is turned on (order 7), the status of the “setting change mode start” (the order 7) In order 8), the setting value (“3” in this example) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 is read and stored in the setting information temporary storage area, and the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). ), The “set value” column is “3”, and the “set value display” column is also “3”. Note that, in the order 8, the same applies to the case where the setting is changed to the setting confirmation mode instead of the setting change mode.

  As described above, when the lock switch 21TM051 is turned off without turning off the lock switch 21TM051 while being controlled in the setting change mode, the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off. The setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 has not been changed since the power was turned on, and the setting value stored in the setting information temporary storage area is deleted. Therefore, a clerk of a game arcade may erroneously shift the gaming machine to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, and further perform a setting change operation (operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052). However, by subsequently turning off the power switch 21TM055, the change of the set value can be stopped to return to the state before shifting to the setting change mode.

  The transition to the setting change mode and the transition to the setting confirmation mode involve power-off (including turning off the power switch 21TM055) and subsequent power-on, so that the state of the gaming machine is unstable. The handling of the set value in such an unstable state becomes a problem, but as shown in FIG. 11-37 (1), the lock switch 21TM051 is not turned off and the power supply is turned off. When a power failure occurs, the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is not changed from the time of power-on, so that the set value can be appropriately determined and the control of the set value becomes unstable. Therefore, it is possible to execute appropriate control relating to the set value.

  FIG. 11-38 is an effect device of the pachinko gaming machine 1 when the lock switch 21TM051 or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is operated during a game (a state in which a game control timer interrupt process can be executed). An example is shown in which (the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp 9) notifies that an operation for changing the set value has been performed.

  FIG. 11-38 (1) shows a state in which a decorative symbol is variably displayed on the image display device 5 during a game. At this time, the CPU 103 of the game control microcomputer 100 is executing a game control timer interrupt process. The main board 11 (CPU 103) detects that the lock switch 21TM051 has been operated (switched from the OFF state to the ON state) during the game (for example, during the variable display of a special symbol) (game control). (Step S21TM1660 of timer interrupt processing for game), and transmits a lock switch operation command indicating that lock switch 21TM051 has been operated to effect control board 12 (CPU 120 for effect control) (step S21TM1710 of timer interrupt processing for game control). ), When it is detected that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated (step S21TM1660 of the game control timer interrupt process), the setting changeover switch operation indicating that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated Command to the production control board 12 And transmits to the effect control CPU 120) (step a game control timer interruption process S21TM1710). That is, a lock switch operation command and / or a setting changeover switch operation command are transmitted to notify that an operation for changing the setting value has been performed.

  As shown in FIG. 11-38 (2), the effect control board 12 (the effect control CPU 120) receives the lock switch operation command and / or the setting changeover switch operation command, and performs the setting change mode and It is possible to specify that an operation for changing the set value has been performed, and to notify the user of the fact that control is not performed in any of the setting check modes. For example, based on the reception of the lock switch operation command, the image display device 5 executes an abnormal operation warning notification that displays the characters “lock switch operation detected.” Also, based on the reception of the setting changeover switch operation command, an abnormal operation warning notification displaying the character “Operation of the setting changeover switch has been detected.” Is executed.

  In this example, based on the reception of both the lock switch operation command and the setting changeover switch operation command, the effect control CPU 120 detects the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch as the abnormal operation warning notification. Are displayed on the image display device 5. In the abnormal operation warning notification, since the display priority is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern (the displayed layer is higher than the background image and the decorative pattern), as shown in FIG. Even during the variable display of the symbol, the clerk at the game hall, etc., confirms that the operation for changing the set value has been performed even though it is not controlled in any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode. By grasping clearly, it is possible to confirm whether or not fraud has been performed. Note that the speaker 8L, 8R outputs a sound (for example, a sound indicating that the operation of the lock switch and the setting changeover switch has been detected) to notify that the operation for changing the set value has been detected, and outputs the game effect lamp 9. May be emitted in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a red blinking mode) to notify that an operation for changing the set value has been detected.

  In this embodiment, only when the power is turned on (before the game control timer interrupt processing is executed), the configuration can be set to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Normally, the setting value is changed or confirmed. (Operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052) is not performed during a period in which the game control timer interrupt process can be executed. Accordingly, the operation of the lock switch 21TM051 and the operation of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are performed during the period in which the special symbol and the decorative symbol are variably displayed or the period in which the normal symbol is variably displayed. In such a case, there is a possibility that the setting value is being illegally changed.

  In this embodiment, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are operated at a timing other than the time when the power is turned on or during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled. Informs that an operation for changing the set value and an operation for confirming the set value have been performed on the image display device 5, which is the largest display device provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, to detect the fraud. I try to deter them.

  Further, as described above, when the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are operated, the gaming machine frame 3 is normally in an open state, so that the gaming machine frame / door frame is opened. The open state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the sensor 21TM300, and the fact is notified. In addition, as described above, ball lending is interrupted or stopped, and award ball payout is also interrupted or stopped. However, with respect to the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a predetermined position on the gaming island, the gaming machine frame 3 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at a position facing the predetermined position on the gaming island is opened. Thus, the back side of the gaming board 2 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 installed at the predetermined position can be seen from the position facing the predetermined position, and the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch ( Setting switch 21TM052 can be operated. That is, even when the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at a predetermined position does not detect the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3, the lock switch 21TM051 of the pachinko gaming machine 1 at the predetermined position and In some cases, the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 can be operated.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the lock switch 21TM051 and / or the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 are set regardless of whether the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300. When the operation is performed, the fact that an operation for changing the set value and an operation for confirming the set value are performed is notified to enhance the deterrence of fraud.

(Setting change corresponding signal)
Next, various signals output from the information output terminal of the main board 11 will be specifically described. As shown in FIG. 11-39, the information output circuit 112 in this embodiment is provided with ten information output terminals from a first terminal to a tenth terminal, and outputs a signal corresponding to each information output terminal. Is done.

  In the example of pattern 1 shown in FIG. 11-39 (1), a prize ball signal is output from the first terminal. The prize ball signal is a pulse signal output every time ten prize balls are paid out, and has a pulse width of 0.1 second. A game machine frame / door frame open signal is output from the second terminal. The gaming machine frame / door frame opening signal is turned on when the gaming machine frame 3 opening state is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, and the opening state of the glass door frame 3a is detected. It is also in the ON state when it is on.

  From the third terminal, a signal for all symbol determination times is output. The all symbol determination count signal is output when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed and the display result is derived and displayed (when it is determined), and the variable display of the second special symbol is executed to derive the display result. This is a pulse-like signal output when displayed (when it is determined), and has a pulse width of 0.5 seconds. From the fourth terminal, an all starting port signal is output. The all-starting-port signal is a pulse-shaped signal that is output when a game ball is won to the first starting winning port and is also output when a game ball is winning to the second starting winning port. And the pulse width is 0.1 second.

  One signal of the big hit is output from the fifth terminal. The big hit 1 signal is turned on when the big hit game state is controlled. Two signals are output from the sixth terminal. The big hit 2 signal is turned on when being controlled to the big hit gaming state, and is also turned on when being controlled to the high base state. That is, a period in which one big hit signal is in the OFF state and two big hit signals are in the ON state can be specified as the high base state.

  A setting change correspondence signal is output from the seventh terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal that is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode and is also turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse form (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, as described later. It is possible.

  An out signal is output from the eighth terminal. The out signal is a pulse signal output every time 10 out balls (game balls fired in the game area and guided to the outlet) are detected by the outlet switch 21TM070, and the pulse width is 0. .1 second. A winning signal is output from the ninth terminal. A winning signal is generated each time a game ball wins in each winning opening (first starting winning opening, second starting winning opening, large winning opening, first general winning opening to fourth general winning opening) (corresponding to each winning opening). This is a pulse-shaped signal that is output each time a winning is detected by the switch) and is output each time 10 winning balls are paid out. The pulse width of the winning signal is 0.1 second.

  A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned on for 30 seconds when an initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. In addition, when an injustice is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. In the case where an illegal act is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal winning is generated is included, and an abnormal frequency is displayed in each winning opening (for example, a game ball is played in the first starting winning opening at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds). An abnormal winning is determined based on the fact that the game ball has won in the case of winning). In addition, this includes the case where the switch abnormality detection has occurred, and the period in which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt process is performed 10 times or more consecutively. (1 When the start port switch is in the ON state, etc.), it is determined that the switch is abnormal. When the magnetic sensor detects the abnormal magnetism, based on the occurrence of the game stop target error, the ON state continues until the power is turned off, and when the abnormal magnetism is not detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it is ON for 4 minutes.

  Further, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 11-39 (1), the security signal is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode, and is also turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. .

  As described above, the security signal can be output from the tenth terminal, and the setting change correspondence signal can be output from the seventh terminal. It is possible to notify to the outside that the control has been performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode (the processing related to the setting change has been executed). Also, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the seventh terminal is temporarily turned off, and then stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 from the same seventh terminal. Since the number of pulse-like setting change correspondence signals corresponding to the current setting value is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (1), when the mode shifts to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, a setting corresponding change signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, from the tenth terminal. Outputs a security signal. Then, based on the execution of the RAM clear, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting change mode.

  As shown in FIG. 11-40 (2), when the mode shifts to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, a setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Is output. Then, based on the fact that the RAM clear is not executed, the setting change corresponding signal and the security signal are simultaneously turned off with the end of the setting confirmation mode. Here, if the RAM is cleared after the power is turned on and the control mode is set to the setting confirmation mode (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the example shown in FIG. Similarly to the above, the security signal is kept ON for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned OFF with the end of the setting confirmation mode.

  When the RAM is cleared without switching to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on. Does not turn on.

  As described above, the security signal is also in the ON state while being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. Therefore, even when the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the external device is configured not to perform the processing based on the input of the security signal. Thus, it is possible to recognize that control may be performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  The setting change corresponding signal is turned off when the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, but the security signal is changed in the setting change mode (or the parity in the setting confirmation mode) based on the execution of the RAM clear. It remains ON for 30 seconds after the end of (if the result of the check is not normal). On the other hand, when the RAM is cleared without being controlled by any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds from when the power is turned on. Therefore, on the external device side to which the security signal is input, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, the RAM clear is executed without being controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. It is possible to recognize that there is a possibility. On the other hand, when the input period of the security signal exceeds 30 seconds, it is possible to recognize that the control may be performed in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the input period of the security signal reaches 30 seconds. If not, it is possible to recognize that the RAM clear may not have been executed after being controlled to the setting confirmation mode. That is, when the input period of the security signal is about 30 seconds, it is determined that the RAM clear may have been executed without being controlled by the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. When the security signal can be recognized by the device and the input period of the security signal is less than 30 seconds, the management device can recognize that the device may be temporarily controlled to the setting confirmation mode. If the period exceeds 30 seconds, the management apparatus can recognize that the setting change mode may have been controlled. Therefore, it is possible to distinguish what control is performed by the gaming machine on the outside based on the output period of the security signal of the gaming machine.

  Therefore, even when the external device does not assume the input of the setting change corresponding signal and is configured not to execute the processing based on the input of the setting change corresponding signal, at least the external device is configured not to perform the processing based on the input of the security signal. Thus, the possibility of executing the RAM clear and the possibility of being controlled in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be distinguished and recognized.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (3), a configuration in which the security signal is not output during a period in which the setting confirmation mode is controlled may be adopted. This configuration includes a configuration in which a security signal is output during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode, and a period in which the security signal is not output during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. Does not output the security signal and does not output the security signal even during the period in which the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. Specifically, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. When the setting change corresponding signal is turned off with the end of the setting check mode, the off state of the security signal is maintained based on the fact that the RAM is not cleared. That is, when the mode is shifted to the setting confirmation mode, the security signal is not output on condition that the RAM clear is not executed.

  As described above, in the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting control mode is being controlled, the RAM clear is executed after the power is turned on and the control is switched to the setting confirmation mode, as shown in FIG. In this case (NO in step S21TM1320 or NO in step S21TM1330), the security signal is ON for 30 seconds from the end of the setting confirmation mode (OFF state of the setting change corresponding signal).

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (4), a configuration may be employed in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting change mode is controlled. That is, when the mode is changed to the setting change mode when the power is turned on, the setting correspondence change signal is output from the seventh terminal, but the security signal is not output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the fact that the RAM has been cleared with the end of the setting change mode, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds even after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. In the configuration in which the security signal is not output during the period in which the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is controlled, if the RAM is cleared without shifting to any of the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. The security signal is turned on for 30 seconds after the power is turned on, but the setting change corresponding signal is not turned on.

  As described above, while the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is being controlled, the setting change corresponding signal is set to the ON state while the security signal is set to the OFF state, and when the RAM is cleared, the setting change mode or the setting change mode is set. By turning on the security signal for 30 seconds after the setting confirmation mode ends (after the setting change corresponding signal is turned off), when one signal is on, the other signal is turned off. Relationship. Due to such a relationship, the signal output control is simplified (the output control is simplified because both signals are not turned on at the same time), and the control period to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is clarified in the external device. And that the initialization process has been executed upon termination of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 11-40 (6), when the opening state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a is detected by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300, the game is started from the second terminal. A machine frame / door frame open signal is output, and at the same time, a security signal is output from the tenth terminal. Then, based on the fact that the detection of the open state of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a by the gaming machine frame / door frame opening sensor 21TM300 is completed with the closing of the gaming machine frame 3 or the glass door frame 3a, After the machine frame / door frame open signal is turned off, the security signal is turned on for 30 seconds.

  Here, in the example of the pattern 1 shown in FIG. 11-39 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is output from the seventh terminal, and the security signal is output from the tenth terminal. There is a case where it is difficult to assign an output terminal dedicated to the setting change corresponding signal due to the restriction on the assignment of the setting change corresponding signal. The example of the pattern 2 shown in FIG. 11-39 (2) shows an example in which the setting change corresponding signal is also output from the tenth terminal from which the security signal is output.

  In the pattern 2, the first to sixth terminals, the eighth terminal, and the ninth terminal are the same as in the signal assignment in the pattern 1. In pattern 2, unlike pattern 1, a high base signal is output from the seventh terminal. The high base signal is turned on when being controlled to the high base state. A security signal is output from the tenth terminal. The security signal is a signal that is turned on for 30 seconds when an initialization process (RAM clear in step S21TM1410) is executed when the power is turned on. In addition, when an injustice is detected, it is turned on for 4 minutes. In the case where an illegal act is detected, for example, a case where an abnormal winning is generated is included, and an abnormal frequency is displayed in each winning opening (for example, a game ball is played in the first starting winning opening at a frequency of 15 times or more per 30 seconds). An abnormal winning is determined based on the fact that the game ball has won in the case of winning). In addition, this includes the case where the switch abnormality detection has occurred, and the period in which the switch corresponding to each winning opening is in the winning detection state is abnormal (for example, the game control timer interrupt process is performed 10 times or more consecutively. (1 When the start port switch is in the ON state, etc.), it is determined that the switch is abnormal. When the magnetic sensor detects the abnormal magnetism, based on the occurrence of the game stop target error, the ON state continues until the power is turned off, and when the abnormal magnetism is not detected after the power is turned on again ( After the error is cleared), it is ON for 4 minutes.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 11-39 (2), a setting change corresponding signal is output from the tenth terminal. The setting change corresponding signal is a signal that is turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting change mode and is also turned on during the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode. The setting change corresponding signal can be output in a pulse form (special mode) after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, as described later. It is possible. Therefore, a security signal and a setting change correspondence signal are output from the tenth terminal. That is, the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal are output from the common terminal.

  As described above, since the security signal and the setting change correspondence signal can be output from the tenth terminal, it is possible to notify the possibility that an illegal act has been performed to the outside, and to provide an output terminal dedicated to the setting change correspondence signal. Without this, it is possible to notify outside that there is a possibility that the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode has been controlled (that there is a possibility that a process related to the setting change has been executed). Further, with the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal output from the tenth terminal is temporarily turned OFF (when the RAM clear is executed, the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is disabled). After 30 seconds from the end, the signal output from the tenth terminal is turned off), and thereafter, from the same tenth terminal, the number of pulse-shaped pulses corresponding to the current set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 Since the setting change corresponding signal is output, the setting value can be notified to the outside. Since the setting change corresponding signal is transmitted to the management device together with the game machine number (vehicle number) via the relay device provided on the gaming machine island, the management device sets the set value based on the machine number and the setting change corresponding signal. By displaying the set value and the predetermined set value in association with each other, it is possible to perform a process of displaying the set value in a comparable manner. As a result, the actual setting values of the plurality of gaming machines can be easily managed by the manager of the gaming arcade through the management device, and the setting values determined in advance by the manager and the settings changed in the setting change work. The inconsistency with the value can be grasped by the administrator. Then, when such inconsistency has occurred, by performing setting confirmation or setting change work again for the gaming machine, it is possible to achieve appropriate management of settings for a plurality of gaming machines in the game arcade. it can.

  As described above, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off with the end of the setting change mode and the end of the setting confirmation mode, but thereafter, the signal corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. Output in a special manner. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 11-41, a number of pulses corresponding to the set value are output as the setting change corresponding signal in the special mode. In this example, the same pulses as the number of set values are output. The width of the pulse is, for example, 0.1 second. For example, when the set value is 3, a pulse having a width of 0.1 second is output three times at predetermined intervals (for example, 0.5 second intervals). This makes it possible to easily specify the set value of each gaming machine in an external device such as a hall computer.

  As shown in FIG. 11-42 (1), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the power is turned on and the setting change mode is controlled. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, in the setting change mode, it is assumed that the setting change mode ends without the setting value being changed. With the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off. However, based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1, the setting change corresponding signal in the special mode is set. Is output as one pulse.

  As described above, it is possible to notify the outside whether or not the setting change mode is controlled by the setting change corresponding signal, and to set the value at the end of the setting change mode (when the setting value is changed, (A set value after change) can be notified to the outside, and a signal for notifying whether or not the mode is controlled to the setting change mode and a signal for notifying the set value are output from a common information output terminal. Becomes possible.

  Further, in this embodiment, not only when the setting change mode and the setting confirmation mode are completed, but also at a predetermined timing, a pulse corresponding to the set value is output as a setting change corresponding signal in a special mode. You. Specifically, events related to the gaming state, such as being controlled to the jackpot gaming state, ending the jackpot gaming state, ending the high base state, and increasing the number of paid prize balls by 1000. When an event related to a gaming machine error such as detection of the opening of the gaming machine frame 3, detection of the opening of the glass door frame 3 a, detection of a magnetic abnormality, etc. (When it occurs), a setting change corresponding signal in a special mode corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is output. In the example shown in FIG. 11-42 (1), one pulse is output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal in response to the occurrence of a big hit.

  Thereby, in the external device, it is possible to secure an opportunity to grasp the setting value of each gaming machine. For example, when the setting change corresponding signal is not properly input at the end of the setting change mode, the external device Even if the set value cannot be specified on the side, the set value can be specified at a predetermined subsequent timing, and the prevention of fraudulent change of the set value by an inappropriate method can be enhanced.

  In the example shown in FIG. 11-42 (2), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on when the power is turned on and the setting change mode is controlled. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. Then, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 has been changed from 1 to 3 as a result of the change of the set value in the setting change mode. In this case, with the end of the setting change mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned off, and based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 becomes 3, the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. Three pulses are output as a signal. In the example shown in FIG. 11-42 (2), three pulses are output as a special mode setting change corresponding signal in response to occurrence of a big hit.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 11-41 (1), the operation of changing the setting value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) was not performed while the setting change mode was being controlled, and the setting value was not changed. In the case and as shown in FIG. 11-41 (2), an operation of changing the setting value (operation of the setting changeover switch 21TM052) is performed while being controlled in the setting change mode, and the setting value is changed. In either case, after the setting change mode ends, a number of pulse-like setting change corresponding signals corresponding to the set values stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 are output. I have. As described above, when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the common signal output process is executed at the end of the setting change mode regardless of whether the setting change operation or the setting value is actually changed. Therefore, the signal output processing can be simplified.

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 11-42 (3), the setting change corresponding signal is turned on with the control of the setting confirmation mode when the power is turned on. Here, it is assumed that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 when the power is turned on is 1. In the setting confirmation mode, since the setting value is not changed, the setting value stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM 102 remains unchanged at 1. In this case, with the end of the setting confirmation mode, the setting change corresponding signal is temporarily turned OFF, and based on the fact that the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 is 1, the setting change corresponding signal is turned off. Is output as one pulse. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 11-42 (3), one pulse is output as a setting change correspondence signal in a special mode triggered by occurrence of a big hit.

  As described above, it is possible to notify to the outside whether or not the control mode is set to the setting check mode by the setting change corresponding signal, and to set values notified in the setting check mode (setting values stored in the RAM 102 when the power is turned on). A setting value stored in the area, the setting value displayed on the display monitor 21TM029) can be notified to the outside, and a signal notifying whether or not the setting is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, and a setting value Can be output from a common information output terminal.

  In the information terminal assignment pattern 2 shown in FIG. 11-39 (2) described above, when the RAM clear is executed upon the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the signal output from the tenth terminal is output. After 30 seconds from the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, the state becomes the OFF state, and thereafter, from the same tenth terminal, the pulse number (special mode) corresponding to the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102 ) Is output.

(Modification of the game control main process)
Next, another embodiment relating to the game control main process of FIGS. 11-11 to 11-13 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11-43 and 11-44. FIGS. 11-11 to 11-13 show an example in which the initialization processing (RAM clear) is executed after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. As shown in FIGS. 43 and 11-44, after the initialization process (RAM clear) is executed, the mode may be shifted to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode.

  In the game control main process shown in FIG. 11-11, when the CPU 103 sets the RAM 102 to an accessible state (step S21TM1060), the CPU 103 shifts to step S21TM2110 in FIG. The state of the output signal (clear signal) of the switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is confirmed (step S21TM2110).

  When the ON state is detected in checking the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 (YES in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 sets the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 when the power is turned on. A RAM clear flag indicating that the operation has been performed is set (step S21TM2210), and an initialization process is executed (step S21TM2220). A series of processes involved in the initialization process (the processes shown in steps S21TM2220 to S21TM2270) are the same as the processes shown in steps S21TM1410 to S21TM1460 shown in FIGS.

  On the other hand, in the state confirmation of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 in step S21TM2110, if the OFF state is detected (NO in step S21TM2110), the CPU 103 executes the processing of step S21TM2120 and thereafter. I do. The processing shown in step S21TM2120 to step S2170 is the same as the processing shown in step S21TM1230 to step S21TM1370 shown in FIG.

  Then, the CPU 103 determines whether the lock switch 21TM051 is ON after transmitting the backup command at the time of power-off restoration in step S21TM2170 or transmitting the initialization command at power-on in step S21TM2270. (Step S21TM2310 in FIG. 11-44). If the lock switch 21TM051 is not ON (step S21TM2310; NO), the process proceeds to step S21TM2550. If lock switch 21TM051 is ON (step S21TM2310; YES), CPU 103 determines whether or not the RAM clear flag has been set, that is, whether or not clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 has been operated at power-on. Is confirmed (step S21TM2320).

  If the RAM clear flag is set, that is, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has been operated when the power is turned on (YES in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 sets the setting change mode in which the set value can be changed. (Step S21TM2330 to Step S21TM2400). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, and the second condition that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. The processing state is controlled to the setting change mode based on the status. The processing shown in steps S21TM2330 to S21TM2400 related to the setting change mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1130 to S21TM1200 in FIG. Then, after executing the processing in step S21TM2400, the set RAM clear flag is deleted (step S21TM2410), and the flow advances to step S21TM2550.

  If the RAM clear flag has not been set, that is, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 has not been operated when the power is turned on (NO in step S21TM2320), the CPU 103 checks the setting to confirm the setting value. The mode shifts to the mode (step S21TM2510 to step S21TM2540). That is, the CPU 103 satisfies the first condition that the lock switch 21TM051 is ON when the power is turned on, but does not satisfy the second condition that the clear switch (setting switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on. Based on this, the processing state is controlled to the setting confirmation mode. The processing shown in steps S21TM2510 to S21TM2540 related to the setting confirmation mode is the same as the processing shown in steps S21TM1210 to S21TM1240 in FIG. Then, in step S21TM2540, when it is confirmed that lock switch 21TM051 has been turned off (YES in step S21TM2540), the flow proceeds to step S21TM2550.

  Here, if the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is not operated when the power is turned on, it is temporarily determined to be NO in step S21TM2120 or step S21TM2130 in FIG. Is executed, the RAM clear flag is not set. As a result, NO is determined in step S21TM2320, and the mode is not shifted to the setting change mode. As described above, even when the initialization process (initialization of the game state by clearing the RAM) is executed, when the second condition that the clear switch (setting changeover switch) 21TM052 is ON when the power is turned on is not satisfied. Are not controlled by the setting change mode.

  After the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode is completed, or when the lock switch 21TM051 is in the OFF state at the time of turning on the power, a series of processes relating to Steps S21TM2550 to S21TM2620 are performed in Steps S21TM1470 to S21TM1470 shown in FIG. This is the same as the series of processing shown in step S21TM1540, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the example shown in FIGS. 11-43 and 11-44, when the mode is controlled to the setting change mode, the CPU 103 transmits the power-on initialization command (step S21TM2270), and then transmits the setting change mode command (step S21TM2340). ) To transmit a setting command (step S21TM2550). When the mode is controlled to the setting confirmation mode, the CPU 103 transmits a setting confirmation mode command after transmitting a backup command at the time of power-off restoration or an initialization command at the time of power-on (step S21TM2170 or step S21TM2270) (step S21TM2170). S21TM2520), and transmits a setting command (step S21TM2550). Therefore, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting change mode based on the reception of the setting command after receiving the setting change mode command, and can display the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, and the game effect lamp. 9 can notify the end of the setting change mode. Further, the effect control CPU 120 can specify the end of the setting confirmation mode based on the reception of the setting command after receiving the setting confirmation mode command, and the image display device 5, the speakers 8L and 8R, the game effect lamp, and the like. 9 can notify the end of the setting confirmation mode. According to such a configuration, without providing a dedicated command (setting change mode end command or setting check mode end command) for designating that the setting change mode or the setting check mode has ended, the setting command can be received. Since the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode can be specified on the production control CPU 120 side, the number of commands can be suppressed. That is, the control load of the game control microcomputer 100 can be reduced, and the capacity for storing the number of commands can be suppressed.

(Other Modifications Related to Feature 21TM)
In the above-described embodiment, the example in which the switch for changing the set value is common to the clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clear) is not limited to such a form. Is provided on the main board 11 (the game control microcomputer 100 can detect an operation), and is different from a clear switch for initializing the game machine (RAM clearing). It may be. With this configuration, the position of the switch for switching the set value and the position of the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A) are different from the case where the switch for switching the set value is provided on the power supply board. Therefore, when changing the set value, the check of the set value and the switching operation according to the check of the set value are facilitated, and the workability can be improved.

  In the above-described embodiment, an example in which the set value is displayed in the partial display area (first display unit 21TM029A) of the display monitor 21TM029 on which the game information such as the totaled base is displayed is described. The display device is not limited to such a form, and is a display device different from the display monitor 21TM029 on which the aggregated game state is displayed, for example, a dedicated display device for displaying set values, and is provided on the main board 11. The set value may be displayed on a 7-segment display or the like. According to such a configuration, the aggregated game information and the set value can be individually and more clearly understood, so that the operation of changing the set value according to the aggregated game information can be easily performed. And workability can be improved.

  Further, a configuration may be adopted in which a clear switch for initializing the gaming machine (RAM clear) is provided, but a switch for changing the set value is not provided. In such a configuration, the game control microcomputer 100 automatically changes the set values to be displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (the first display unit 21TM029A) in order while being controlled in the setting change mode (for example, 1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 every 5 seconds), and when the lock switch 21TM051 changes from the ON state to the OFF state, it is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A). The set value (the set value stored in the set information temporary storage area) is stored in the set value storage area (the set value stored in the set value storage area is stored in the set information temporary storage area). The set value may be determined by overwriting the set value. The store clerk at the game hall switches the lock switch 21TM051 from the ON state to the OFF state at the timing when the set value to be determined is displayed on the display monitor 21TM029 (first display unit 21TM029A), and the value is displayed at that time. The set value can be determined as the set value of the gaming machine.

  In the above embodiment, the example has been described in which the gaming machine is the pachinko gaming machine 1 that pays out a predetermined number of game media to the upper plate or the lower plate based on the occurrence of a prize, but is not limited to such a form. An enclosed gaming machine may be one in which a gaming medium is sealed in a gaming machine and a score is given based on the occurrence of a prize. In this enclosed gaming machine, information on the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode may be included in the information periodically transmitted from the main board 11 to the card unit 21TM050 via the payout control board 21TM037, For example, being controlled by the setting change mode, being controlled by the setting confirmation mode, being within the period controlled by the setting change mode, being within the period being controlled by the setting confirmation mode, May be included, indicating that an operation for changing the setting has been performed, that the setting change mode has ended, that the setting confirmation mode has ended, and the like. Further, the information output circuit 112 may transmit these pieces of information to a management device such as a hall computer or the like, and the hall computer may specify that each gaming machine is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode. .

  In the above embodiment, the image display device 5 or the like connected to the effect control board 12 is within the period of being controlled in the setting change mode, being within the period of being controlled in the setting confirmation mode, and the like. Is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this mode. The game control microcomputer 100 is configured to control the first special symbol display device 4A and the second special symbol The symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display 20, and the like may notify that the control is being performed in the setting change mode (for example, the 7-segment display may emit light in the first notification mode). Is controlled to the setting confirmation mode by the first special symbol display device 4A, the second special symbol display device 4B, the ordinary symbol display device 20, etc. Notification (for example, emit light to a different second notification manner from the first notification manner the 7-segment display) may be. Further, a display (number of rounds display) for displaying the number of rounds during the big hit game on the pachinko gaming machine 1 and an instruction for the player to launch a game ball in a specific area of the game area (for example, the right game area). If a display (right-handed display) or the like is provided, the display indicates that the processing of the setting change mode is being executed and that the processing of the setting confirmation mode is being executed. The light may be emitted in the embodiment.

  In the above embodiment, when the security signal is turned on when the mode is changed to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode, and the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode ends, the security is changed. An example is shown in which the security signal is continuously turned ON for 30 seconds after the end of the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode without the signal being turned OFF. Alternatively, when the security signal is turned on when the mode is controlled to the setting check mode, and then the RAM is cleared after the setting change mode or the setting check mode ends, the security change signal is turned off. Accordingly, the security signal is temporarily turned off for a predetermined period (for example, 0.5 seconds), and then the security signal is turned off. Utility signal specified period (e.g., 30 seconds) may be turned ON. By using such a signal output method, it is possible to clearly specify the period in which the apparatus is controlled to the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode in an external device such as a hall computer, and to clearly indicate that the RAM clear has been executed. Can be specified.

  Regarding the expected degree suggestion effect shown in FIG. 10-5, each effect mode (black star) is set according to the set value of the gaming machine (the set value stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 102) and the big hit expected degree. May be changed. For example, even when the jackpot expectation degree is low, if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high (for example, 5 or 6), if the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is low (for example, (1 or 2), an expectation degree suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is 3 or more may be executed at a higher rate. With such an effect configuration, even if the display result is lost, the expected value indicating that the number of black stars is 3 or more is executed, so that the set value of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is high. Can be expected from the player, and the player can pay attention to the effect mode (the number of black stars) when the expectation effect indicating effect is executed. In addition, even if the reach of the large hit expectation is low, the expectation suggestion effect in which the number of black stars is large (for example, 3 or more) is executed, so that the player can use the pachinko gaming machine 1 Since it can be expected that the set value is high, the interest can be improved even when the jackpot expectation degree is low.

  In the above-described embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is shown as a gaming machine, but a medal is inserted, a predetermined number of bets is set, and a plurality of types of symbols are rotated in accordance with the operation of the operation lever by the player to play the game. If the combination of stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination when the symbol is stopped in response to the operation of the stop button by the player, a slot machine capable of executing a game in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player (for example, a big machine) The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine in which one or more of bonus, regular bonus, RT, AT, ART, and CZ (hereinafter, bonus etc.) are mounted. In such a slot machine, the rate at which the bonus is established differs according to the set value. The set value can be changed by controlling the slot machine to the setting change mode, and the set value can be changed by controlling the slot machine to the setting check mode. It can be confirmed.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko gaming machine 2 ... Game board 3 ... Game machine frame 4A, 4B ... Special symbol display device 5 ... Image display device 6A ... Winning ball device 6B ... Variable winning ball device 7 ... Special variable winning ball device 8L, 8R ... Speaker 9 ... Game effect lamp 10 ... General winning opening 11 ... Main board 12 ... Effect control board 13 ... Voice control board 14 ... Lamp control board 15 ... Relay board 20 ... Ordinary symbol display 21 ... Gate switch 22A, 22B ... Starting port Switch 23: Count switch 30: Hitting operation handle 31A: Stick controller 31B: Push button 32: Movable body 100: Game control microcomputers 101, 121: ROM
102, 122 ... RAM
103 ... CPU
104, 124 ... random number circuit 105, 125 ... I / O
120 ... CPU for effect control
123 ... display control units 111SG001A-C ... first item 111SG005 ... cursor image 111SG020 ... second item 111SG021A-C ... second item 111SG022X-Z ... second item

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of playing games,
An effect selection means for displaying an item corresponding to each of a plurality of effects of different types so that the player can select the effect, and accepting selection of an effect;
Effect performing means capable of executing the effect accepted by the effect selecting means,
Specific production execution means capable of executing specific production;
With
In the case where the specific effect is executed in the first mode and the case where the specific effect is executed in the second mode, the display mode when the effect selecting means receives the selection of an item is different,
further,
Suggestion effect execution means capable of executing a suggestion effect indicating that it is controlled to an advantageous state advantageous to the player;
Title notification means capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect,
A gaming machine, wherein the title notifying means is capable of notifying a title corresponding to the suggested effect when a predetermined period has elapsed from the start of the suggested effect.